Home

Installation Manual - ServiceNet - T

1. 5 1 1 uS 5 1 2 rvs Key Data dataset 5 1 3 Maintenance of the key 5 1 3 1 e Ig eee 5 1 3 2 Creation of rvs Key Data 5 1 3 3 Initialize Key Datasets 5 1 3 4 Generate a key pair of your nennen 5 1 3 5 Import your own key pair to the key 5 1 3 6 Import a public key of your 5 1 3 7 List all keys of the key management 5 1 3 8 Export all keys from the key management to a sequential file 5 1 3 9 Import keys from a sequential file to the key management 5 1 3 10 Delete key from the key 5 1 4 Detailed description of function Key Data Utility Program 0 54 5 1 4 1 Function GENKENS 5 1 4 2 E 5 1 4 3 FUNCTIONS la e e DES
2. dece deck e deck ecce ec kv e x kx x RR LMTRVSX MODETAB BATCH1 LOGMODE BATCH1 COS BATCH1 FMPROF X 03 TSPROF X 03 PRIPROT X 90 SECPROT X 90 COMPROT X 0040 RUSIZES X 8888 PSNDPAC X 01 PSERVIC X 010000000000000000000000 EJECT MODEEND END tot ox 0X rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit Generation of the X 25 NPSI The following code is an example for the definition of a multi channel link within the NPSI Note that rvs uses only switched virtual circuits SVC s The number of SVC s defined within the NPSI must be at least the same as specified for the rvs start parameter MAXSVC nn see chapter 6 1 e e ee e cede e cede ce ce e ce ce e ce ce e ce ce ee eee eee eee e ee e ce e ce ce e ce ce e ce ce e x kv x x PART OF NPSI GENERATION USED FOR rvs X25 MULTI CHANNEL LINK X30A0 LU NAME X30A0A 15 svc s X25BUILD IDNUMH 00 USED FOR NON SNA SWITCHED JOBCARD NO STAGE 2 JOB MAXPIU 3850 LONGEST PIU THAT ALLOWED MCHCNT 4 NUMBER PHYSICAL LINKS MODEL 3725 COMM CONTROLER SNAP NO DIAGNOSIS SNAP NOT INCLUDED SRCPRFX XN301 SUBAREA TYPSYS OS STAGE2 PROVIDED FOR OS VERSION V4R2 NCP VERSION X25NET DM YES NETWORK SEND LAPB COMMAND NETTYPE 1 TYPE 1 NETWORK CPHINDX 1 1 ENTRY DEFINED FOR VCCPT OUHINDX 1 1 ENTRY FOR OUFT e oe ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce RR AR
3. 136 11 127 23 ODETID ODCDE123XXX A 05 ADDR FTP PC STATION rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 11 12 13 14 15 SID IST VIA BST ADDR INDIRECT STATION ODETID ODCDE123XXX A 05 LINE 0E2 ADDR LINE 0E2 SLAVE YES LINE 001 ADDR LINE 001 SLAVE YES UCBNAME FE3 SID VC2 ADDR LOCAL VIRTUAL STATION VC2 ODETID 00013000001VW 2VHOST TYPE VIRT ACME T RECVPW AAA SENDPW AAA SECURITY EXT COMPRESS EXT SID VL1 ADDR REMOTE VIRTUAL STATION ON LNX USER1 ODETID 00013003210GEDASLUM4UB1 VIA LNX SECURITY EXT COMPRESS EXT PAGA e e e e e RARA RARE RARE RARE BOTTOM OF DATA RII III II II de He II e Ae e de Direct Station Entry BSC Station BST is directly connected In addition to the explicitly coded parameters following default values are valid in this entry ACCESMET BTAM ACTMODE NORMAL AUTODIAL NO LBLKSIZE 2000 LINETYPE S OPTIONS NO PWMOD NO SPEED HIGH Direct Station Entry SNA Station SST is directly connected In addition to the explicitly coded parameters following default values are valid ACTMODE NORMAL AUTOACT NO LBLKSIZE 2000 OPTIONS NO PWMOD NO SPEED HIGH No default value for DIALOPTS because AUTOACT is not requested Direct Station Entry X25 Station XST is directly connected In addition to the explicitly coded parameters following default values are valid ACTMODE NORMAL CR
4. 5 2 2 Hardware Requirements 5 2 3 5 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit 5 3 1 Definition for BSC component of IVS 5 3 1 1 BSC lines without autodial 0 20 0 5 3 1 2 lines with autodial function Interface 25 5 3 1 8 lines with autodial function Interface 250 5 3 2 Definitions for SNA component of rvs 5 3 3 Definitions for X25 component of IVS 5 3 3 1 Definitions for using the X 25 network via 5 3 3 2 Definitions for using the X 25 network via 5 3 3 3 Definitions for using the ISDN 5 3 4 Definitions for the SNA LU6 2 component of 5 3 5 Definitions for TCP IP component 5 5 3 6 Definitions for FTP component of rvs and rvsLight eee 5 3 7 Definitions for rvsWIN
5. Version 2 or following releases e ACF NCP Version 2 or following releases e X 25 NPSI any Release compatible with the Release of ACF NCP For X25 via XOT e for z OS For LU 6 2 component e ACF VTAM Version 3 2 or following releases e ACF NCP Version 4 1 or following releases For TCP IP component e IBM TCP IP for MVS V3R2 or following releases INTERLINK TCP IP Release 4 1 including CISCO IOS for S 390 Release 1 0 For FTP component IBM TCP IP for MVS V3R2 2 2 Hardware Requirements rvs does not need special hardware except TP lines incl modems etc where rvs shall work with For access to files during data transfer any kind of disk drives may be used rvsMVS Installation Manual 2 Installation Requirements 2 3 Licensekey The following member named USER will be shipped in the RVS TABLES dataset This member contains installation depend values 9999999999 Customer Number rvsMVS Product 020100 RELEASE BXSL Included Components TESTINSTALLATION Customer Name Part one Part two reserved reserved reserved reserved reserved Computer Model TESTVERSION Physical CPU Identification 98365 Expiration Date 1 45 203 1 4 6 EE724EAF 74ED1A1B 46931227 A1CAC433 377F50D1 7AD16E85 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Volkswagen AG 1978 98 make a success of rvsMVS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
6. rvs will modify all fields containing characters The lines containing these characters should be modified The DISP parameter within the OUT DD statement might be changed to KEEP by rvs if required Other parameters for example UNIT should be adapted to the corresponding installation Member STAPEJC of the rvs Tables Dataset This member contains the following JCL statements which are used if a dataset on tape has been queued for transmission and must be copied from tape to disk before the transmission can start SENDTAPE EXEC PGM DF024A00 PARM IN DD TAPE DEFER DISP SHR VOL SER DSN E HEH H HE H H HEH B B B BERE OUT DD UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 060 070 RLSE DISP KEEP DELETE DSN E HEH H HE H H HHH HH H HHHH STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR In this case rvs will generate and submit a job consisting of the modified content of members JOBCARD and STAPEJC rvs will modify all fields containing characters The lines containing these characters should not be modified Other parameters for example UNIT or SPACE should be adapted to the corresponding installation Member SYSOUTJC of the rvs Tables Dataset This member contains the following JCL statements which are used if a dataset shall be copied to a sysout queue after receiption SYSOUT EXEC PGM IEBGENER SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSIN DD DUMMY rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Descripti
7. 83 89 97 101 105 107 113 DIATOP TS MEME 76 ACCOUNT ica bs 73 74 DIRECT Nina a sn 93 accounting information DNUM ettet rr 84 description ce eee eren 227 DOPT2 ente ber HERR TI A CO EL URINE 73 1 BD 5 ie ra eo aa 77 ia 50 DOPTS a 76 ACM Ecni inei 83 89 97 101 105 107 113 atada 77 AGTM tihi 83 89 113 eot e treten 77 AGTMOBDPBE rene 83 89 113 DOPERM ie hte eurer reete s 52 ACTORS 2 iari ttes 51 DSBEENVMBE 525 4 esee evum S 53 uit HS 89 113 DSP ne eer re s 53 AGTIREE eet tete ee ceeded eet 51 26 rr eer rede 78 93 Lp RE 74 8 MN see User Exits ADDEVIGE sat eet eet ete eterne eut 114 dubium 53 ADDR 2 tet vU 74 114 EXTERNAL 179 ADDRESS te israel 74 114 EXTERNAL SECURITY nee 180 s er rinda did 114 Feature 4404000222222 1 177 5 74 BERS nd beo 107 APP trt re eher eerie 51 o a h ELEAN 107 ASIDE ia AME odas do al A eu 74 ee ese ae 108 2 02022220000000 0 0 00 90 114 FIRST UV Ei es 54 74 PR
8. VRECORD DS oc VRTYPE DS constant C V VRMODE DS direction SEND C S or RECEIVE VRNULL DS constant 0 VRSID DS CL3 remote station id VRPWRD DS CL8 password may be blank VRUSERID DS CL8 userid may be blank VRNPWRD DS CL8 new password in case of password change VRLEN EQU VRECORD At least one of both fields VRPWRD and VRUSERID must be specified by the rvsWIN user otherwise the access is to be rejected by DFUX002 rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits The exit may set one of the following return codes in field RC 0 to indicate that access to rvsMVS is accepted All other returncodes indicating that the access is rejected All return codes must be accompanied by a message in field MSGAREA This message is sent back to rvsWIN and displayed on the Screen Rules for coding of exit DFUX002 This exit must be coded reusable or reentrant The exit must restore the contents of registers 2 13 when returning control to the calling rvs program Example of exit DFUX002 An example of DFUXOO2 is found on the rvsMVS installation tape in the rvs source library 2 file Please refer to this example in case of need of adaption to your environment An example of a station table entry for rvsWIN is specified in Chapter 6 2 2 SNA Stations parameter TYPE WIN 3270 A 3 Accounting User Exit The accounting user exit may be used to obtain data about all executed transmissions in order to
9. cceseccceseeeeeeeeeneeeeeseneeeeeseneeeeeseneeseeseneeseneeeneeeneeeees 5 5 8 Installation of the rvs ISPF 5 rvsMVS Installation Manual Contents 5 9 Creation of rvs Key Data 1 1 cancer cnn 5 5 10 Installation of the Security Library Data dataset eese 5 5 11 Creation of rvs Permission rnnt 5 5 12 Creation of USP datasets eeecececiet eiu ee 5 6 Description of the Tables DataSet 22 1 44 11 10 1 nennen nnns 5 6 1 FVS Start Parameter eine nedee enc id 5 6 1 1 Example for definitions to support more X 25 multi channel links 5 6 2 TUS Stations 5 6 2 0 Subset 0 general parameters valid for all stations 5 6 2 1 Subset 1 valid for BSC 20000 4000 0 0 5 6 2 2 Subset 2 valid for SNA 0044 4 5 6 2 8 Subset 3 valid for station entries using ODETTE 5 6 2 4 Subset 4 valid for X 25 XOT Direct
10. SYSUT2 DD SYSOUT A SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSIN DD DUMMY Remarks 1 It is assumed that this member contains a complete job incl valid jobcard The above job should be treated as an example this member may contain any other job steps as well as the above job 2 During submit of member JFPJCL rvs performs replacements of the following characterstrings amp DAY replaced by the current julian day within the year amp TIME replaced by the current time format HH MM amp SID replaced by the identification of the remote sending station amp DSN replaced by the datasetname of the received dataset amp DSNNEW replaced by the new datasetname of the received dataset important only if the rename function is used amp VOL replaced by the disk volume number onto which the received dataset has been stored amp JOBDSN replaced by the dataset name of the jobdataset PDS amp MEM replaced by the membername of the jobdataset PDS member amp RUSER replaced by the RACF userid if available of the job user who created the resident receive entry 3 Submit of member JFPJCL is performed only if access to the internal reader and to member JFPJCL is possible Thus submit of this member cannot be performed in all situations when automatic jobstart fails but will be performed in most of these situations for example the jobmember which has been specified within the resident receive entry does not exist or the allocation of the j
11. nennen nennen nennen nnne nnne 5 3 8 Definitions for remote operating function esee 5 A WEVS SVSTCM FICS nee 5 4 1 WS Load Library ia 5 4 2 rvs Controld taset iie ne 5 4 3 IrVS Logdataset radican 5 4 4 rvs Tables Dataset decime 5 4 5 rvs Key Data data set cccesecccesseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseneeeeeseneeseeseneeseeseeeeseeseeeeseesseeeesesseneesesenees 5 4 6 rvs Permission Tables Dataset ULS feature only 5 4 7 Datasets for USP feature only cccseccseseeeeseeeeeneeeeseeeesneeeeeeeenseeeesneeenseeeasaeeeaseseseeneeseaes 5 4 8 IVS Jobs Dataset nin ii 5 4 9 AAD ALADE E A L ae 5 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS oooooonnnnnnnnnncccnncncnnnnnanananoccncnonennnnnnnnnccc cnn nennen nennen 5 5 1 Installation Guide from the Compact Disk necesse 5 5 2 Content of Compact Disk cidade 5 5 3 Creation of module DF067A Macro rvsDYN 5 5 4 Change of dataset names within Tables file eese 5 5 5 Creation of rvs Control Dataset esee ennt rn 5 5 6 Creation of rvs Log 5 5 7 Modification of the rvs Tables file
12. NEW CATLG DELETE UNIT TAPE SYSIN DD DUMMY SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT It is useful to perform the copy to tape function within a separate job because the other steps of the start job must not wait for a tape mount in this case If this separate job has completed the temporary dataset RVS KDSAVE TEMP is deleted and no problems will occure within step TEST if the start job is executed next time Step PDF0009A This step executes procedure PDF00094A Deletion of records will be performed only if this has not been done during the last two days parameter INTV 2 Step MONITOR Last but not least the rvs Monitor is started if everything else especially the control for backup copy was ok rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix F Reference Utility program DF076A F Reference Utility program DF076A The utility program DF076A converts data from selected records of the rvs Control Dataset VSAM to a sequential dataset The resulted reference dataset may be used as a base for your own application programs listing or dialog programs or in some cases printed as it is The reference dataset contains either complete images or two different edited records of the selected Control dataset records The output may be also in a ouput parameter area with data from one Control Dataset record at a time The program receives search arguments for a group of transmission s to be obtained The rvs Control Dataset is searched
13. ROUT 08 nn Routing code for rvs messages Selectable between 1 and 15 The value of this parameter may be displayed changed with the rvs command ROUT see Operations Manual SCC ccc 1 Specification of system completion codes in hex for which an extended SNAP dump of the abended task will be taken DD statement rvsDUMP see rvs start procedure is used to write the dump data If other completion codes occure only a short SNAP dump will be taken Completion codes 0C1 0C4 0C6 and OC7 will always result in an extended dump except the same completion code occures more than one time within one monitor run SECRPREF name TSO USERID This parameter is used for the compression security component only This parameter specifies the user prefix name 1 7 characters All compression security temporary files to be created by rvsMVS have to start with this prefix Alike with the parameter YPREFIX SECURITY rvskey NO It specifies how the Security Feature is used Parameter SECURITY EXT YES is not longer necessary The Security module is active if it is allowed by licence key Z Use SECURITY NO to switch off security although it is allowed by licence key If SECURITY NO is specified the Security Feature will be rejected for all send requests of this installation Attention The parameters GPUKID GPUKNM GPRKID und GPRKNM are removed SERIAL EFPA EERP Change Trigger of serialized s
14. SYSOUTJC FTPRVSJC KEY PFKEYS KEYDATA TRNTABLE X PTABLES USERDATA USERLOG LOGDATA LOGLOG EXTCONF DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSOUT amp DUMP DSN RVS TABLES MSGID DISP SHR SYSOUT amp PAPER DSN RVS TABLES CNTLMSG DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES CNTL DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES START DISP SHR SYSOUT A INTRDR DSN RVS TABLES STATIONS DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES PROGPROF DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES SESSIONS DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES JOBCARD DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES JOBCARDF DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES STAPEJC DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES RTAPEJC DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES SYSOUTJC DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES FTPRVSJC DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES USER DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES PFKEYS DISP SHR DSN RVS KEY DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES TRNTABLE DISP SHR SYSOUT amp PAPER DSN RVS PTABLES DISP SHR DSN RVS USERDATA DISP SHR DSN RVS USERLOG DISP SHR DSN RVS LOGDATA DISP SHR DSN RVS LOGLOG DISP SHR DSN RVS TABLES EXTCONF DISP SHR Explanation of the used DD statements STEPLIB RVSDUMP MSGID SYSWTO CNTLMSG CNTL START Allocation of the rvs load library Output of snap dumps written by rvs Specification of messages which are to be written to the resource allocated with ddname SYSWTO SYSOUT protocol for rvs messages defined in member MSGID Control of console and rem operating messages Specif
15. TFIDCMD T TFIDSTATUS 000 TFIDDSN FIX0004 TESTX33 TFIDDATE 1997 05 13 TFIDTIME 11 19 50 TFIDUSER TFIDSIDC FD2 TFIDSIDS FA TFIDDEST 00013000001VW FA4 TFIDORIG 00013000001VW FD2 TRACE DATA BLOCK FTP END TO END RESPONSE FILE RECEIVE REMOTE STATION FA4 DATASET NAME FIX0004 TESTX33 QUEUEING TIME 97 133 11 19 50 EEIDCMD E EEIDSTATUS 000 EEIDDSN FIX0004 TESTX33 EEIDDATE 1997 05 13 EEIDTIME 11 19 50 EEIDUSER EEIDSIDC 4 EEIDSIDS FD2 EEIDDEST 00013000001VW FD2 EEIDORIG 00013000001VW 4 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkk TRACE STOPPED DATE 97 133 TIME 11 22 1320 He e e He ehe hehehe hehehe He hehehe ke e ke He ke e He ke e He ke e ke He e ke ke e ke kk e He ke e e ee e He e e He he e He he e he he e ke ke ke e He ke e ke ke ke ke ke rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features 9 rvs Features 9 1 Feature Architecture In a layer architecture view rvs works between the network layer at the bottom and the application layer on top To connect applications with rvs there are some important interfaces to pass to rvs the parameter to send data sets user interface with ISPF or batch program DF080A00 call rvs by applications call interface by DF180A e to call applications after receiving a data set call interface using Resident Receive Entries rvs external Features
16. XNUMBER 1 0536112345 PSIZE 1 128 WSIZE 1 7 MAXSVC 1 1 XNUMCHCK 1 NO AFRARARARARA ke he khe khe khe khe khe khe khe khe khe e KK KK he e he e he e he e ke che ke ke ke He He He ke he e ke e ke e ke e ke e ke e ke ek 2 Definition for CTCP 2 ISDN ke ke ke ke e ke ehe khe khe khe khe ke he khe khe khe khe Fe Fe Fe he Fe he e he e he e he e ke e he e he ke he He ke he he e ke e ke e ke e ke e XAPPLID 2 AVARVSG2 XLUNAME 2 XVWAOTR1 XNUMBER 2 0536123456 PSIZE 2 128 WSIZE 2 7 MAXSVC 2 1 XNUMCHCK 2 NO Ecke ke ke ehe e he ke he khe khe khe khe khe khe khe khe KKK KK he Fe he e he e he e ke e he e he e He he He he e he e ke e ke e ke e ke e ke ek 3 Definition for CTCP 10 X 25 2e e e e ke ke ke ke ke he ke he khe khe khe khe khe khe khe khe khe khe Fe KK he e he e he e he ke ke e he ke He he e He ke ke e ke e ke e ke e ke e ke KKK XAPPLID 10 AVARVSG4 XLUNAME 10 XVWGOTR1 XNUMBER 10 45536120002 PSIZE 10 256 WSIZE 10 2 MAXSVC 10 15 XNUMCHCK 10 YES Ecke ke ke ke ke RARA KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK he RRA RARA ke ke e he e ke e ke RARA e ke ek 4 Definition for CTCP 11 XOT Ek e e e ke ke KKK khe khe khe khe khe khe khe KKK KK KK KK KK he e he ehe Fe Fe Fe He ke He e he he e he e he XOTUSE 11 YES XOTLOCAD 11 192 168 0 1 XOTLPORT 11 1998 XOTREMAD 11 192 168 0 2 XOTRPORT 11 1998 XNUMBER 11 45536120002 PSIZE 11 128 WSIZE 11 7 11
17. permission to neighbour direction send RN TEP permission from neighbour TEP direction receive SN TA1 permission to neighbour TA1 direction send RN TA1 permission from neighbour TA1 direction receive USER user local virtual station mapping SN TEP VDSN FIXOGTE TESTFILE OSID VC1 DSID VTE VDSN OSID VC4 DSID VA4 VDSN FIX0GG2 00001 TESTV OSID VC4 DSID VA4 VDSN FIX0GG2 00001 TESTX72 OSID VC4 DSID VA4 USER COMMENT COMMENT USER FIXOGTE SID VC1 COMMENT USER FIXOGGU SID VC3 COMMENT USER FIXO0GG2 SID VC2 rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features COMMENT USER FIXOGTP SID VC5 In the member SN TEP is configured e The own local virtual station VC1 is allowed to send files beginning with FIXOGTE TESTFILE to the remote virtual station VTE e The local virtual station VC4 is allowed to send all files all dataset names are allowed to the remote virtual station VA4 e The local virtual station VC4 is allowed to send files beginning with FIX0GG2 00001 TESTV and beginning with FIX0GG2 00001 TESTX72 to the remote virtual station VA4 In the member USER is defined a user virtual station mapping relation The user FIXOGTE belongs to the local virtual station VC1 the user FIXOGGU to the local virtual station VC3 the user FIXOGG2 to the local virtual station VC2 and the user FIXOGTP belongs to the local virtua
18. rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit TDTIMER 1 TIMER TO WAIT FOR ND RETRIES TRAN NO NO TRANSLATION IS TO BE PERFORMED TPTIMER 1 X 25 T1 TIMER IN SECONDS X25LCG LCGN 0 LOGICAL CHANNEL GROUP 0 e oe ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce RRE RR ce ce ce ce ce AAA RARE RRE RK KKK KKK KK e 3333 INSTRUCTIONS FOR 15 SWITCHED VIRTUAL CIRCUITS e oe ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce eee e e e eee e e e e e e e KKK X25VC SPAN SP11 LCN 1 15 15 VIRTUELLE LINES TYPE SWITCHED OUFINDX 1 DEFIND IN X250UFT MACRO VCCINDX 1 VIRTUAL CICUIT CALL INOUT COMMITO 4 COMMIT TIMEOUT ISTATUS ACTIVE MAXLU 3 NUMBER OF LU S FROM PU IN VTAM NCPGRP G03051 NCP GROUP NAME OWNER DUMMY RETVCTO 30 TIMER BETWEEN RETRANSMISSIONS RETVCCT 5 NUMBER OF RETRANSMISSIONS Remarks Parameter MAXPKTL of the X25VCCPT macro corresponds with the rvs start parameter PSIZE The same value must be specified for both parameters Parameter VWINDOW of the X25VCCPT macro corresponds with the rvs start parameter WSIZE The same value must be specified for both parameters Note that this value must be the same as the value which is generated by the national telephone company within the X25 network for the multichannel link Parameter GATE GENERAL must be coded within the X25MCH macro The LLCLIST paramet
19. rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 RVS PANEL RVS SOURCE RVS TABLES RVS JOBS RVS EXEC with first level qualifier RVS changed according to your installation requirements The next steps of installation are described in chapter 5 5 of this manual Note After submit of job RECEIVE the message FCO760W ALIAS DATUM2 IN INPUT DATASET HAS NO OWNER can occur This message can be ignored Authorization There are two reasons to define the rvs load library as an APF authorized library e Some status displays for transmissions using the FTP component may be incomplete e rvs User Exits see Appendix have been installed and at least one of these exits requires authorization If none of the installed User Exit requires APF authorization it is not necessary to define the rvs load library as an APF authorized library Independent of the definition of the rvs load library APF or not all rvs modules are linked with attribute AC 1 Creation of module DF067A described in chapter 5 3 Creation and Initialization of the rvs Control Dataset see chapter 5 5 Creation of the rvs Log Dataset see chapter 5 6 Modification of the rvs Tables Dataset see chapter 5 7 Installation of rvs ISPF panels see chapter 5 8 Creation and Initialization of the rvs Key Data data set if Security Feature will be used see chapter appendix Inserting the Security Key of your o
20. 6 ADMN Delete key s from the key management 1 4 1 Function GENKEYS Generate a key pair 2 sequential datasets DD Statements KEYDATA key management dataset VSAM Dataset SYSPRINT program log file KEYPARM parameters example generate a key pair A JOB GENKEYS EXEC PGM DF054K PARM GENKEYS STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR KEYPARAM DD KSIZE 1024 KPERIOD 12M KNAME RVST V2CS NEWO1 KEY Parameters for GENKEYS Parameter Description Syntax KNAME KN File name of private key suffix PR Text max 32 characters and file name of public suffix PU key With Prafix TSO USERID lt keyname gt Example KNAME KEY rvsMVS Installation M anual Appendix l Key Data Utility Program DF054K Result P390A KEY PR P390A KEY PU Without Pr fix lt keyname gt Example KNAME KEY Result KEY PR KEY PU KFROM KF Begin of validity TT MM JJJJ YYYY MM DD End of validity TT MM JJJJ YYYY MM DD KTO KT KPEHIoD d DIt T Tag m M month j Jly Y year KP examples 5m 5 month or 1Y 1 year KTUSEIKE Begin of validity is current date YES NO Key size in Bits max 2048 it has to be divisible by 8 KSIZE KS Example KS 768 or KSIZE 1024 KCREATOR Creator of key Text max 50 characters KC KOWNERIKO Owner of key Text ma
21. AND FOR FUTURE USE KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK hehe e kk he he ek KK ke ke he eek kk ke ke ke kk ke k k ke k k KDRUSER DS KDJOBDSN DS KDEXTFLD DS KDEXTTYP DS DS KDUSER DS DS KDEND EQU CL8 CL44 CL20 CL1 XL44 CL8 XL27 RACF USERID IF RACF IS INSTALLED OF THE USER JOB WHO CREATED THIS RECORD SEND REQUEST OR RESIDENT RECEIVE ENTRY DATASET NAME OF THE PDS CONTAINING THE JOB TO BE STARTED BY rvs AFTER RECEIVING THE MEMBERNAME MAY BE OBTAINED FROM FIELD KDJOB RESERVED FOR USER KDRECTYP AS FIELD WILL BE TRANSMITTED KDRECTYP AR FIELD IS FILLED FROM SENDER TYPE OF FIELD KDEXTFLD E FIELD KDEXTFLD HAS BEEN FILLED BY DFUX001 S FIELD KDEXTFLD HAS NOT BEEN FILLED BY DFUX001 IT CONTAINS INFORMATION WHICH IS TRANSFERRED FROM SENDER TO RECEIVER RESERVED USER FIELD THIS FIELD IS TRANSMITTED FROM SENDER TO RECEIVER IF THE ODETTE FILE TRANSFER PROTOCOL IS USED FOR TRANSMISSION RESERVED END OF RECORD rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix C Description of accounting information C Description of accounting information This chapter contains the layout of the area passed to the accounting user exit routine if the rvs start parameter ACEXIT name is coded in terms of an assembler space description This description is part of the installation tape member ACXTAREA of the rvs source library and may be used
22. Automatic dial Optional parameter Automatic dial will be initiated if e adataset is queued for sending see DIALOPTS e acertain time of day is reached see DIALOPT2 a specified polling interval is reached see DIALOPT3 e operator sets up a command to call the station see rvsMVS Operation Manual A sid command BACKUP 1 P sid sid1 sid2 sid 3 characters BCKP J Backup station identification s Optional parameter In addition to a direct connection it could be necessary to have an alternative way to the final station e g for backup With BACKUP one can define one or more relais stations for indirect transmission Note The transmission via backup station is blocked until one of them is switched on by a special operator command see F sid VIA command rvsMVS Operation Manual rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset COMPRESS OFTP NO GZIP new COMPRESS OFTP YES NO RVS GZIP EXT old The GZIP compression can be enabled diabled by 1 License key 2 rvs Stationstabellen Parameter COMPRESS OFTP YES NO RVS GZIP EXT 3 during call of DFO80A00 create send request GZIP YES NO At first the GZIP compression is controlled by the rvsMVS license key A rvs Startparameter that this function switches on off is not necessary Because of compatibility the rvs Startparameter COMPRESS is accepted but ignored in function It
23. Control of ccoo 133 SSIDEXTR titt ER eei e 95 MONITOR nitri tenen s 159 SSIDEXTS terrere be 95 rvsMVS Installation Manual Index see Tape Dataset JCL for Copy Job TIME ii 62 5 see Tables Dataset START TENE EPE edo 102 conil ect eee es 141 gbc t iii 163 exaimple dae eere edes 237 BSG nnus been bete e 166 STATION rrt re Y ree rre eor tto eT aed 59 A nisse 174 STATIONS see Tables Dataset stations table 1107 6 2 ote 170 statistics 168 asas id ti 229 Start and StOp e eet Rete dede 165 legend eee eee nte eterne 234 TOP vaso eee eite 172 line activity uis eee 233 TRAGE eene iio 62 station activity isses 230 Transmissions STEPEIB iacit rhe rr Ter edo 141 Overview 143 STORAC iii da aia ins 60 61 TRNTABLE 5 2 5 00 142 SUBCEHAN L 25 86 62 SYNCLVL neas 102 by 91 95 98 109 SYSOUTJC 5 see Tables Dataset SYSOUTJC UCBNAME c etre ROS 87 115 SS WTO cunas a ita 135 141 UGG aaa 62 Tables Dataset UD DR 91 CNTEMNSG aat asada 134 UNIT tenes reste d
24. DFALI DFUSMAN DFKD DFLOG DFSTATN DFDAYKE ESTABLISH ALLOCATIONS ISPEXEC LIBDEF ISPPLIB DATASET ID SfDFPANEL ISPEXEC LIBDEF ISPMLIB DATASET ID amp DFMSGS ALTLIB ACTIVATE APPLICATION CLIST DATASET amp DFCLIST SELECT rvs ENTRY PANEL IF amp SYSISPF ACTIVE THEN ISPEXEC SELECT PANEL DF000P00 ELSE WRITE PLEASE CALL rvs ONLY UNDER ISPF UNALLOCATE LIBRARIES ISPEXEC LIBDEF ISPPLIB ISPEXEC LIBDEF ISPMLIB rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS Note e f you have allocated the clists panels and msgs to the ISPF DD names SYSPROC ISPPLIB and ISPMLIB you can erase the lines marked with an Be sure to define the RVS LOADLIB for variable amp ZDFLOAD e f you substitute names smaller than the underlined fields you must replace the underline by space e The station id list may be the STATIONS TABLE see chapter 6 2 of your installation It is not supplied by the rvs software distributors The list is displayed in the panels only as an information to the user when he insert a question mark in the field STATION ID e The variables amp DFAKI amp DFALI and amp DFUSMAN refer to data sets that contain further information for the rvs users The data sets are not supplied by the rvs software distributers The rvs system programmer may supply these data sets or e
25. If NONE is specified no events are written Only OPC is realized so far JSSSYSIDzname max 4 Chars Name of Job Scheduling Subsystem e g OPCE the event is routed to If this parameter is specified within resident receive entry this field will be taken see User Manual LOGDATEF ddd mmda This parameter is used to define the format of the date in logfile dad day of year e g 038 mmdd month day e g 0207 LU62APPL applid only if LU6 2 component rvs is used Application ID of the local own station 1 8 alphanumeric characters This name must be specified in an APPL statement of the local VTAM see chapter 3 4 This name must be specified also in the rvs stations table of the remote station s see chapter 6 2 If used this name must be different from those specified for the rvs startparameters RMOPAPPL APPLID and XAPPLID LU62MODE mode1 mode2 mode3 LOGMODE names for the LU62 sessions with the following order mode1 modename for low priority session mode2 modename for medium priority session mode3 modename for high priority session All names must be defined in the LOGMODE table of VTAM for the used application ID Note rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset e This names are the default values if no modes are defined in the station table entry of a LU6 2 station e This names must be exactly 8 characters long LU62MAX 0 nnn nn value between 0 and 999
26. JFPJCL DD CNTLMSG DD TRNTABLE DD PTABLES DD RVS PTABLES RNZTC2 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 RVS PTABLES SN TC2 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 VDSN RVS 00001 DSN RVS DSN RVS DSN RVS DSN RVS DSN RVS TESTD TESTE TESTE TESTB TESTC TESTD TESTE TESTA TESTA TESTB TESTC TESTD TESTD TESTD TESTE TESTE TESTE TESTA TESTA TESTB TESTB TESTC TESTC TESTD RVS PTABLES USERS COMMENT COMMENT USER RVSA SID VA1 USER RVSB SID VA2 USER RVSC SID VA3 USER RVSD SID VA4 USER RVSE SID VA5 COMMENT TABLES PFKEYS DISP SHR TABLES JFPJCL DISP SHR TABLES CNTLMSG DISP SHR TABLES TRNTABLE DISP SHR PTABLES DISP SHR DSID VA1 OSID TAV DSID VA1 OSID TAX DSID VA2 OSID TAY DSID VA2 OSID TAZ DSID VA3 OSID TAV DSID VA3 OSID TAY DSID VA4 OSID TAX DSID VA4 OSID TAZ DSID VA4 OSID TAV DSID VA5 OSID TAX DSID VA5 OSID TAY DSID VA5 OSID TAZ OSID VA1 DSID TAV OSID VA1 DSID TAX OSID VA2 DSID TAY OSID VA2 DSID TAZ OSID VA3 DSID TAV OSID VA3 D
27. KEYID XXXXXXXX DEL This job remove this key from the key management Info Version 1 0x01 Serial Number 1 0x01 Mode 1 0x01 Created At Jul 10 10 32 27 2003 UTC Created By unknown Owner unknown KeyPair ID a2 74 f0 96 validity Not Before Jul 10 10 32 25 2003 UTC Not After Oct 10 10 32 25 2003 UTC Subject Key Info Public Key Algorithm rsaEncryption Exponent 65537 0x10001 KeyData ac a4 30 f7 7c 9f 47 cf 0d 1d 9b ce 66 fa 4e b9 80 9a c4 83 fa 5e 93 97 04 2f 8c 0f b8 5b d3 cb fb 90 b3 6d 51 a4 6d 6a 65 52 9d 84 4e 68 fa al 7a fe 22 5d d9 5f e2 2a b3 35 3d 4c c5 8c 86 d7 65 9c 2b 6b 2a 7f 86 63 63 ab 91 39 02 f9 25 93 f1 4a 1c a4 fb f0 cb 04 99 ef 84 bc 22 0b 0a 0e 2b a3 1a 9c 3a 71 2c 52 d0 c9 d5 94 18 3e 3c d9 Ca ae 34 42 a4 2e 9d 15 65 b4 7f cc e4 3c cf cf EndData 1 4 Detailed description of function Key Data Utility Program DF054K rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K you can manage your security keys with the program DFO54K A VSAM dataset is used to manage store the keys The program DF054K provides the following functions PARM 1 GENKEYS Generate a key pair 2 sequential datasets 2 KEYS Add key s to key management 3 LIST List keys from the key management 4 EXPT Write keys from the key management to a sequential dataset see IMPT too 5 IMPT Write keys from a sequential dataset to the key management see EXPT too
28. Max number of sessions for the LU62 component LU62USE YES NO This parameter is used only for the LU62 component It indicates that this component is to be used by RVS All parameters for this component must be given and a list may be found at the beginning of this section MAXRPT 1 nn This parameter is used only for the Compression Security feature component It specifies the max number of parallel comp secr dispatcher receive tasks used by this component nn may be a value between 1 and 99 MAXSPT 1 nn This parameter is used only for the Compression Security feature component It specifies the max number of parallel comp secr dispatcher send tasks used by this component nn may be a value between 1 and 99 MAXSVC xx 1 This parameter is used only for the X25 component It specifies the max number of switched virtual circuits SVC to be used by this component n may be a value between 1 and 99 The specified value must not be greater than the number of SVC s which are defined for the multichannel link SVC s are normally defined within the X25VC macro parameter LCN To support more than one X 25 multi channel links you have to define this parameter for each X 25 multi channel CTCP MSGID xx This parameter specifies the first two characters of the message id ODID xx value value This parameter is used only components which use the ODETTE FTP lt specifies the identification of
29. No default value SFIDEXTR name rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Name of the SFID Receive User Exit See appendix A 6 for more details of using the exit No default value SFIDEXTSzname Name of the SFID Send User Exit See appendix A 6 for more details of using the exit No default value SPCLOGIC YES NO Special logic support Optional parameter Some stations asynchronous links need support of special logic like calculation of Block Sequence Number Block CheckSum etc YES means the remote station needs special logic NO means the remote station don t need special logic SSIDEXTRzname Name of the SSID Receive User Exit See appendix A 6 for more details of using the exit No default value TYPE MVS Specification of remote station This parameter must be coded if the function PDS Transfer or the function VDSN up to 44 characters shall be used with the remote station An additional requirement for the use of this function is the installation of rvsMVS 2 2 00 or a following version on both sides No default value SSIDEXTS name Name of the SSID Send User Exit See appendix A 6 for more details of using the exit No default value rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 4 Subset 4 valid for X 25 XOT Direct Entries
30. PACKED FORMAT EQU E SPACE 2 rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix D rvs statistics D rvs statistics D 1 General Information Station Activity The rvs Station Activity program provides a station related summary of all important transmission data like number of transmissions number of transmitted bytes speed etc Statistics are available for e asingle station e agroup of stations groups must be specified by the user see D 4a all stations Possible time intervals of calculation are e one day or e one month Line Activity The rvs Line Activity Program generates a chart which shows the usage of a switched line e per day of the chosen month or e per hour of the chosen day D 2 Prerequisites Dataset RVS TPSTAT Basic data will be accumulated in a permanent dataset which is used as data base of both of the rvs statistics programs It is called RVS TPSTAT hereafter and should have following attributes ORGANIZATION physical sequential RECORD FORMAT fixed blocked RECORD LENGTH 39 bytes BLOCK SIZE 19500 bytes may be changed SPACE 1 cylinder approx Important Each transmission is represented within RVS TPSTAT by a 39 byte record Assumed that the average number of transmissions per day is 30 the chosen space of 1 cylinder of a 3380 disk approx 40000 bytes track is big enough to accumulate statistics data of more than 1 year 500 days If more transmissions are planned or already exec
31. TCPIPADR remote IP address TCPIPCHK check remote IP address TCPPORT remote port number TCPSESS max number of parallel sessions mandatory parameter Note The TCP IP component uses the ODETTE FTP OFTP Additional to these parameters subset 0 and subset 3 must be specified Description of rvs Station Table Parameters in detail ACCESMET t ACME Access method must be TCP Mandatory parameter LBLKSIZE 128 2000 32760 LSIZE 1 exchange buffer size used for transmissions Optional parameter Allowed are values from 128 up to 32760 bytes TCPIPADR ipaddr ipaddr stackname Remote IP address This address may be specified either in dotted decimal notation for example TCPIPADR 10 211 036 20 or as a symbolic name length up to 60 bytes for example TCPIPADR RVSSRV10 If the TCP IP stack to be used for this connection is defined with an index other than 1 the reference name for the stack to be used must also be coded The reference name corresponds with the rvs start parameter TCPSTKID defined for this stack Example TCPIPADR 10 211 36 5 NET20 or TCPIPADR RVSSRV10 NET20 Caution Specification of a symbolic name requires the service of a name server rvs uses the GETHOSTBYNAME macro for access to the name server and this macro requires a runtime library of a C compiler This library bust be assigned to the rvs monitor STEPLIB DD Statement or must be defi
32. TSO sessions using the rvs ISPF panels on the other side Support of transmission protocols rvsMVS supports different transmission protocols rvs internal protocols are used as well as common file transfer protocols e rvs internal transmission protocols rvs internal protocols are used if the remote side uses one of the following rvs products Product line procedure functions of transmission protocol rvsMVS BSC SDLC restart vertical code compression rvs DOS BSC restart blank compression rvs VSE SNA SDLC restart vertical code compression rvs RPG BSC no restart lineblocking no compression e rvs file transfer protocols VDA4914 1 rvs supports the file transfer protocol as described in VDA recommendation 4914 1 The use of this protocol is restricted to BSC lines VDA4914 2 The ODETTE File Transfer Protocol is a new protocol of the VDA recommendation 4914 and will be named VDA4914 2 1988 rvsMVS supports the revision 1 3 dated from Dec 1992 without error recovery described in the 1 3 document The X25 LU6 2 and TCP IP components of rvs support this protocol For more service between stations with rvs products rvs enhances this protocol by using some specials e rvsMVS PDS File Transfer Use of the user fields of SSID and SFID protocol record These fields contain some flags led by an eye catcher RF for initiator s outgoing protocol records and RF for incoming protocol records e Additionall
33. process these data for reasons of accounting or other reasons for example statistics This exit is called by the rvs monitor if the start parameter ACEXIT name has been specified see chapter 6 1 For operating system MVS XA both addressing mode AMODE and residency mode RMODE must be set to 24 bit addressing If installed the exit is given control e just after start of the rvs monitor without any accounting information e after each transmission of a dataset send or receive independent of the fact whether the transmission ended normally or not e just before stop of the rvs monitor without any accounting information Interface description of the exit If the exit is entered e register 13 points to a 72 byte savearea register 14 contains the return address and e register 1 contains the address of a parameter list with the following fields rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits offset dec length description flags from calling module bitstring first call of exit next call of exit 1 last call of exit reserved address of the accounting information record the layout of this area is described in appendix C of this manual This address is valid only if the first byte of this parameter list indicates next call of exit Rules for coding The exit must be coded reusable rvs loads the module after start and keeps it until the monitor is stopped The exit must res
34. rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Example for combined values OPTS RJOB RJE Remote job processing and requeuing is possible PHONE text string text string max 16 chars Telephone number of the final station Optional parameter The text string must be put into quotes Within the quotes all characters blanks commas etc are allowed and will not be recognized as delimiters The maximal length of the string is 16 characters The telephone number is only comment and can be shown on the console by the operator command X sid No default value SECURITY EXT NO The external feature security can be enabled diabled by 1 License key 2 rvs Stationstabellen Parameter SECURITY EXT NO 3 parameter during create of send request DF080A00 SECURITY EXT NO At first the external feature security is controlled by the rvsMVS license key A rvs Startparameter that this function switches on off is not necessary Because of compatibility the rvs Startparameter SECURITY is accepted but ignored in function It is set rvs intern to corresponding value of the license key If the the external feature security is not available in license key and if parameter SECURITY EXT is used in STATIONS this parameter is ignored error message is written If the user uses the parameter SECURITY EXT during create of send request this is also ignored error message is written The rvs stationtable param
35. 108 automatic jobstart PRS ui eee e 108 JCL for TAMING 151 EP E EEEE E st UA e 108 BACKUP iii pi es 74 163 RIN it dla inia 109 nei UE INI o 74 URS e 109 51 di ut lado co 109 527 51 a 84 BSCUSE 51 52 56 59 FTP Job see Tables Dataset FTPRVSJC ENTE ricota see Tables Dataset Start Parameter ETPERESP aia 107 csi see Messages CNTLMSG ETPHEIEE usina dai 107 Code 0000 153 108 Commands 54 automatical execution see Tables Dataset START ETPRPAS Si E 108 COMPRESS CNTL esee 52 54 COMPRESS Station 74 75 ETPPORT iia diia 108 COMPRESS OF TP eere 93 rhe ici 54 108 CONTAC G terere rr aee te RD 84 ida ii 109 Controldataset ETIPRESP dee E 109 Creation a ia 39 FTPRVSJC see Tables Dataset FTPRVSJC Deleting of old 2 22 2 1 146 EIPSESS a z
36. 15 2 2e e e e e e e e e e e e e Fe Fe khe khe khe khe khe khe khe khe Fe he Fe Fe e he RRA RR RARA RARA e ke e ke RRA e ke e eek 5 Definition of X 25 XOT groups Rok e e khe e ke ke he khe khe ke he khe khe khe khe khe khe Fe Fe e KK KK he e he e he e ke che e he He e e He e ke e ke e ke e ke e ke e ke e ke X25GROUP ISDN1 1 X25GROUP ISDN2 2 X25GROUP ISDN 1 2 X25GROUP X25 10 X25GROUP XOT 11 ke ke e ke e ke e ke e ek BOTTOM OF DATA kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 1 2 Definition of two X 25 multi channel links which should use ISDN The parameters to describe CTCP 1 and CTCP 2 are specified by index 1 index 2 3 Definition of an X 25 multi channell link which should use X 25 as network The index number to specify the CTCP is 10 4 Definition of an XOT link which should use X 25 as network The index number to specify the CTCP is 11 5 Definition of X 25 groups to comprise various X 25 multi channel links For instance ISDN specifies a group consisting of CTCP 1 and CTCP 2 X25 specifies a group consisting of CTCP 10 rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 rvs Stations Table Different Types of Stations Table Entries The Stations Table contains S
37. 2 or following version or the TCP IP product of INTERLINK There are no restrictions in view of the equipment used for the connection of the host with the IP network 3 6 Definitions for FTP component of rvs and rvsLight This section describes definitions which are necessary for the FTP component of rvs With this component rvsMVS gives you an interface to the FTP Your communication partner only needs FTP support which is nowadays part of most of the common operating systems You can exchange data with your partner without having to resign the many rvs functions like routing automatic dataset processing etc In opposite to the other components of rvsMVS this FTP component represents a decoupled solution that is this component does not reproduce FTP but uses FTP as part of the TCP IP software for the actual file transfer Because of this it is necessary to take a separate look at the transmission directions Definition of FTP partners rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit For data transmission the partner has to be defined rvsMVS first For this you need to know the partner s IP Address as well as a User ID and a Password for the FTP session setup Sending data to an FTP partner You can queue datasets either using the ISPF user interface or using the BATCH TSO interfaces which means you tell rvsMVS to send the specified dataset to the desired partner station rvsM
38. 5 1 4 4 Function iris 5 1 4 5 Function MPT ii 5 1 4 6 Funkin ADMIN 5 1 5 Return codes of DF054K coooonncccconnccccccnnnnncccnnnnccnnnnnnc rre 5 1 6 DF054K Messages cio ii nnmnnn 5 1 7 Key Data record description 5 rvsMVS Installation Manual 1 Introduction 1 Introduction rvsMVS is a file transfer system Datasets be interchanged between a computer where rvsMVS is installed and other computers where rvsMVS or other rvs compatible products are installed see below The rvs software allows to transmit any sequential or partitioned dataset independent of record length block length and record format from one computer to another whilst the completeness and correctness of the transmission are monitored by the software Restrictions for the datasets to be transmitted may exist if the remote side has not installed rvsMVS rvsMVS includes seven components for support of different line procedures e BSC for switched or leased BSC lines e SNA using the normal SNA network Note that connections between two hosts require INN links this means a leased line connection e LU 6 2 using the normal SNA network This component works with the ODETTE File Transfer Protocol e X25 using the X25 network This component works with the ODETTE File Transfe
39. 5 6 2 5 Subset 5 valid for LU 6 2 stations 5 6 2 6 Subset 6 valid for TCP IP Direct 5 6 2 7 Subset 7 valid for 044 100000000000 5 6 2 8 Subset 8 valid for Indirect Stations VIA 5 6 2 9 Subset 9 valid for BSC Line 5 6 2 10 Subset 10 valid for local Virtuel Stations TYP VIRT entries with ULS feat re only s ciet ne O 5 6 2 11 Examples of a Stations Table s sse 5 6 3 Special Transmission Protocols rvs Program Profile Table 5 6 4 Definition of rvs Sessions cnc 5 6 5 JCL Member for Copy 5 6 6 Control of rvs 5 6 6 1 Control of Messages for Console and remote Operating 5 6 6 2 Additional SYSOUT protocols 5 6 6 3 Definition of non deletable 5 6 7 Automatically executed rvs commands eese nnn nnn 5 6 8 HMOP PF eere dee Atene Arden 5 6 9 rvs Procedures and JOBS 5 endete dite i ences eure dues ees 5 6 971 VERSE Procedur
40. 9 5 6 Change station table sesssssssssssseeeeeeeeee nennen nnne rennen 5 9 5 7 Create new PDS for user and permission 5 9 5 8 Add new DDName in Monitor Jobstart JCL Program 5 9 5 9 Add new DDName in DF080A 5 9 5 10 New commands on remote operator 5 9 5 11 Send und Receive Scenario ssssssssssssseseeeeeeeeenenee 5 9 512 Error Godless eoe lt TIE ae ede eT Hee 5 9 5 13 15 Configuration 5 9 6 User Separation USP step by step instructions eene 5 9 6 1 WALFOGUCTIO Nes Sete cae cree ogee LAE 5 9 6 2 InstallatiOr 4 2 ostio toe ooh ence et 5 9 63 GODfIQUFatiOns ze teret Pe ue ta 5 9 6 4 Work with USP Pariels icone da 5 10 APPO d 5 rvs User EXitS 5 A 1 Authorization Exit DFUXOO1 cnc 5 A 2 IVsWIN Exit DEUXOO2 2 rn ee trei ari 5 A 3 Accounting User EXit n aii 5 A 4 Job Submit Exit 5 A 5 Identif
41. AMODE and residency mode RMODE must be set to 24 bit addressing The rvs loadlibrary on the installation tape contains this exit as a dummy exit This means the distributed exit consists of the following two instructions LA 15 0 set returncode to zero BR 14 return to calling program rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits Depending on the results returncodes of the exit the job to be submitted may be e modified modify delete or insert JCL cards e suppressed flush of job The following figure shows the environment in which the exit DFUX003 is executed read first next card of JCL to be submitted of input 2 yes no W link to exit DFUX003 write JCL card into internal reader flush job display exit message rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits Interface description of exit DFUX003 If the exit is entered e register 13 points to a 72 byte savearea e register 14 contains the return address and e register 1 points to a fullword which contains the address of a parameter list with the following fields offset dec length description characterstring RVSEXTOS eye catcher flags from calling module bitstring first call of exit during submission of a job first card of JCL is passed to the exit next call of exit during submis
42. Appendix A rvs User Exits A 1 Authorization Exit DFUX001 The exit DFUX001 may be used to check authorization for e updates of the rvs Control Dataset e transmission sending of datasets and or e the use of special processing options during or after receiption of datasets like automatic jobstart and others It may also be used to control which datasets are to be received and which datasets are not to be received receiving rejected The use of this exit allows for example an accommodation of rvs to RACF requirements the exit might check if a RACF user is authorized to transmit a dataset to another installation or if a RACF user is authorized to initiate a jobstart after receiption of a dataset The loadname DFUX001 of this exit is required For operating system MVS XA both addressing mode AMODE and residency mode RMODE must be set to 24 bit addressing The rvs loadlibrary on the installation tape contains this exit as a dummy exit This means the distributed exit consists of the following two instructions LA 15 0 set returncode to zero BR 14 return to calling program The exit is executed in different environments 1 Outside the address space of the rvs Monitor for example if a send request is created by executing the program DF080A00 2 In the address space of the rvs Monitor to check authorization during start of a transmission Depending on the results returncode and the environment of the exit e u
43. DIRECTION R RECEIVE S SEND KDREMOTE DS CL3 ID OF REMOTE STATION DS CL5 RESERVED KDDSN DS CL44 DATA SET NAME UP TO 44 CHARS THIS NAME IS A VIRTUELL OR REFERENCE NAME OF THE DATASET USED FOR COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE LOCAL AND THE REMOTE STATION IT MAY BUT NEED NOT BE THE PHYSICAL DSNAME THE PHYSICAL DSNAME SHOULD BE OBTAINED FROM FIELD KDDSNNEW QUEUING DATE OF THE DATASET QUEUING TIME OF THE DATASET TRANSMISSION START DATE TRANSMISSION START TIME FF FF KDREADYD DS KDREADYT DS KDSTARTD DS KDSTARTT DS KDKEYEND EQU fr ty on fu e e oe e ce ee e cede fe ce de ce ce e ce ce ee ce e ce e ce e e ce e ce ce e ce ce e ce ce e ce ce e ce cec ce ec e e kv ke xk x CONTROL INFORMATION FOR THIS TRANSMISSION oe ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce RR ce ce RRR ce ce e e ce ee e e ee eec ce ce e e e ARA RR DS XL2 RESERVED KDBITS DS OXL4 MIXED FLAGS KDBITS1 DS KDBQISID EQU X 08 KDRECORD QUEUED BY OPERATOR WITH I SID KDBITS2 DS x KDRELAIS EQU X 40 THIS STATION IS A RELAIS STATION KDRMTOPT EQU X 04 REMOTE OPTIONS ARE SPECIFIED KDBITS3 DS KDRESREC EQU X 10 RESIDENT RECEIVE ENTRY KDRECTYP RR HAS BEEN x USED AS A MODEL FOR THIS RECORD ONLY IF rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix B Description of the rvs controldataset record KDRECORD KDTRANS R KDBITS4 DS DS XL14 RESERVED KDBITS5 DS BITSTRING KDRSTART EQU X
44. DSN RVST TABLES FTPRVSTJC DISP SHR KEY DD DSN RVST TABLES TKEYSECR DISP SHR DD DSN RVST TABLES PFKEYS DISP SHR JFPJCL DD DSN RVST TABLES JFPJCL DISP SHR CNTLMSG DSN RVST TABLES CNTLMSG DISP SHR TRNTABLE DD DSN RVST TABLES TRNTABLE DISP SHR PTABLES DD DSN RVST PTABLES DISP SHR RVST PTABLES RN TA2 VDSN RVS XUVX OSID VA1 DSID TAV VDSN RVS XUXX OSID VA2 DSID TAX VDSN RVS XUYX OSID VA3 DSID TAY VDSN RVS XUZX OSID VA4 DSID TAZ OSID VA5 DSID TAZ VDSN RVS XUZR RVST PTABLES SN TA2 rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features VDSN RVST XUX OSID TAV VDSN RVS XUX OSID TAX VDSN RVS XUY OSID TAY VDSN RVS XUZ OSID TAZ VDSN RVS XUV OSID TAV VDSN RVS XUV OSID TAV RVST PTABLES USERS COMMENT USER RVS1 SID TAV USER RVS2 SID TAX USER RVS3 SID TAY USER RVS4 SID TAZ COMMENT Send requests examples ORT VA4 DSN RVS SEND T058 DSNOLD RVS1 00002 DISP DELETE ORT VA5 DSN RVS XUV SEND T058 DSNOLD RVS1 00002 DISP DELETE ORT VA5 DSN RVST 059 DSNOLD RVS1 00003 DISP DELETE JOB RVS X26 TABLES TENNIS COMPRESS NO ORT VA1 DSN RVS 058 DSNOLD RVS2 00002 DISP DELETE ORT VA2 DSN RVS XUY SEND TO58 DSNOLD RVS3 00002 DISP DELETE ORT VA3 DSN RVS XUZ SEND TO58 DSNOLD RVS4 00002 DISP DELETE ORT VA1 DSN RVS SEND TO58
45. DSNOLD RVS1 00002 DISP DELETE ORT VA4 DSN RVS SEND T058 DSNOLD RVS1 00002 DISP DELETE DSID VA5 DSID VA1 DSID VA2 DSID VA3 DSID VA4 DSID VA5 FOR USER FOR USER FOR USER FOR USER FOR USER FOR USER FOR USER FOR USER RVS1 RVS1 RVS1 RVS2 RVS3 RVS4 RVS1 RVS1 9 5 13 3 Konfiguration for RVS 2 NO PERMISSION SID NO PERMISSION DSN NAME Insert new rvsMVS licence key with C D und E components in TABLES member 0853 139 DF30001 RVSMVS STARTED DAY 04 139 18 05 TIME 8 53 DUR 0000000MIN 0853 139 LL30411 CURRENT RELEASE 2 5 MODIFICATION LEVEL 14 rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features 0853 139 LL30441 EXPIRATION DATE OF CURRENT SOFTWARE 04 200 18 07 0853 139 LL30461 COMPONENTS BSC SNA X25 LU6 2 FTP TCP 0853 139 LL30461 COMPONENTS COMP SECR VST TFR UST 0853 139 LL30501 ENVIRONMENT MVS REL SP7 0 4 FMID HBB7707 CPU MODEL 2084 1012 139 LL1900I PROCESSING OF START PARAMETERS STARTED RVS TABLES CNTL Control Parameter MAIN STATION TA2 000001 STATION TA2 000002 RMOPAPPL AVARVSG7 DQPERM NO STORAC 0 TRACE RVS 000003 DDEVTY DISK LOG YES MSGID AA DSPTI 60 JOBINIT SUBMIT JFP YES 000004 TIME 2 ROUT 12 SCC 878 UNIT SYSDA RVS TABLES STATIONS Partner station SID RVT ADDR TCPIP TEST SYSTEM VERBUND B ISTATUS ACTIVE ACME T TYPE MVS ULS YES LSIZE 32000 TCPIPADR 599 123 086 27 XXNET TCPPORT 3306 TCPSESS 1
46. Dataset JFP YES NO JSSNAME NONE OPC JSSSYSID name LOGDATEF ddd mmda HLDRESET NO t o 15 p MAXRPT 05 nn MAXSPT 05 nn MSGID xx RELNCTRN NO YES REPLY rvs OC READY text ROUT 08 nn SCC ccc 1 SECURITY rvskey NO SECRPREF name TSO USERID SERIAL EFPA EERP SMF 0 nnn SMSMNGCL name SMSSTOCL name SMSDATCL name STATION sid sid1 sid2 sidn STORAC 0 nn TEXTBLSZ 6000 nn TEXTLREC 2048 TIME 10 nn TRACE E xxx TSTAMP NO YES UCC uuu uut uun UNIT SYSDA unit UNTCOUNT 1 nn USERSEP YES NO VOLUME volume VWACC INO YES VWJOBC INO YES YPREFIX name TSO USERID YSTORCL name YMAGMCL name YDATACL name YPALLOC nnnn 20 YSALLOC lt nnnn 50 YUNITC nn 10 Jobprotocol in case of failing jobstart Selecting Job Scheduling System write events Job Scheduling Subsystem Id to write events to Log date format Time interval for releasing send requests from hold status max number of Compression Security feature dispatcher receive tasks max number of Compression Security feature dispatcher send tasks rvsMVS message identifier No code translation in case of routing textfiles IMPORTANT Please read full description because of problems with backward compatibility Reply text of rvs monitor Routing code used for WTO s System Completion Codes for extended SNAP du
47. GByte for encryption compression is added Use CSVER 2 for station which supports files greater than 2 GByte for encryption compression DIALOPTS b ti rt ti1 rt1 ti2 rt2 ti3 rt3 ti4 rt4 DOPTS Options for automatic dial Optional parameter Dial will be initiated automatically if a dataset is queued for sending See also DIALOPT2 DIALOPT3 and ACTOPTS 111 42 specifies the time intervals in which automatic dial will be active dialing starts only if a send request for the remote station is queued Start time and end time must be written in hours and minutes Syntax tizhh mm hh mm Default value is 00 00 24 00 rt rt1 rt2 rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset specifies the retry time The retry time is the duration the program waits for dialing again after the last try was performed Allowed values 1 255 min Default value is 60 minutes The parameters must be put in brackets separated by comma Maximal input are four combinations of intervall and retry time Examples DIALOPTS 11 15 12 00 5 DOPTS 11 15 12 00 5 14 02 17 00 10 Note Do not specify time interval beyond midnight seperate it Instead DOPTS 23 00 06 00 5 use DOPTS 23 00 24 00 5 00 00 06 00 5 DIALOPT2 b dt dt1 dt2 dt3 dt4 DOPT2 J Times for mandatory automatic dial Optional parameter Dial will be initiated automatically if a certain time of day is reached See al
48. Illegal output dataset DCB parameters rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix F Reference Utility program DF076A This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix G Using the Remote Operating Function G Using the Remote Operating Function The Remote Operating Function allows to perform rvs operating from any 3270 screen After logon to the rvs monitor all rvs commands may be entered from the screen except commands of the form f rvs for example P rvs Additional all rvs messages which are displayed on console will be sent to the screen The following sections describe all details for the use of this function Layout of the 3270 screen when using the remote operating function rvs assumes to work with a screen with 24 rows and 80 columns After an SNA session to rvs has been established the screen will be cleared The first row is always used as an input field If any inputdata are entered for example rvs commands the input data must start in column 1 The second row remains blank All other rows are used for display of rvs messages Writing of messages to these rows is done in a wrap arround mode The last displayed message is always followed by a line consisting of characters All rvs messages which are displayed on the screen are preceeded by the sequence sid where sid denotes the rvs station name of the local rvs installation In some cases the 7th byte of the r
49. KEYTYPE DS CL2 TYPE OF KEY PR PRIVATE KEY PU PUBLIC KEY ORG 1 KEYSTYPE DS SUBIYPE OF THE KEY R PRIVATE U PUBLIC KEYSID DS CL3 STATION DS CL5 RESERVED FOR LATER USE KEYID DS CL4 KEY IDENTIFIER NORMALY A HEX VALUE KEYRES DS CL4 RESERVED KEYDSN DS CL44 KEY NAME KEYDATE DS CLA DATE KEYTIME DS CLA TIME KEYKEYEND EQU KEYKEYL EQU KEYTYPE KEYCNTL DS CL1 CONTROL BYTE KEYCNT1Y EQU X 80 1 KEY DATA ARE COMPRESSED EQU MOO UNCOMPRESSED KEYAREA EQU i DS CL4018 FOR A COMPRESSED KEY RECORD THE FIRST 5 BYTES OF THIS AREA ARE DS H LENGTH OF UNCOMPRESSED KEY RECORD DS H NUMBER OF COMPRESSED SEGMENTS DATA FOLLOWS WORKAREAL EQU KEYTYPE DATAAREAL EQU KEYAREA KEYREND EQU T E E D OF RECORD rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix l Key Data Utility Program DF054K This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual Index Index amp DAY iia REB 151 DEOTZADO 147 1 op REDIERE EET 151 7 terrier 148 S amp DSNNE 151 SS 239 AN a 151 aii 143 151 DEO7IBDOO vaa aa 146 RU RU I DIEA PE 151 DIATINTE susi iia 114 CCS i D eR IE RU CENE IER UE 151 DIAN UM 84 SIME O 151 DIATOP TZ iia 77 eH 151 DIATOP ii 77 ACCESMET
50. Linetype must be S switched Parameter may be omitted because default value is S PHONE text string text string z max 16 chars Telephone number of the final station Optional parameter The text string must be put into quotes Within the quotes all characters blanks commas etc are allowed and will not be recognized as delimiters The maximal length of the string is 16 characters The telephone number is only comment and can be shown on the console by the operator command X sid No default value SLAVE YES Definition of the behaviour of the line SLAVE substitutes the old PPROF parameter If you act like a master station e g car manufacturer you must specify SLAVE NO else you are a slave station e g supplier and must specify SLAVEZYES If SLAVEZYES secondary is coded rvs sets up a BTAM WRITE macro and is able to send out the station identification SLAVE NO master primary rvs sets up a BTAM READ macro and is able to receive the identification of a remote station SPEED LOW HIGH Transmission speed Mandatory for low speed lines 1200 bps SPEED LOW If lines with 1200 bps are used SPEED HIGH If lines with more than 1200 bps are used nnnn nnn z BTAM subchannel address 3 digit UCB nnnn subchannel address 4 digit UCB This is a second way to define the BTAM subchannel address for switched lines Here you are able to define three or four digit su
51. NPSI generates an idnum value This hex value must match with one of the idnum values defined in your switched node The lowest idnum value is 00002 followed by 00004 00006 etc If you initiate a call out the NPSI generates an idnum beginning with the number of the lowest non busy channel If you receive a call in the NPSI generates the idnum of the highest non busy SVC Example 1 You defined 5 SVCs on your multi channel link A call out will trigger the NPSI to generate the idnum value 00002 A call in will lead to 0000A Please consider that the sequence of idnum mustn t necessarily start with 00002 If you have defined other SVCs in your NCP you have to take this into account NPSI stage 1 output shows the sequence of all SVCs assigned to your NCP Idnums can be found out as follows The first SVC permanent virtual circuits will not be counted gets the fictious number 00002 the second SVC 00004 the third 00006 etc independent whether it will be used by rvs or not Example 2 You have installed 2 multi channel links on the same NCP On the one multi channel link you use 1 PVC and 4 SVCs on the other you use the first 4 SVCs for RVS If your NPSI stage 1 output shows the rvs SVCs on position 5 6 7 8 you have to code the idnums 0000A 0000C 0000E 00010 in your switched major node e ce ee ce ee 5 555555555555 ce ce RARA RRA kv e x kv x AX _ MODETAB FOR NPSI GATE SESSIONS ODETTE e e e e e ee e cede e ce
52. PFxx PFL PFLxx PFLxxyy PFL PFL PFxx Terminates the remote operating session Pressing of PF1 on the 3270 keyboard results in stopping of message display on the screen same as command RMSG OFF But in difference to the RMSG OFF command reinitiating of the message display function will be done automatically if any input data are entered from the screen Pressing of PF2 PF11 or PF13 PF24 on the 3270 keyboard simulatet command entry The processing is the same as if you hat typed the character string in the command line and pressed the ENTER key attention commands are immediate commands Repeatedly entering PF12 causes the commands most recently entered from the command field to be displayed on the command line The commands are displayed one at time in reverse sequence to which they were entered last in first out This allows you to eaisily recall a command for resubmission from command field You can edit the command before entering it if you wish Changing the default PFK settings PFKEYS member in TABLES file temporary Permanent changes you must do by EDIT command of TSO or ISPF Display all PF keys settings Display setting of PF key xx Display settings of PF keys xx to yy Display settings all commands indirect commands Display settings all commands direct commands Reset setting of PF key xx rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Using the Remote Operating Function
53. QTIME time1 time2 Queuing time s of day optional QTIME time2 1 QTIME hh mm One or two times of day to limit the queuing time frame of the queried transmission s The explicitely given times have the format hh mm where hh hours and mm minutes 24 hour clock and if the second time is given they are separated by a dash An omitted first time of day is defaulted to 00 00 and second one to 24 00 If the first time expression is an asterisk it is replaced by 00 00 and the second time is defaulted to the current machine time If the asterisk is followed by a second time expression the first time is calculated to a time given number of hours and minutes before the machine time and the second time is defaulted to the machine time Yet the time cannot by this way span to the previous day The second time expressed by an asterisk will be replaced by the current machine time If this keyword is given QTM must be omitted in the same set of search arguments Synonyme to this keyword is QTOD TTM yydddhhmmsst Transmit date and time 1 12 numeric characters optional Transmit date and time of the transmissions to be queried The format and the rules are analog to the ones of QTM If this keyword is given TDATE TDAY or TTIME must be omitted in the same set of search arguments TDATE date1 date2 Transmit date s optional TDATE nrofdays One or two dates to limit the transmit time frame in days of the
54. R11 VDSN B31 FIXR11 OSID B12 DEST A14 VDSN B31 TAXBILL OSID B09 DEST A13 VDSN B31 DELIVO9 OSID B03 DEST A14 Example 2 send direction member SN R11 send permissions from neighbour R11 Comment local virtual stations are A remote virtual stations are B all send permissions for neighbour R11 VDSN R11 FIXB11 OSID A10 DEST B18 VDSN R11 IMPORT2X OSID A11 DEST B02 VDSN R11 DELIV33 OSID A14 DEST B02 rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset In the Example1 is configured The own local virtual station A14 is allowed to receive files beginning with B31 FIXR11 from the remote virtual station B12 The local virtual station A13 is allowed to receive files beginning with B31 TAXBILL from the remote virtual station BOY The local virtual station A14 is allowed to receive files beginning with B31 DELIVO9 from the remote virtual station B03 In the Example2 is configured The own local virtual station A10 is allowed to send files beginning with R11 FIXB11 to the remote virtual station B18 The local virtual station A11 is allowed to send files beginning with R11 IMPORT2X to the remote virtual station B02 The local virtual station A14 is allowed to send files beginning with R11 DELIV33 to the remote virtual station B02 rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 7 Running I
55. RVS ZW2 DISP OLD DELETE SYSUT2 DD SYSOUT SYSOUT DD SYSOUT rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix D rvs statistics TSO Clist You will find an example of this CLIST on rvsMVS installation tape file RVS TABLES STATCL Clist layout RVS SATZA ay ae ae ab eS AX T IN E UE SELECT STATION STATION GROUP ALL OR BLANK ALL STATIONS c all SELECT DAY MONTH YEAR DAY 00 MONTHLY STATISTICS DAY gt 00 MONTH gt 01 YEAR gt 87 CALCULATION OF STATION ACTIVITY STARTS Output List Station Activity REVES SOTA ae ae SITAS OCTOBER 86 gt ALL STATIONS CREATED 27 11 86 SID VIA ADDRESS DIRECTION TRANSM BRKS TIME H M S LINEBYTES DATABYTES COMPRESSN SPEED BPS STA STATION A RECEIVED 18 0 0 01 16 22 609 71 120 31 2 364 SENT 99 2 4 29 48 4 524 933 12 407 166 36 2 236 SID identification of the remote station VIA identification of the relais station only for indirect transmissions ADDRESS address of the remote station note address field is empty if dataset RVS GROUPS is not used DIRECTION direction of transmission received or sent RECEIVED data received from remote station SENT data sent to remote station TRANSM total number of transmissions breaks inclusive BRKS number of transmission breaks TIME H M S transmission time in hours minutes seconds LINEBYTES numb
56. SET amp DFPANEL RVS ISPF PANEL SET amp DFMSGS RVS ISPF MSGS SET amp DFUNIT1 SYSDA UNIT FOR TEMP USE IN CLIST DF100C00 OPT 1 SET amp DFDAYKE 7 NUMBER OF DAYS THAT RECORDS ARE KEPT IN THE CONTROLDATASET REFER TO PARAMETER DAYS IN PROCEDURE PDF0009A INST MANUAL DELETING OLD ENTRIES FROM CONTROLDATASET SET amp DFLIST SET amp DFAKI SET amp DFALI STATION ID LIST CURRENT INFORMATIONS OPT I GENERAL INFORMATIONS OPT I SET amp DFUSMAN USER S MANUAL OPT I LEAVE THE FOLLOWING VARIABLES BLANK USE THEM ONLY FOR TESTING VARIABLES ARE TAKEN FROM MODULE RVS LOAD DF067A SET amp DFKD rvs CONTROL DATASET SET amp DFLOG SET amp DFSTATN rvs LOG DATASET rvs STATIONS TABLE DEFINITION OF PANEL VARIABLES PLEASE INSERT YOUR OWN VARIABLES ISPEXEC VGET DFACCT1 DFACCT2 DFACCT4 DFUNIT4 IF amp DFACCT1 amp Z THEN SET amp DFACCT1 LOCAL ACCOUNT NUMBER 1 IF amp DFACCT2 amp Z THEN SET amp DFACCT2 REMOTE NUMBER OPT 1 IF amp DFUNIT4 amp Z THEN SET amp DFUNIT4 SYMBOLIC UNIT GROUP OPT 4 IF amp DFACCT4 amp Z THEN SET amp DFACCT4 ACCT NR FOR RR ENTRY OPT 4 ISPEXEC VPUT DFLOAD DFLIST DFACCT1 DFACCT2 DFACCT4 DFUNIT1 DFUNIT4 DFAKI
57. SHR Remarks The parameter NOSAVE nn controls if a copy of control and logdataset is to be created or not nn specifies in percent the usage filling of the logdataset and may be a value between 00 and 99 A copy of control and Log dataset is performed only if the logdataset is at least filled by nn 96 rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This allows the combination of this procedure with the rvs Start procedure without creating backup copies during every start of rvs See Appendix E of this manual for such a combination If execution of the procedure results in creation of backup copies the program DF072A00 ends with returncode 0 if backup copies are suppressed because of the parameter NOSAVE nn returncode of 4 is set by DF072A00 The datasets RVS KDSAVE and RVS LOGSAVE must be created before execution of this procedure or the allocation must be done with DISPZ NEW Both datasets are sequential files RVS KDSAVE requires 1 3 of the space which is allocated to RVS KD RVS LOGSAVE requires the same space as RVS LOG Specification of DCB attributes is not necessary program DF072A00 uses hard coded values in each case These are Record Format RVS KDSAVE 1000 6000 variable blocked VB RVS LOGSAVE 1000 6000 fixed blocked FB Another control parameter may be specified for program DF072A00 LOGSAVE ASY If this parameter is specified no copy
58. SSIDSDEB 00128 EXCHANGE BUFFER SIZE SSIDSR zB SEND RECEIVE INDICATOR S R B SSIDCMPR Y COMPRESSION INDICATOR SSIDREST Y RESTART OPTION Y N SSIDSPEC N SPECIAL LOGIC INDICATOR SSIDCRED 001 EXCHANGE BUFFER CREDIT SSIDRSV1 RESERVED SSIDUSER USER FIELD SSIDCR CARRIAGE RETURN COMPLETION SUCCESSFUL RETCODE ERRCODE 00065 SOCKET 00001 REMOTE ADDR 010 210 208 130 REMOTE PORT 01392 REMOTE STATION RV1 DATE 99 175 TIME 08 31 4133 REQUEST READ LENGTH 0004 HEX 00004 DEC DATA 10000005 COMPLETION SUCCESSFUL RETCODE ERRCODE 00004 SOCKET 00001 REMOTE ADDR 010 210 208 130 REMOTE PORT 01392 REMOTE STATION RV1 DATE 99 175 TIME 08 31 4133 REQUEST READ LENGTH 0001 HEX 00001 DEC DATA 52 FR ODETTE PROTOCOL UNIT CHANGE DIRECTION CD CDCMD R COMMAND IDENTIFIER COMPLETION SUCCESSFUL RETCODE ERRCODE 00001 enuen uonejeisu SANSA dl dO L Y JO 9981 10 0155 5 suonoun eroeds 8 rvsMVS Installation Manual 8 Special Functions Procedures 8 2 7 Format of FTP Trace The FTP trance of rvs contains the events on the interface between rvs and the FTP That means it includes e content of additional control files information file alias header response file alias trailer and the end to end response file e the FTP job created by rvs e the FTP commands to be executed within the FTP job e the F
59. TCEPPOR T tto ta 61 65 66 106 ABESIZE colacao oia 64 TEPPROD sia Gown 61 XLUNAME cuidando 65 TCPSBESS toutes tool 106 XNUMBER cosita is 65 TEESTRID tii 61 66 ie ecttestesiect et eiecit siete ped 65 98 TEPUS ES 61 Y 142
60. TEMP FILES IF IT IS NECESSARY DELTMP1 EXEC PGM IDCAMS SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSIN DD DELETE RVS DF078B ICEMAN DELETE RVS DF078B DF076A DELETE RVS DF078B RESULT STEP FOR ALLOCATING A NEW TEMP DATASET SO IT CAN BE REFERENCED IN NEXT STEP BY 2 DDNAMES ALCTMP EXEC PGM IEFBR14 SYSPRINT DD DSN RVS DF078B DF076A DISP NEW CATLG UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 500 500 RLSE STEP FOR ALLOCATING THE NECESSARY DATASETS AND STARTING THE REXX SCRIPT IN A TSO ENVIRONMENT REXX EXEC PGM IKJEFTO1 SYSTSPRT DD SYSOUT LOAD DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR KDPARSER DD DSN RVS EXEC KDPARSER DISP SHR KD DD DSN RVS KD DISP SHR SYSIN DD DSN RVS EXEC SORT78B DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD DSN ALCTMP SYSPRINT DISP SHR SORTIN DD DSN ALCTMP SYSPRINT DISP SHR SORTOUT DD DSN RVS DF078B ICEMAN DISP NEW CATLG UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 500 500 RLSE OUTFILE DD DSN RVS DF078B RESULT DISP NEW CATLG UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 500 500 RLSE DCB LRECL 132 RECFM FB BLKSIZE 5900 TSO COMMAND HERE WE CALL THE REXX SCRIPT SYSTSIN DD EXEC RVS EXEC DF078B DSN FIX LVL L2 DAY 017 EXEC STEP FOR DELETING TEMP FILES LEN DELTMP2 EXEC PGM IDCAMS SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSIN DD DELETE RVS DF078B DF076A DELETE RVS DF078B ICEMAN The JCL will start the REXX script DF078B which can be found in rvs Exec Da
61. The portnumber specifies the application which shall be connected to FTPPREF FPR name name 1 18 characters Specifies the prefix which should be used for construction of dataset names for additional control file Optional parameter The names of such protocol files look as follows prefix FTPxx sSsidoriginSidrrpserver Sidgestination re fnumber prefix value of FTPPREF parameter FTPxx constant Sidorigin origin station id SidErP server sid of next FTP station Siddestination destination station id refnumber an unique number stamp to avoid conflicts with duplicate control file names The prefix has to correspond to MVS DSName conventions on MVS hosts PC file name conventions on PC stations or UNIX file name conventions on UNIX like stations Examples of control file name information file 1 MVS FTPPREF MVSPREF origin station AAA next FTP station BBB destination station CCC control file name MVSPREF FTPHD AAABBB CCC F000123 2 PC FTPPREF ftprvs origin station XXX next FTP server station YYY rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset destination station YYY control file name ftprvs ftphd xxxyyy yyy f000123 FTPREFN FRN NO YES non MVS stations only Specifies whether the DSN of the file which should be transmitted will be added by a stamp Defaults non MVS stations YES MVS stations FTPRESP FRS NO YES Sp
62. This specification is used for communication between rvs and PU Type 2 clusters Such a communication may be established if the remote computer supports one of transmission protocols VW FTP V1 0 or VW FTP V2 0 Remarks The values O S R exclude each other The value M defines the use of VW FTP V1 0 the values M and 7 together define the use of VW FTP V2 0 Session options may be used for modification of functions performed by this session The use of this field is only for test and development purposes the value C 00000000 must always be specified File options may be used for modification of file dependent functions performed during transmission of a file The use of this field is only for test and development purposes the value C 00000000 must always be specified Session timer This timer is used to check TIMEOUT situations Transmission of data records of a file sending or receiving is preceeded and followed by transmission of some rvs protocol records The transmission of all of these protocol records and the time used for establishing a session after activation request is controlled by the session timer If sending of a protocol record is not completed within the time interval rvs treats this as a TIMEOUT situation and the transmission will be cancelled The session timer time interval is also used for re writing the record counters during transmissions to the controldataset checkpoints for a later restart of
63. Yee de de dede 2 AREA COMMAND gt TIME 15 29 REMOTE STATION GEA RECORD TYPE DATE STD 05 311 DATASET NAME LUSER JOBTEST DATE 2005 11 07 LOCAL DSN LUSER JOBTEST LOCAL USERID LUSER ACCOUNT NR 1EGS005 RACF C USER LUSER REMOTE USERID FIXOGER QUEUEING DATE 2005 10 31 TRANSMISSION DATE 2005 10 31 QUEUEING TIME 12 49 17 0 TRANSMISSION TIME 12 49 37 7 JOB CARD DSN LUSER MEMBER JOBCARD LUSER JOB MEMBER OK IEFBR14 STATUS SEQ DATE JOBNUMMER PROGRAM EVENT CREATE OK 2005 10 31 49 37 8 119B EVENT DFUX001 2005 10 31 49 37 8 119A EVENT OK JOB OK 2005 10 31 49 41 5 RUSER 20416004 058A EVENT ERR JOB EVENT SC START 2005 10 31 49 38 6 RUSER 052v EVENT SC END OK 2005 10 31 49 41 3 RUSER 052v EVENT END OF OK 2005 10 31 49 38 1 RUSER 094A PRESS END WHEN FINISHED REMOTE STATION SID of the remote station participated on the transmission RECORD TYPE LR The panel shows a receive entry LS The panel shows a send entry DATASET NAME The virtual dataset name during the transmission LOCAL DSN The physical dataset name on the local system LOCAL USERID The local user id used for RACF authorization ACCOUNT NR Account number of the RACF C USER RACF C USER User id under which rvsMVS runs and created the log entry REMOTE USERID The user id sent by the remote station If a user mapping entry exists it is used for RACF authorization Otherwise the transmitted user id is used QUEUEING D
64. after a specified delay time see ACTOPTS Autoactivation is suppressed after the operator has terminated the session by a stop command Autoact function works again if the operator starts the session again Note The autoact function will work only if the VTAM control task is active see command RVSVTAM in the Operation manual LBLKSIZE 2 128 2000 LSIZE J Line blocksize for transmission Optional parameter Allowed are values from 128 up to 2000 bytes Note For connections with PU type 2 computers the used line blocksize must be smaller than the value for the MAXDATA parameter of the LU macro VTAM definition for the remote side Default values for LU1 is 261 bytes and for LU2 265 bytes LUNAME P luname applid luname applid 1 8 characters LU Mandatory parameter It is possible to put in this field the name of a logical unit as well as an application identification of the remote station RECVPW 1 P pw pw1 pw2 0 pw pw1 pw2 1 8 characters RPW J Receive passwords Optional parameter mandatory for FTP 4914 1 One or two passwords which will be compared with the password sent by the remote station No default value SENDPW rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 1 p pw pw 1 8 characters SPW Send Password Optional parameter Password will be sent to the remote station No default value SESPROF P sprof sprof 3 characters S
65. and all following steps will be bypassed and the rvs Monitor will not start This indicates that the temporary copy of the Controldataset is not yet processed and deleted see also step SUBMIT If RVS KDSAVE TEMP is not cataloged this step ends with returncode 4 and processing of the following job steps continues Step SAVE This step creates backup copies of Control and Logdataset if the usage of the Logdataset is 30 96 or more In this case the step ends with returncode O and step DELETE will be bypassed If copies are suppressed because of parameter NOSAVE 30 step DELETE is executed as next and RVS KDSAVE TEMP will be deleted Step DELETE This step is executed only if creation of a backup copy for the Controldataset has been suppressed because of parm NOSAVE 30 in step SAVE Step SUBMIT This step is executed only if creation of a backup copy for the Controldataset has been done A separate job is copied from member SAVETEMP of the rvs Tables Dataset to the internal reader and thus submitted to the system This job member SAVETEMP is as follows JOB e KKK e e HK HK HK KKK KK HK KKK KK HK HK IKK KKK KKK ARK e e e ec eje ee e eee e He e e COPY BACKUP COPY OF CONTROLDATASET TO TAPE RRR RR e KKK KK KKK KKK KK HK KKK KK KK IKK KKK KKK KK HHH KKK KKH KK KKK HK KKK KKK KK KKK COPY EXEC PGM IEBGENER SYSUT1 DD DSN RVS KDSAVE TEMP DISP OLD DELETE KEEP SYSUT2 DD DSN RVS KDSAVE DISP
66. as a DSECT if an accounting user exit shall be installed e ce ee e ee 585535555555 555555555555 855555855555 rvs ACCOUNTING RECORD USED FOR USER ACCOUNTING EXIT kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkkkkxkxkxk DS 0D ACSTART EQU ACLENGTH DS H LENGTH OF RECORD INCL FIELD ACLENGTH DS H RESERVED oe ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce RRA AA A e e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce RR AA AAA AAA AR AR AR e e ARA RR GENERAL DATA oe ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce e ce ce ce ce ce AR RR RRR e ce ce e e KKK eec AA AR e e ARA A x x ACMODEL DS CL4 SYSTEM ID SAME AS FIELD SMCASID OF SMCA ACJOBNM DS CL8 JOB NAME e oe ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce RRA RARA A A ARRE RRA RARA KKK KKK KKK AR e e ARA RR DATA OF TRANSMISSION oe ce ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e e ce ee eee ce cec cec cec e A e A A RR ACREADYD DS F QUEUING DATE OF THE DATASET FORMAT OOYYDDDF ACREADYT DS F QUEUING TIME OF THE DATASET FORMAT HHMMSSTF ACSTARTT DS F TRANSMISSION START TIME BINARY IN UNITS OF CENTISECONDS ACSTARTD DS F TRANSMISSION START DATE FORMAT OOYYDDDF ACENDT DS F TRANSMISSION END TIME BINARY IN UNITS OF CENTISECONDS ACENDD DS F TRANSMISSION END DATE FORMAT OOYYDDDF ACTRANS DS c DIRECTION OF TRANSMISSION R RECEIVING S SENDING ACLTYPE DS c LINE TY
67. buffers containing data records Default same as blank C 1 C F request for definit response after transmission of every 1 15 line buffer Remarks This kind of flow control is done on application level Normally it is better to use flow control functions pacing provided by the access method VTAM see definition of LOGMODE Table and APPL Statement chapter 3 Name of a Logmode This specified Logmode will be used if the session is established as a result of a rvs activation command A command see Operations Manual If this field is left blank session parameters within the rvs programs will be used hardcoded Bind except PACING and COS values These values if specified will be taken from the DLOGMODE Entry which is specified within the APPL Statement Remark Different Logmode names may be specified in order to use different Virtual Routes rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Column Description or Transmission Groups for different parallel sessions 61 80 Field for comments The following is an example of a Sessions Table containing five session profiles included in the rvs Tables Dataset member SESSIONS on the installation tape COLUMN SCALE IVI1 1121111 V1 1113111111141 M TT 5T TOT PP VIE P P 1710 1 vr PROFILE WITH 1 OPERATOR 2 SEND AND 2 RECEIVE SESSIONS STANDARD PROFILE SP1 DF099A00 DFO91C
68. columns 4 12 Depending on the results returncodes of the exit the identification phase will be cancelled break of line connection or continued normally rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits The loadname of this exit is free selectable For operating system MVS XA both addressing mode AMODE must be set to 31 bit adressing and residency mode RMODE must be set to 24 bit addressing Interface description of the exit If the exit is entered e register 13 points to a 72 byte savearea register 14 contains the return address e register 15 contains the entry point of the exit and e register 1 points to a fullword which contains the address of a parameter list with the following fields offset dec length description IXTMODE flags from calling module bitstring IXTFIRST 1 first call of exit after activation of the line only for initialization of the exit IXTNEXT 1 next call of exit IXTLAST last call of exit before stop of the line control program only for close processing ect within the exit XXXX X reserved IXTCNTL control flags bitstring valid only if bit 6 value X 02 at offset O within this list is set to 1 IXTCBSND 1 call of exit before sending of the own identification to the remote station IXTCARCV 1 call of exit after receiption of the identification from the remote station IXTLDSOI the local station sends the own id before receiving the id fr
69. connect with your own station For the loop test a station entry must be defined in the following way rvsMVS Installation Manual 7 Running Installation Tests The station you call is to be defined within STATIONS TABLE in the usual way see chapter 6 TCP entry The values of SID ODETID and TCPPORT must be identical to the values you coded for the local station member CNTL of the TABLES dataset The TCPIPADR parameter of the stations definition must specify the IP address of the local installation Furthermore SENDPW and RECVPW must be equal and the parameter DIRECTN B must be active specified or by default for both station definitions If you want to send data you have to take care of different names on sender and receiver side gt work with the rename function when queuing the dataset 7 2 Transmission of Datasets The following steps must be performed for transmission tests send receive e creation of a dataset to be sent size of about 50 records e queuing this dataset for transmission to the remote installation this may be done with program DFO80A00 or with the rvs ISPF panels see rvsMVS User Manual Benutzerhandbuch for more details e creation of resident receive entries for the datasets to be received necessary only if special functions like automatic jobstart shall be tested e start of the rvs monitor and the transmission component e activation of BSC line s or activation of SNA session s If a S
70. data are used for example if rvs Statistics shall be created see Appendix D within this manual In case of SMS you can use the example PDF0015B rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 10 JCL Member for failing automatic Jobstart The member JFPJCL of the rvs Tables Dataset may be used as a notification function in case of failing automatic jobstart In such a case rvs submits the content of member JFPJCL instead of the job which has been specified in the resident receive entry This member will be used only if the rvs start parameter JFP YES has been specified In this case member JFPJCL must be allocated with DD name JFPJCL within the rvs start procedure The following JCL is included in member JFPJCL on the distribution tape A JOB J 8 7 H e HK KKK KK HK KK IKK KH KK IKK HK KKK he ke ARK ARK ARK KK KK MESSAGE PROTOCOL IN CASE OF FAILING AUTOMATIC JOBSTART 8 H e KK KKK KH HK HK KKK KKH KK IKK KH HK IKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KK KEK KKK KKK KKK KK COPY1 EXEC PGM IEBGENER STEPLIB DD DSN SYS1 LINKLIB DISP SHR SYSUT1 DD amp DAY amp TIME AUTOMATIC JOBSTART OF rvs FAILED RECEIVED DATASET amp DSN REMOTE STATION amp SID NEW DATASET NAME amp DSNNEW DISK VOLUME amp VOL JOB WHICH COULD NOT BE SUBMITTED BY rvs amp JOBDSN amp MEM
71. definition ACCESMET TP access method LBLKSIZE line blocksize PAD1 modification of X 28 parameters TYPE type of connection XNUMCHCK checking of remote X25 number X25CUD X 25 call user data field X25FAC facility field e g for closed user group X25NUM X 25 call number of the remote station X25PSIZE X 25 packet size X25SESS Max number of parallel sessions to remote station X25WSIZE X 25 window size mandatory parameter Note The X 25 component uses the ODETTE FTP OFTP Additional to these parameters subset 0 and subset 3 must be specified If you want to support more than one X 25 multi channel links you have to extend some of this parameters by an index 1 32 For instance X25NUM 1 05361123456 X25NUM 12 05361654321 All parameters with the same index specify one CTCP Mandatory parameters you have to define for each CTCP Optionally parameters without index are valid for all defined CTCPs optional parameters with an index are valid for the specified CTCP only Description of rvs Station Table Parameters in detail ACCESMET t X 25 ACME J Access method must be X25 Mandatory parameter LBLKSIZE 128 2000 LSIZE J Line blocksize for transmission Optional parameter Allowed are values from 128 up to 2000 bytes Note The LSIZE value may be reduced to the max exchange buffersize value see rvs startparameter XBFSIZE rvsMVS Inst
72. fact see remark 1 lt lt W try to receive a dataset depending on the line characteristics and other parameters one of the following will be done try to send next queued dataset if any or wait until a dataset is queued for sending break line connection switched BSC line inactivate switched virtual circuit X 25 rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits Logic within the receiving sections a HEADER record has been received determine specifications which apply for reception of this dataset link to exit DFUX001 NV is return code equal zero yes is return code equal no 12 WV suppress specifications which should be used for reception of dataset see remark 2 reject reception of the dataset lt reception of dataset starting with allocation of the output dataset 22 rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits Remarks 1 If the exit returns control to rvs with a nonzero returncode the send request a record of type AS within the rvs Control Dataset will be placed in HOLD state This means the send request will not be accessed by rvs until the rvs command S sid has been entered for this request 2 Specifications for receiption include such things as automatic jobstart re
73. if there is no send request for ADS useful if you are expecting data from ADS which are queued for you until 10 15 pm Entry for line 099 The necessary devices for autodial are installed ADDVZ YES Entry for line OE3 Autodial is not possible SNA Station VAD is directly connected Autodial is possible because AUTOACT YES is specified DIALNUM is not allowed not necessary because the number has to be specified within your VTAM generation The autodial function is activ between 0 00 am and 12 pm with a retry time of 5 minutes default values rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 3 Special Transmission Protocols rvs Program Profile Table only used for the BSC component The internal Program Profile Table contains a number of standard entries corresponding to the supported transmission protocols chosen by stations parameter In addition to these fixed profiles some special profiles can be added using the dataset RVS TABLES PROGPROP Special program profiles are necessary for example for BTAM leased lines Creating special program profiles is described in rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 4 Definition of rvs Sessions Table only used for SNA component This table member SESSIO
74. is mandatory If the output dataset DCB information is provided from any source to the program following should be noted MorA control character may be specified in keyword format output LRECL must be 80 or higher and it should be equal to or higher than the respective default for each format above otherwise the output records are truncated For SYSOUT dataset following should be noted Mor A control character may be specified LRECL must be 80 or higher If the DCB is provided as a parameter also MACRF PM may be defined There are three different output formats Keyword format Some information from the Control Dataset records records is edited to a printable form Control Dataset record format The records retrieved from the Control Dataset are presented unedited Fixed format Most of the information from the Control Dataset records is edited to a printable form rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix F Reference Utility program DF076A Keyword format output This format of output is self explanatory TYPE Indication of the status and direction of the transmission SID Remote station identification DSNAME The dataset name of the dataset which will be or has been been transmitted Member name when applicable in parentheses SEQNR Number of so far found records which satisfy the search arguments six digits In fact a sequence number QDATE Queuing date of the transmission QTIME Queuing ti
75. line IODEVICE ADDRESS xxx ADAPTER BSCA TCU 2703 UNIT BSC1 xxx denotes the 3 byte subchannel address of the line EP generation for BSC lines without autodial function The following is an example of an EP generation concerning the LINE and GROUP macros for a 2400 baud switched line GROUP CU 2703 DATRATE HIGH DIAL YES DUPLEX HALF LNCTL BSC PAD NO TERM 2020 TYPE EP LINE ADDRESS yyy xx SPEED 2400 CLOCKNG EXT rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit Remarks e The parameters DIALZYES DUPLEX HALF LNCTL BSC and PAD NO are mandatory transmissions are impossible if one of the parameter values is specified different from those as shown above e The parameter CLOCKNG EXT should be specified for every line except for lines with a speed of 1200 baud If SPEED 1200 is specified CLOCKNG INT should be specified also e yyy denotes the address of the control unit xx denotes the last two characters of the MVS address as specified in the IODEVICE macro The following is an example of an EP generation concerning the LINE and GROUP macros for a 9600 baud leased line GROUP CU 2703 DATRATE HIGH DIAL NO DUPLEX FULL INTPRI 2 LNCTL BSC NEWSYNC NO PAD NO SPEED 9600 CLOCKNG EXT TYPE EP LINE ADDRESS yyy xx TERM 2780 Remark e yyy denotes the address of the control unit xx denotes the last two characters of the MV
76. of SID ODETID and X25NUM must be identical to the values you coded for the local station member CNTL of the TABLES dataset Furthermore SENDPW and RECVPW must be equal and the parameter DIRECTN B must be active specified or by default for both station definitions If you want to send data you have to take care of different names on sender and receiver side gt work with the rename function when queuing the dataset Test of TCP connections Before TCP IP sessions can be activated between local and remote installation the rvs TCP IP control task must be started This must be done by entering the command A RVSTCP If activation was successful message DF83011 TCP IP INITIALIZATION COMPLETE LV is displayed If activation is not successful error messages will be displayed which indicate the kind of error After activation of the TCP IP control task sessions to the remote station may be activated by entering the command A sid In this case rvs tries to establish a connection to the remote installation Message DF8301I F sid CONNECT COMPLETE S indicates successful activation of a TCP IP connection to the remote station In case of error conditions error messages will be displayed instead of the above message The TCP IP connection will be closed automatically if there is nothing more to send or receive or if any error occurs TCP IP loop test For the loop test you don t need a partner station because you
77. of medium priority sessions hh max number of high priority sessions The limit of all sessions together is ll mm hh 16383 Only even values should be specified Odd values will be rounded up to even values Default value is SESSNUM 2 2 2 Note If your partner station is a non MVS system running portable rvs only the session value for low priority is supported SYNCLVL NONE CONFIRM Synchronization level Optional parameter The rvs APPC support can use either None or Confirm as the synchronization level The prefered level is NONE A value of CONFIRM will reduce transmission speed and create additional overhead TPN name name 1 64 chars Transaction program name of remote station Mandatory parameter No default value rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset TPN indicates the name of the program to which a conversation is requested Important for your remote partner To select the service of the Odette File Transfer Protocol of rvsMVS he has to use the following TP name value RVSOFTP If your partner station is a non MVS system running portable rvs the TP name is RVSRCV rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 6 Subset 6 valid for TCP IP Direct Entries definition ACCESMET access method LBLKSIZE line blocksize
78. rvs Tables Dataset on the installation tape PDF0009A PROC PAPIER R RESERVE DAYS 07 INTV 0 PDFO0009A AI III III e e He e III III e He e e I e a e DELETING OF OLD RECORDS FROM rvs CONTROL DATASET RAR e He e He e He e RRA RR RARA RARA RRA SDF079B EXEC PGM DF079B00 PARM amp R DAYS amp DAYS INTV amp INTV STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT amp PAPIER KD DD DSN dsname DISP SHR Description of parameters for program DF079BO00 RESERVE or indicates whether deleting of records is to be done with exclusive control for the NORESERVE rvs Controldataset or not If access to the rvs Controldataset is done from different systems RESERVE should always be specified Default value RESERVE DAYS nn This parameter indicates the number of days for which the information about executed transmissions is at least to be kept This means that only records older than nn days will be deleted nn may be a value between 7 and 99 Execution of this procedure results only in deleting of records representing complete transmissions Send requests which are not complete processed or resident receive entries will never be deleted by this procedure Make sure to set the parameter amp DFDAYKE in the start CLIST for the ISPF Panels to the same value Default value DAYS 7 INTV mm This parameter specifies the number of days in which deleting of records will not be perf
79. rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features case of using OFTP as file transfer protocol the temporarily stored file isn t readable or processable without using special rvs programs Using OFTP rvs transfers the following special control information from the sender to the receiver in case of e rvsMVS PDS File Transfer Use of the complete user fields of SSID and SFID OFTP protocol record This fields contain some flags leaded by an eye catcher for initiator s outgoing protocol records and RF for incoming protocol records e Additionally rvsMVS uses SFID extension SFX1 to transfer partitioned data set information e rvs internal compression GZIP compatible Use of the complete user fields of SSID and SFID OFTP protocol record This fields contain some flags leaded by an eye catcher RF RF e rvs external Security and Compression Feature Enhancement of the first data block with an rvs header leaded by an eye catcher which consists of the string RVSF with some hex characters in total 10 characters The length of the complete header is variable and depends on the used features 9 2 Partioned Data Set PDS Transfer The PDS Transfer Feature of rvsMVS for OFTP stations uses the well known functions of PDS Transfer from the rvsMVS SNA component e unload of a PDS during creation of Send Request e load of the PDS data set after receiving Whereas the header record of the SNA component transfers the data set attrib
80. search arguments QDAYzdate nrofdays Queuing date s optional QDAY date nrofdays QDAY nrofdays One date and a number of days to limit the queuing time interval in days of the queried transmission s The explicitely given date has format yy ddd or simply ddd or even the more natural and self explanatory form of date dd mm yy The nrofdays number of days is separated by a minus or a plus to indicate the other limiting date nrofdays before or after the given date year 2 digits ddd day number within the year 3 digits mm month 2 digits dd day within the month 2 digits nrofdays number of days 1 3 digits If in ddd format the given day number is greater than the current machine day number the year is defaulted to the previous one Examples current machine date is 94 138 that is 18 05 94 expression equals to interval QDAY 065 06 03 94 06 03 94 QDAY 140 365 20 05 93 19 05 94 QDAY 138 108 18 05 93 31 12 93 QDAY 94 138 365 18 05 93 18 05 94 If there is an asterisk in place of date it is defaulted to the current machine date rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix F Reference Utility program DF076A Examples current machine date is 94 108 that is 18 05 94 expression equals to interval QDAY 18 05 94 18 05 94 QDAY 3 15 05 94 18 05 94 QDAY 240 11 08 93 18 05 94 If this keyword is given QDATE or QTM must be omitted in the same set of search arguments
81. set if ULS User Lever Security Feature will be used 5 12 Creation of USP datasets See chapter 9 6 for Creation and Initialization of the rvs USP datasets if USP User Separation Feature will be used rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 1 rvs Start Parameter The rvs Start Parameters member CNTL of the rvs Tables file must be coded with keywords Most of the parameters have default values The parameters are separated by comma or one or more blanks A continuation character is not necessary but every parameter is to be coded completely in the range of column 1 to 72 Some of these parameters are mandatory others are optional But some of the optional parameters may be useful in order to adjust rvs to installation dependent names for example the name for a disk unit group Changes in Security Compression Parameters from version rvsMVS 2 5 11 e Parameter COMPRESS EXT YES NO and SECURITY EXT YES NO are not longer necessary The SECR COMP module is active if it is allowed by licence key Y 2 e Use COMPRESS NO and or SECURITY NO to switch off security and or compression although it is allowed by licence key e the parameters GPUKID GPUKNM GPRKID und GPRKNM are removed e There are new parameters to control the allocation of
82. temporary datasets for security compression SECRPREF YPREFIX YSTORCL YMAGMCL YDATACL YPALLOC YSALLOC YUNITC und YUNITN Overview of the parameters 1 General parameters ACEXIT name ACTOFST 49 nn ACTREL RVS ACC account BFPOOLRL BFPOOLSZ CHAPSDS N N CHAPRDS N N COMPRESS rvskey NO DDEVTYP TAPE DISK DEMIG ALLOC HSM DQPERM YES NO DSPLEVEL LOW MEDIUM HIGH DSPTI 60 nn DSPTIW EERPAD YES NO EXPDT yyyyddd nnnn NONE FIRSTLVL name NO GDGTOR 20 nn GDGTOT 1 nn Name of user accounting exit routine Offset within ACT to obtain account number Accounting information for relais stations Time after which unused buffers are to be released Maximum size for the rvs internal OFTP bufferpool Change SDS Task Priority Change RDS Task Priority Indication for the using of the External Compression Feature Default devicetype used for receiving Specification for demigration processing Permanent display of msg DF49011 DQ command Dispatching level for parallel transmission Dispatcher time interval in seconds removed with version 2 2 05 automatic EERP Expiration Date of received datasets First level pointer of DSN at relais station Maximum number of ENQ requests for a target GDG after receiving a GDG file Time to wait in seconds to get ENQ for a target GDG after receiving a GDG file rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables
83. the Tables Dataset UCBNAME nnn nnnn nnn BTAM subchannel address 3 digit UCB nnnn BTAM subchannel address 4 digit UCB This is a second way to define the subchannel or line address for leased lines Here you are able to define three or four digit line addresses without rvs restrictions The value defined in parameter SUBCHANL will be used as alias name for this line or subchannel Default value is the value defined in parameter SUBCHANL rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 2 Subset 2 valid for SNA Entries Definition ACCESMET TP access method ACTMODE activation mode ACTOPTS opts for auto activation AUTOACT automatic session activation observation AUTODIAL Removed JSUBRESP Removed LBLKSIZE line blocksize LUNAME logical unit name for VTAM RECVPW receive password s SENDPW send password SESPROF name of VTAM session profile TYPE partner characterization USERID USERID of rvsWIN user mandatory parameter Note Additional to these parameters subset 0 must be specified Description of rvs Station Table Parameters in detail ACCESMET p V TAM ACME TP access method must be VTAM Mandatory parameter ACTMODE P NORMAL A LL 1 Activation mode of session control
84. the origin station 5 bytes Reserved 3 bytes Next Station Station Identification of the next connected station May be but need not to be the final station 5 bytes Reserved 3 bytes Station Identification of the Final Station 5 bytes Reserved 1 byte High Level Response Y High Level Response received from the remote station N High Level Response requested but not received 44 bytes Origin Datasetname New Datasetname Note This field is only filled if the rename function has been used Dataset has been received AR BR CR New Name Dataset has been sent AS BS CS gt Origin Name 132 139 Origin Membername New Membername Note This field is only filled if the rename function has been used Dataset has been received AR BR CR New Name Dataset has been sent AS BS CS Origin Name 140 153 14 bytes Queuing Date and Time Format YYYYDDDHHMMSST YYYY year DDD day HH daytime hours MM daytime minutes SS daytime seconds T 1 10 seconds 154 167 14 bytes Transmission Start Date and Time Format YYYYDDDHHMMSST see Queuing Time 168 181 14 bytes Transmission End Date and Time Format YYYYDDDHHMMSST see Queuing Time 182 1 byte Status H Queued dataset is in hold status C Transmission has been cancelled by operator D 5 has been deleted by operator user 183 1 byte Dimension R Number of transmitted data is counted in records B Number of trans
85. transmissions which were ended erroneously ALL Show all transmissions The panel DZ10P00 shows a list of entries matching the selection criteria dede dede deve dede dede ede de deett DEZIOPOO fee Row 1 to 10 of 10 R M S LIST OF FILTERED USER PERMISSION LOG ENTRIES EE EE EE EE OR EERE ORO ORO OR OR ORAR OR ERROR RAR RR EERE COMMAND gt SCROLL gt PAGE REMOTE STATION RV1 SELECT A SINGLE ENTRY TO BE DISPLAYED S DATE AND TIME OF QUEUEING TRANSMISSION DATASET NAME DATE TIME DATE TIME LUSER LUSER LUSER LUSER LUSER LUSER LUSER LUSER LUSER LUSER CJJCL JOBTEST JOBTEST JOBTEST JOBTEST JOBTEST JOBTEST JOBTEST LOOPTEST TESTDATA 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 20 2005 11 07 13 49 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 31 2005 10 20 2005 11 07 12 15 10 12 10 15 12 16 14 13 50 LEE ELLE EE EE RR RR RRA RRE RR E Bottom of data LEE EE EXE XE Entering S in front of list entry shows the details of the corresponding selection DFZ20P00 in panel rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features de ve te Ue te de de de re de ve de de He dee He de te de ee DFZ20POO Yee ee de ee eee ee ex m DISPLAY USER PERMISSION LOG RECORD z
86. value between 0 and 999 FTPPOLTI 60 nnn This parameter is used only for the FTP component Time interval of the FTP polling task in seconds nnn may be a value between 5 and 999 This value determines the time interval after which the FTP Polling task becomes active Every nnn seconds this task looks for FTP control files in the MVS system catalog FTPPREF name This parameter is used only for the FTP component This parameter specifies the FTP user prefix name 1 18 characters All FTP protocol files to be received by rvsMVS have to start with this prefix The names of this FTP protocol files looks as following prefix FTPnn SidoriginSid next Siaestination refnu mber prefix value of FTPPREF parameter FTPnn constant value depending on the protocol file Sidorigin origin station sid Sidnext sid of direct connected FTP station Siduestination destination station sid refnumber FTP reference file number The prefix must comply with the MVS DSName conventions Example for a control file name FTP information file FTPPREF MVSPREF origin station AAA connected FTP station BBB destination station CCC rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset The corresponding protocol file name is MVSPREF FTPHD AAABBB CCC F000123 Optional parameter it is only used for following protocol files information file response file end to end response file FTPUSE NO YES This paramet
87. virtuale station for RVT nnan Station VA1 remote virtuale station for TA2 Station VA2 next remote virtuale station for TA2 Station VA3 next remote virtuale station for TA2 Station VA4 next remote virtuale station for TA2 Station VA5 next remote virtuale station for TA2 VSI The rvsMVS 2 environment Station TA2 own station Station RVT normal partners station Station RVX next normal partners station Station TAV Station TAX Station TAY Station TAZ remote virtuale station for RVT next remote virtuale station for RVT next remote virtuale station for RVT next remote virtuale station for RVT Station VA1 local virtuale station for TA2 Station VA2 next local virtuale station for TA2 Station VA3 next local virtuale station for TA2 Station VA4 next local virtuale station for TA2 Station VA5 next local virtuale station for TA2 9 5 13 2 Konfiguration for RVS 1 Insert new rvsMVS licence key with C D und E components in TABLES member 0853 139 DF30001 RVSMVS STARTED DAY 04 139 18 05 TIME 8 53 DUR 0000000MIN 0853 139 LL30411 CURRENT RELEASE 2 5 MODIFICATION LEVEL 14 0853 139 LL30441 EXPIRATION DATE OF CURRENT SOFTWARE 04 200 18 07 0853 139 LL30461 COMPONENTS BSC SNA X25 LU6 2 FTP TCP 0853 139 LL30461 COMPONENTS COMP SECR VST TFR UST 0853 139 LL30501 ENVIRONMENT MVS REL SP7 0 4 FMID HBB7707 CPU MODEL 2084 1012 139 LL1900I PROCESSING OF START PARAMETERS STARTE
88. 0 94 KEYIMPAFE entitats 263 RTAPEJC see Tape Dataset JCL for Copy Job KEYIMPPU ertet 263 RVSDUMP eet terni e dee 141 KEYIMPBRT eee deter 263 RVSLEOGKZ amp e ducerent cement 143 KEY LIS Eso net RS 263 jue 58 KEYSDBE etie e US 263 SCNL ite rH NR Dd eqs 86 KEYSGEN eere e eps 263 SECURITY CN Tissot Renee 58 cct ee ed Re 263 SECURITY Station 79 82 LBLKSIZE 85 90 97 101 105 114 Security Library dataset Iacencekey e iet etes 12 Installation 45 LINE scaricare 115 SENDPW steer erben 86 90 94 LEINELDYDBE ete 86 115 SESBROE c nante te Re deis 91 Logdataset SESSIONS see Tables Dataset Sessions Table Creation iiie undo tno e 40 SBSSNUM neci tet tei ert odds 102 General ui npa RD 32 SPIDEXTR nene RP Des 94 LONGID x ettet ete EP 86 SFIDEX TS oi e RUNE SIE 95 85 90 97 101 105 114 SID tede dota 81 ET heen pente 86 115 SEA VE sustos dams 115 Plate ont tito de et EE 90 102 ME db ES 59 LU62APPLE SE REED 56 SMSDXAEGCL ert MPH E 59 LU62M AX tutti doi 56 SMSMNGUCGL eee uU SES 59 LUG2MODE cucuta aio 56 102 SMSSTOCE erre EE RUE OE 59 LU62USE REDE GNE 56 SNAUSE dete duae 59 EUNAME e Roe 90 102 SPCLOGIG mter Ub 95 estet e 57 SPEED endet 86 115 Messages cte ias 91 CNTIEMSG Z3 3 eed SE 134 141 SP den e enit 86 91 94
89. 0 ODETID 00013000003xx RVT RECVPW BBB SENDPW BBB CREDIT 100 SECURITY EXT COMPRESS GZIP SID RVX ADDR TCPIP TEST SYSTEM VERBUND ISTATUS ACTIVE ACME T TYPE MVS ULS YES LSIZE 32000 TCPIPADR 699 123 086 27 XXNET TCPPORT 3306 TCPSESS 10 ODETID 00013000003xx RVX RECVPW BBB SENDPW BBB CREDIT 100 SECURITY EXT COMPRESS GZIP Virtual station for TA2 SID VA1 ADDR TCPIP STATION VERBUND ACME T ODETID 00013000003xx val RECVPW AAA SENDPW AAA SECURITY EXT COMPRESS GZIP TYPE VIRT SID VA2 ADDR TCPIP STATION VERBUND ACME T ODETID 00013000003xx VA2 RECVPW AAA SENDPW AAA SECURITY EXT COMPRESS GZIP TYPE VIRT SID VA3 ADDR TCPIP STATION VERBUND ACME T ODETID 00013000003xx VA3 RECVPW AAA SENDPW AAA rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features SECURITY EXT COMPRESS GZIP TYPE VIRT SID VA4 ADDR TCPIP STATION VERBUND ACME T ODETID 00013000003xx va4 RECVPW AAA SENDPW AAA SECURITY EXT COMPRESS GZIP TYPE VIRT SID VA5 ADDR TCPIP STATION VERBUND B ACME T ODETID 00013000003xx VA5 RECVPW AAA SENDPW AAA SECURITY EXT COMPRESS GZIP TYPE VIRT Virtual station for partner RVT SID TAV ADDR GEDAS TEST VIA RVT ISTATUS ACTIVE ODETID 00013000003xx TAV SECURITY EXT COMPRESS GZIP SID TAX ADDR GEDAS TEST VIA RVT ISTATUS ACTIVE ODETID 00013000003xx TAX SECURITY EXT COMPRESS GZIP SID TAY ADDR GEDAS TEST VIA RVT I
90. 00 O 00000000 00000000 OPERATOR SESSION DF099A00 092 00 S 00000000 00000000 1 SEND SESSION DF099A00 092 00 S 00000000 00000000 2 SEND SESSION DF099A00 093 00 R 00000000 00000000 1 RECEIVE SESS DF099A00 093 00 R 00000000 00000000 2 RECEIVE SESS AS ABOVE BUT SECOND SEND AND RECEIVE SESSION TO BE ACTIVATED ONLY IF NIGHT SUBPARAMETER IS SPECIFIED DURING ACTIVATION COMMAND FOR THESE SESSIONS LOGMODE rvs3 IS USED SP2 DF099A00 DFO91C00 O 00000000 00000000 OPERATOR SESSION DF099A00 092 00 S 00000000 00000000 1 SEND SESSION DFO99A00 DF092COO S 00000000 00000000 RVS3 2 SEND SESSION DF099A00 093 00 R 00000000 00000000 1 RECEIVE 5 55 DFO99A00 DF093COO R 00000000 00000000 RVS3 2 RECEIVE SESS 3 PROFILES FOR COMMUNICATION WITH PU TYPE 2 FOR EXAMPLE NIXDORF 8870 EACH PROFILE DEFINES ONLY ONE SESSION SPO DF099A00 DFO91C00 OM 00000000 00000000 OPERATOR SESSION SPS DF099A00 DFO92C00 SM 00000000 00000000 SEND SESSION SPR DF099A00 DFO93C00 RM 00000000 00000000 RECEIVE SESSION rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 5 JCL Member for Copy Jobs The following five members of the rvs Table Dataset are used if e a dataset has been queued for sending and the dataset resides on a tape volume In this case rvs starts a job in order to copy the file from tape to disk data transmission is done always from to disk e a dataset has been received and the specified or def
91. 000002C00 MODEEND The log mode name must be referred to by the rvs start parameter LU62MODE see chapter 6 1 it must be 8 characters long The remote station must be defined as independent LU The name of the remote LU is to be referred to by the stations tables parameter LUNAME see chapter 6 2 5 The following example refers to definitions of an independent LU within the NCP for a remote rvs LU6 2 over a leased line PURVSL PU ADDR C1 ANS CONT AVGPB 1280 MAXDATA 262 MAXOUT 7 NPACOLL YES PUTYPE 2 XID YES lt PU 2 1 ISTATUS ACTIVE rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkxk LURVSL LU LOCADDR 0 DLOGMOD LOGMLU62 MODETAB LU62MODT PACING 7 RESSCB 5 SSCPFM FSS VPACING 7 ISTATUS ACTIVE The following example refers to definitions of an independent LU within a switched major node e g for Token Ring or X 25 PURVSL PU ADDR C1 DISCNT YES IDBLK nnn IDNUM nnnnn IRETRY NO MAXDATA 261 MAXOUT 7 PUTYPE 2 ISTATUS ACTIVE LURVSL LU LOCADDR 0 DLOGMOD LOGMLU62 MODETAB LU62MODT SSCPFM FSS PACING 7 VPACING 7 ISTATUS ACTIVE 3 5 Definitions for TCP IP component of rvs This section describes definitions which are necessary for the TCP IP component of rvs The only requirement for the use of this component is the installation of of a TCP IP product This may be either IBMs TCP IP for MVS Version 3 Release
92. 002 57 Jesejep jeseyep So qei seunnouqns 446 sueJ6oJd XX josejep eoejejul N jues 0 Josejep eureu josejep 0 duiejseuim ppe Jeujo o Bunnoa 91M Je1sqor 5 5 Jaye 1918 ure1ed 04009 SINS abeJo s uonoejes ye saJ uoisse4duioo paa1a99 jo eureuei uoissiusuej e10jeq suondo Buissa00i1d juana M ueisqof deex uonisodsip einoexe UOISSIUISUEJ 194e HEJS UOISSIUSU J pesa uoisseJduuoo juas aq 0 jesejep jo 1 UOISSIUSUe A Duunp e19jeq suondo 605592011 L00Xn4q 1x3 uonezuouiny soisneis paaiaoa aq 10 Seujue 52151279 sjsenbej pues 342919 suonouny rvsMVS Installation Manual 1 Introduction A central control and information file control dataset contains among others information on pending running and terminated transmissions This file is the interface between the rvs monitor on one side and rvs users batch jobs
93. 020 30 3F 20202020202020202020C42E3C282B21 40 4F 26202020202020202020DC242A293B5E 50 5F 2D2FC220202020202020F62C255F3E3F 60 6F 202020202020202020273A23A7273D22 70 7 20616263646566676869202020202020 80 8F 206A6B6C6D6E6F707172202020202020 90 9 20DF737475767778797A202020202020 A0 AF 20202020202020202020202020202020 BO BF 4414243444546474849202020202020 0 FC4A4B4C4D4E4F505152202020202020 DO DF D620535455565758595A202020202020 EO EF 30313233343536373839202020202020 FO FF Assume the dataset consists of the following string EBCDIC rysMVS Rel 1 4 04 Hexadec 99A5A2D4E5E240D985934BA40F14BFA44BFOF4 The first byte r has a hexdecimal value of 99 x On position 99 x in the table the value 72 x is found which stands for an r in ANSI character notation So this value is taken to replace 99 x in the dataset As result of the code translation the string would then be replaced by the following Hexadec 7276734D56532052656C2E20312E342E3034 ANSI rysMVS Rel 1 4 04 For receiving an ANSI file the data must be translated from ANSI to EBCDIC You can find the respective table ANSI2E in the member RVS TABLES TRNTABLE on the installation tape For translating ANSI files this table must be coded within a Resident Receive Entry CODETRNS ANSI2E ses User s Manual Benutzerhandbuch There are four standard tables that are used for code translation The table names are STDE2A STDA2E ODTE2A ODTA2E You can find these t
94. 05CE 00000000 00000000 0801000 00800000 0003 9 0 0380E000 00016260 03000084 20800000 00000000 000000F8 0000010C 10309450 00000000 RC 00 00 00 80800001 40000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 000349DC 80008010 00000000 00000000 00000000 SEND STYPE RESP RESPOND NEX FME NRRN enuen uonejeisu SANSA VNS Ue JO 3381 10 ojduiexy 0165 5 eroeds 8 rvsMVS Installation Manual 8 Special Functions Procedures 8 2 5 Format of LU6 2 Trace For each executed APPC command a trace entry consisting of several rows is written The individual entries are separated by a dashed line An example is printed on the next page Explanation of trace fields 1st row SESSION LU NAME MODE NAME REMOTE STATION DATE TIME 2nd 5th row RPLADDR RPLDATA RC2xx yy zz eth row Denomination of the session Your own logical unit name Used logmode for this session Name of remote station Date in the form yy ddd Time of day Address of used RPL Used RPL in hexadecimal A short explanation of this VTAM control block is given in the prefix of the trace Returncodes xx register 15 yy register 0 zz feedback code For the meaning of these codes see the IBM manual SC27 0449 ACF VTAM Programming Name of the APPC command issued For SEND and RECEIVE macros the contents of the buffer pointed to is printed in dump format SESSION SCT ENTRY 00001 LU NAME
95. 12170 60210001 WRITE 37 CCW 021120BA 208B0002 READ 2D A SXX DSN VOL KENN 42 STAT 00 IND1 00 9 57 376 BLKS 00482 BYTES 0040158 OAF PGMADDR 002568 002512 OPT F600F080 0000 FEAT 00 RETRY 03 TOTRET 01 5 0 0 005 BITS 60 DECB P 7F 03 5 00 L 0800 R 07AC 02 FLAG 00 RESP 0000 TPCD 91 ERRST 00 CSWST 0C00 BUFFADDR 115FBE CCW 01112168 60080002 WRITE 1070 2 6 CCW 02115FBE 20910800 READ 1002D9C4E5E54BD9 F1F1E2E7E74BC1F3 F1F4F 6E6 40404040 404040F0FOF 4F 8F2 RDVV R11SXX A3146W 00482 FOFOFOF3F8F5F6F0 FOFOF8FOFOFOF8FO 04009 1 1 2 7 7 4040404040404040 4040404040404040 4040404040404040 40404003 00038560008000800 115 eroeds 8 rvsMVS Installation Manual 8 Special Functions Procedures 8 2 4 Format of VTAM Trace SNA sessions For each executed VTAM macro a trace entry consisting of several rows is written The individual entries are separated by a dashed line An example is printed on the next page Explanation of trace fields 1st row SID SESSION DSN VOL DATE TIME 2nd 5th row RPLADDR RPLDATA RC2xx yy zz eth row Name of remote station Denomination of the session Name of transmitted dataset Volume number of transmitted dataset Date in the form yy ddd Time of day Address of used RPL Used RPL in hexadecimal A short explanation of this VTAM control block is given in the prefix of the trace Returncodes xx register 1
96. 2 SID SST ACME VTAM LU T32221 SPROF 0S1 ADDR SNA STATION 3 SID XST ACME X25 ODETID ODCDE123XXX A 01 X25NUM 45536140856 SPW SENDPW RPW RECPW ADDR X25 STATION SID XIS ACME X25 ODETID ODCDE123XXX A 02 X25NUM 1 0536114222 ISDN X25PSIZE 1 512 X25WSIZE 1 7 X25NUM 2 4553611444 X25 X25PSIZE 2 128 X25WSIZE 2 2 SPW SENDPW RPW RECPW ADDR X25 STATION SID LU6 ACME L LSIZE 1200 SYNCLVL CONF IRM CONVTYP MAPPED SESSNUM 5 3 5 LU XLUNAME1 TPN RVSOFTP LU62MODE MODNAME1 MODNAME2 MODNAME3 ODETID 0XY34000001GEDAS LU6 SENDPW SEND1 RECVPW RECV1 CREDIT 8 ADDR LU6 2 TEST SID PC1 ADDR PC Nr 1 TYPE WIN 3270 RECVPC pswpcl 7 SID PC2 ADDR PC Nr 2 TYPE WIN 3270 USERID userpc2 8 SID TCP ADDR TCP IP STATION LSIZE 32760 ACME TCP TCPIPADR 10 210 208 130 TCPPORT 3305 TCPSESS 4 ODETID ODCDE123XXX A 03 CREDIT 50 SENDPW AAA RECVPW AAA 9 SID FTP FTPRESP YES FTPERESP YES FTPSESS 5 FTPUID FIXOAAB FTPPASS XXXXXXX FTPPREF FIXOAAB FTPHNAME 144 162 14 400 ODETID ODCDE123XXX A 04 ADDR FTP MVS STATION 10 SID FPC ACME F TYPE PC FTPUID anonymous FTPPASS anonymous 2
97. 3 user code not known or invalid See also corresponding parameter XNUMCHCK of rvs stations table x 25 entry To support more than one X 25 multi channel links you have to define this parameter for each X 25 multi channel CTCP The parameter without Index extension is valid for all defined X 25 multi channel links in your rvs Monitor XOTLOCAD xx ipaddress Own ip address of the local TCP IP stack The specified address will be used by the XOT listener task to accept incoming connections from XOT capable hardware e g XOT Router The ip address for this parameter may be specified as a dotted decimal number or as a symbolic name dns name If this parameter is not coded the default ip address of the local TCP IP stack will be used XOTLPORT xx 1998 nn nn value between 0 and 32767 Local port number used for the XOT server function The specified number will be used by the XOT listener task to accept incoming connections from XOT capable hardware e g XOT Router The default value of 1998 is the port number recommended by the XOT RFC 1613 If the index xx is not coded the index value 1 will be automatically assigned XOTNAME xx zname Reference name for the specified TCP IP stack If the parameter is not specified the default TCP IP stack will be used The Name may be any alphanumeric string with a length of max 8 bytes If the index xx for the stack is not coded the index value 1 will be automatically assigned X
98. 321 All parameters with same index specify one specific CTCP The index has to be defined for every mandatory parameter Optional parameters without index are valid for all defined CTCPs optional parameters with index are valid for the specified CTCP only 4 1 Parameters used only for the X25 component via XOT XOTLOCAD xx ipaddress Own ip address of local TCP IP stack XOTLPORTLxx 1998 nn Local port number for xot server function XOTREMADY xx ipaddress ip address of xot router XOTRPORT xx 1998 nn Port number of xot router XOTUSE xx YES NO Indication for the use of the XOT component name Reference name of the defined TCP IP stack 4 2 Parameters used only for the X25 component via NPSI rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset XAPPLID xx name Application ID of the local own station XLUNAME xx name LU name of the local X 25 multichannel link XNUMCHCK xx YES NO checking of incoming call 5 Parameters used only for the LU62 component LU62USE NO YES Indication for the use of the LU62 component LU62MAX 0 nnn max number of sessions LU62APPL name Application ID of the local own station LU62MODE mode1 mode2 mode3 MODE names for LU62 sessions ODID name Odette identification of the own station X25TOT 10 nn timeout interval 6 Parameters used only for the TCP IP component TCPUSE NO YES Indication for the use of the TCP IP compo
99. 4 PDF0015A PROC PAPIER 015 RII III III III RESTORE OF rvs CONTROL DATA SET USE IT IN CASE OF CONTROL DATASET IS DAMAGED OR CONTROL DATASET IS FULL PDFO014A MUST HAVE RUN PREVIOUS TO THIS PROCEDURE rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset J KKK de He e He de He de He de He RECOVER EXEC PGM IDCAMS STEPLIB DD DSN SYS1 LINKLIB DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSIN DD DELETE RVS KD CLUSTER DEFINE CLUSTER NAME RVS KD CYL 3 1 VOLUMES volume FREESPACE 40 30 KEYS 70 O SHAREOPTIONS 4 3 RECORDSIZE 550 1000 UNIQUE DATA NAME RVS KD DATA CONTROLINTERVALSIZE 4096 INDEX NAME RVS KD INDEX CONTROLINTERVALSIZE 1024 SDF015A EXEC PGM DF073A00 STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT amp PAPIER KD DD DSN RVS KD DISP SHR KDSAVE DD DSN RVS KDSAVE DISP SHR RVSLOG DD DSN RVS LOG DISP SHR Remarks This procedure restores the rvs Controldataset The following files are used for this Last backup copy of rvs Controldataset created by procedure PDF0014A assigned with ddname KDSAVE Current rvs Logdataset not the backup copy assigned with ddname RVSLOG The backup copy of the rvs Logdataset is not used So the resource assigned with ddname LOGSAVE in procedure PDF0014A be set dummy But however these
100. 40 VALID ONLY IF KDTRANS R RESTART IN PROGRESS RESTART COUNT MAY BE ZERO DS XL59 RESERVED KDVOLNRD DS CL6 VOLUME NUMBER DISK KDVOLNRT DS CL6 VOLUME NUMBER TAPE DS XL61 RESERVED KDDEVTYP DS DEVICE TYP MEANING OF THE BITS IS TAPE EQU X 80 GDG EQU X 08 DISK EQU X 20 MSS EQU X 22 JOB EQU X 10 THE RECEIVED DATASET CONTAINS JCL WHICH IS TO BE STARTED BY SYSOUT EQU X 01 THE RECEIVED DATA SHALL BE COPIED TO A SYSOUT QUEUE DS RESERVED ce ce ce ce RRA RR ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce ce RRE RRE RRE RRA AAA AR ARA RAR ARA RR INFORMATION FOR DATASET PROCESSING AFTER TRANSMISSION ke ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce RR ce ce ce e e e ce e eee ee ecce c e e e e A RR KDDSNNEW DS OCL44 PHYSICAL DSNAME OF THE DATASET TO BE SENT OR RECEIVED KDDSNOLD DS CL44 ALIAS NAME FOR KDDSNNEW KDSYSOUT DS C SYSOUT CLASS IF KDDEVTYP SYSOUT KDDISP DS DATA SET DISPOSITION KEEP EQU X 80 X 80 KEEP CATLG EQU X 40 X 40 CATLG UNCATLG EQU X 20 X 20 UNCATLG DELETE EQU X 10 X 10 DELETE KDSUNIT DS CL8 SYMBOLIC UNIT NAME KDDEST DS CL6 DESTINATION WHEN SYSOUT DATASET KDPROG DS CL8 SYSOUT PROGRAM NAME KDJOB DS CL8 NAME OF A PDS MEMBER CONTAINING A JOB WHICH IS TO BE STARTED BY rvs AFTER THE DATASET HAS BEEN RECEIVED KDCOPIES DS CL2 NUMBER OF SYSOUT COPIES KDFORM DS CLA SYSOUT FORM NUMBER DS CL12 RESERVED e oe ce ce ce
101. 5 yy register 0 zz feedback code For the meaning of these codes see the IBM manual SC27 0449 ACF VTAM Programming Name of the VTAM macro issued For SEND and RECEIVE macros the contents of the buffer pointed to is printed in dump format SID R11 SESSION S2 DSN DDF RV1R11 TEST11 VOL ELW104 DATE 87 139 TIME 11 21 3852 RPLADDR 00016928 RPLDATA 00202370 500406D4 00016918 00000000 0001000 00800000 0003 9 0 0380E000 00016260 03000084 29800000 00000000 000000F8 0000010C 10309450 00000000 RC 00 00 00 80800001 40000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 000349DC 80008010 00000000 00000000 00000000 RECEIVE 1 4 4 6 4BD9E5F1 D9F1F14B E3C5E2E3 F1F14040 40404040 40404040 40404040 ADDF RV1IR11 TEST11 40404040 40404040 40404040 40F8F7F1 F3F9F1F1 1 9 0 0 F8D9E5F1 40404040 871391119008RV1 40D9F1F1 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 R11 4040 0 0 FOFOFOFO F0404040 40404040 4040D6F3 F2F1F8F7 F4FOFOFO FOFOF040 0000000 0321874000000 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 gt 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 e 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 40404040 00000000 SID R11 SESSION S2 DSN DDF RV1R11 TEST11 VOL ELW104 DATE 87 139 TIME 11 21 3963 RPLADDR 00016928 RPLDATA 00202270 5004
102. 66 number of days 0 999 hh hours 00 24 mm minutes 00 59 ss seconds 00 59 t tenths of a second 0 9 Using the program DF076A Batch Job Example Run the Reference Utility in batch using the following sample job A JOB kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk RVS REFERENCE TABLE NECESSARY PARAMETER NONE OPTIONAL PARAMETERS INFILE O0UTFILE FMT STATUS TYPE SID DSNAME REFNR NRSYN QTM QDATE QDAY QTIME TTM TDATE TDAY TTIME y RK RI RIK IK IK IKK He e KK KKK KKK REFJOB EXEC PGM DF076A PARM rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix F Reference Utility program DF076A STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR KD DD DSN RVS KD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD DSN DISP NEW CATLG DELETE UNIT SYSDA CYL 1 1 SYSOUT SYSOUT SYSIN DD Note File SYSIN is not needed if the necessary search arguments are given in the parameter area in EXEC statement The program is callable from another application program as well e g assembler CALL DF076A INPARM OUTPARM GENPARM SYSTDCB VL INPARM is a parameter area to contain either keyword parameters or fixed format input record to the program OUTPARM is a parameter area to contain the response from the program after the execution This area must be large enough f
103. 80A00 KENY ATA IFTP EXEC FTP to be checked Information File by the i i FTP component if required to send the of wsMVS queued Data File to send the built information file rvs network y FTP Job FTP Output e transmitted UN FTP Server of the partner station TCP IP V3 R1 or higher 5 MVS UNIX Win95 WinNT Filetransfer with the FTP component of rvsMVS send direction rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit partner stations Resident Receive Ent rvs network routing files to rvsMVS station tvsMVS looks for files with special DS Names 3 Infofile puts T some information 2 about the file transfer into the rvsMVS Control Dataset and processes the file like required in the Resident Receive Entry TCP IP V3 R1 or higher Filetransfer with the FTP component of rvsMVS receive direction FTP partner rvsLight Shellscript origin X YZ destination ABC makeinfo exe o origin d destination put datafile put infofile makeinfo exe part of rvsLight to build the Infomation File TCP IP FTP Client of the partner station MVS UNIX Win95 WinNT The requirement for the use of this component is the installation of IBMs TCP IP for MVS Version 3 Release 2 or following version There are no restrictions in view of the equipm
104. ALOPTS 11 15 12 00 5 DOPTS DI 08 00 09 00 1 16 00 17 00 1 DOPTS MI 08 00 09 00 1 16 00 17 00 1 23 00 24 00 1 is equivalent to DIALOPTS 11 15 12 00 5 DOPTS TU 08 00 09 00 1 16 00 17 00 1 DOPTSHWE 08 00 09 00 1 16 00 17 00 1 23 00 24 00 1 is equivalent to DOPTS 11 15 12 00 5 D2 08 00 09 00 1 16 00 17 00 1 D3 08 00 09 00 1 16 00 17 00 1 23 00 24 00 1 EERPIN NEVER NORMAL If this option is set to NEVER a transmission gets status END after sending file successfully No end to end response EERP is expected If this option is set to NORMAL an EERP is expected for a sent file EERPOUT NEVER NORMAL If this option is set to NEVER no end to end response EERP will be send after receiving a file successfully If this option is set to NORMAL an EERP will be sent after receiving a file successfully rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset ISTATUS A CTIVE I NACTIVE Initial status of the station Optional parameter Inactive stations are not able to establish a connection session Connection session requests from or to an inactive station will be rejected This parameter is not valid for BTAM BSC leased lines NORELAIS sid Suppression of routing to the final destination sid This parameter may be used to reject receiving of files which are sent by the remote station with the destination sid Receiving of files with other destination than s
105. ARA RARA A ARRE RRE RRA AAA e e e e e e 3333 INSTRUCTIONS FOR VIRTUAL CIRCUITS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkkxkkxkxkxk X25VCCPT INDEX 1 FIRST ENTRY IN VCCPT MAXPKTL 128 MAX PACKET LENGTH VWINDOW 2 TRANSMIT RECEIVE WINDOW SIZE 2 INSLOW 6 0 FREE BUFFER 6 HIGHER THAN NCP X250UFT INDEX 1 DUMMY ENTRY OUFT e oe ce ce ce ce e e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce KKK ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e ee cese e e e e e e 3333 INSTRUCTIONS FOR MULTI CHANNEL LINK X30A0 e e ee e ee e ce de ce ce e ce ce e ce ee ce ce e ce ee e ee ce ce e ce ce e ce ce X30A0 X25MCH ADDRESS 047 3725 ADDRESS FULL DUPLEX FRMLGTH 131 MAXIMUM FRAME LENGTH LCGDEF 0 15 ON LCCGN 0 HIGHEST CHANL 15 MWINDOW 7 FRAM WINDOW 7 ANS CONT CONTINUE FOR NCP PU MACRO DBIT NO D BIT NOT USED IN PCNE DSABLTO 3 DISABLE TIMEOUT IN SECOND ENABLTO 3 ENABLE TIMEOUT IN SECOND GATE GENERAL GATE FUNCTION MUST BE USED ISTATUS ACTIVE LCNO NOTUSED INCOMING PACKETS LOGICAL CHANNELO LLCLIST LLC4 LLC4 MUST BE USED LUNAME X30A0A01 LU NAME NCPGRP G03050 NAME OF NCP GROUP MACRO NDRETRY 1 NUMBER OF TP NP RETRY NPRETRY 7 NUMBER OF RETRIES TPTIMER ELAPSED OWNER DUMMY PAD NO NO LLC5 OPERAND IS USED PKTMODL 8 MUST BE HIGHER THAN VWINDOW PUNAME X30A0A NAME OF THE PU SPAN SP11 STATION DTE THIS PHYSICAL LINK IS A DTE
106. ATE Date at which the send or receive entry was created QUEUEING TIME TRANSMISSION DATE Date at which the transmission was started TRANSMISSION TIME JOB CARD DSN Name of the dataset containing the jobcard of the corresponding remote user id JOB DSN Name of the dataset containing the job which may be submitted after a transmission rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features JOB MEMBER OK Name of the dataset member containing the job which may be submitted after a successful transmission JOB MEMBER ERR Name of the dataset member containing the job which may be submitted after an erroneous transmission The second part of the panel DFZ20P00 shows the history of the transmission The following events are possible EVENT CREATE The event indicates the creating of a send or receive request EVENT DFUX001 The event indicates the calling of the user exits DFUX001 EVENT OK JOB The event indicates the submission of a job after a successful transmission EVENT ERR JOB The event indicates the submission of a job after an erroneous transmission EVENT SC START The event indicates the start of the security component of rvsMVS EVENT SC END The event indicates the end of the security component of rvsMVS EVENT END OF T The event indicates the end of the transmission rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits 10
107. Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K LIST DS OPEN PROCESSING The message output data set could not be opened Look for correct definition of the job STATION PARM NOT COMPLETE The message could occur if a parameter set is not complete but end of data is indicated Action terminated the key will not be written into the Key Data data set READ KEYID NO HEX VALUES The KEYID parameter contains other characters than 0 9 A B C D E and F Action terminated the key will not be written into the Key Data data set READ KEYID NO HEX SYNTAX The KEYID parameter is not enclosed in apostrophes Action terminated the key will not be written into the Key Data data set READ KEYID LENGTH ERROR The KEYID parameter has not exactly 8 characters Action terminated the key will not be written into the Key Data data set READ INPUT PARAMETER No valid parameter could detect in the input line Action terminated the key will not be written into the Key Data data set UPDATE OF KEY DATA SET Summary message above this message the error reason will be shown PREPARING UPDATE NOT ALL PARAMS The message could occur if a parameter set is not complete but end of data will be indicated Action terminated the key will not be written into the Key Data data set WRITE NEW KEY INTO KEY DATASET The Key Data data set write module detects an error Register 15 contains the write return code in byte 2 and 3 and the program return code i
108. B KEYLIST EXEC PGM DFO54K PARM LIST ALL STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT 1 4 4 Function EXPT Write keys from the key management to a sequential dataset DD Statements KEYDATA key management dataset VSAM Dataset KEYPRINT sequential Output file SYSPRINT program logfile JOB KEYEXPT EXEC PGM DFO54K PARM EXPT ALL STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KEYPRINT DD DSN P390A KEYPRINT DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR 1 4 5 Function IMPT Write keys from a sequential dataset to the key management DD Statements KEYDATA key management dataset VSAM Dataset KEYIMPRT sequential input file SYSPRINT program logfile rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K A JOB KEYSIMPT EXEC PGM DF054K PARM IMPT ALL STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KEYIMPRT DD DSN P390A KEYPRINT DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR 1 4 6 Funktion ADMN Delete key s from the key management DD Statements KEYDATA key management dataset VSAM Dataset SYSPRINT x program logfile KEYPARM parameters KEYID Id of Key which is to delete hex value A JOB KEYDEL EXEC PGM DFO54K PARM ADMN STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR 2 SYSPRINT DD
109. BM has made an incompatible change for this macro within MVS SP 2 2 0 DSPLEVEL LOW MEDIUM HIGH Dispatching level for parallel transmission of datasets with the same name Started with rvsMVS rel 1 2 07 the internal ENQ name is expanded by the string USD DUNUSD TUNUSED where USD name of the partner station DUNUSD datestamp TUNUSED timestamp This values will be substitute by actual values in the following manner USD if DSPLEVEL MEDIUM or HIGH DUNUSD TUNUSED if DSPLEVEL HIGH DSPTI 60 nn Abbreviation DTI Dispatcher time interval in seconds nn may be a value between 5 and 999 This value determines the time interval after which the rvs dispatcher task becomes active Every nn seconds this task looks e ifa previous entered DIAL command is to be executed or e if the rvs control dataset contains send requests which are to be processed If there is a send request for a certain station and if the connection to this station is defined as a e VTAM connection or e X25 connection or e LU62 connection or BSC line connection using the automatic dial function see chapter 6 2 definition of stations table the dispatcher task initiates processing of the send requests if a send session or an autodial line is active and waiting for work For X25 connections an outgoing call is initiated in order to activate a switched virtual circuit If the SNA component the X25 component and no autodial is used in the install
110. C 2 should always be specified Explicite specification of all components functions of the transmission protocol This field will be ignored unless column 68 contains the value C X The use of this field allows the definition of very special transmission protocols This may be useful if a connection to another computer shall be established but software or hardware restrictions of the remote station require a modification of one of the rvs standard procedures described in the rvs Interface Description In case of such a requirement please consult the software producer VWAG reserved This field must contain blanks The following is an example of a program profile table included in the rvs Tables dataset member PROGPROF on the installation tape rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix rvsMVS Tables kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk rys PROGRAM PROFILE TABLE EXAMPLE XXXRXKK4K COLUMN SCALE ILIVILEIZILEIVITEIZI EE IVELEISTEEIVILEIAL E EIVELELISTELIVETEIGT ET IVI PROFILE1 SLAVE STATION FOR SWITCHED LINE TO rvsMVS PP1 DF055A00 DF034K00 DF035K00 DF057B00 DF059COO 00061 PROFILE2 MASTER STATION FOR SWITCHED LINE TO rvs DOS REL 2 PP2 DFO56B00 DF034K00 DF035K00 DF057BO0 059 00 00062 PROFILE3 MASTER STATION FOR SWITCHED LINE TO rvs RPG PP3 DF055A00 0341 00 DFO35L00 DF057B00 DF059COO A0062 PROFILE4 MASTER STATION FOR SWITCHED LINE TO COMPUTERS USING THE rvs STANDARD PROCEDU
111. CURITY EXT COMPRESS EXT VIA TA2 SID VA4 ADDR RVS MVS TSOL ODETID 00013000003xx 4 SECURITY EXT COMPRESS EXT VIA TA2 SID VA5 ADDR RVS MVS TSOL ODETID 00013000003xx VA5 SECURITY EXT COMPRESS EXT VIA TA2 RVST TABLES JRVSVIRT JOB PORTER ROTO TORO TORO ROTOR ORO RO ROTOR TOR ROTO RO ROO RO ROTOR TORO OR RR RR ae RIOR dededededesedededede dede de de ded RVSTTCL EXEC PGM DF130B00 DYNAMNBR 14 DPRTY 12 11 REGION 4096K STEPLIB DD DSN RVST LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD DUMMY ACT DD DUMMY MSGID DD DSN RVST TABLES MSGID DISP SHR MSGIDO1 DD DSN RVST TABLES MSGIDO1 DISP SHR KD DD DSN RVST KD DISP SHR RVSLOG DD DSN RVST LOG DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN RVST KEYS DISP SHR SYSWTO DD SYSOUT SYSWTOO1 DD DD SYSOUT INTRDRMP DD SYSOUT A INTRDR CNTL DD DSN RVST TABLES CNTL DISP SHR START DD DSN RVST TABLES START DISP SHR STATIONS DD DSN RVST TABLES STATIONS DISP SHR PROGPROF DD DSN RVST TABLES PROGPROF DISP SHR SESSIONS DD DSN RVST TABLES SESSIONS DISP SHR JOBCARD DD DSN RVST TABLES JOBCARD DISP SHR JOBCARDS DD DSN RVST TABLES JOBCARDS DISP SHR JOBCARDF DD DSN RVST TABLES JOBCARDF DISP SHR STAPEJC DD DSN RVST TABLES STAPEJC DISP SHR RTAPEJC DD DSN RVST TABLES RTAPEJC DISP SHR SYSOUTIC DD DSN RVST TABLES SYSOUTIJC DISP SHR FTPRVSJC DD
112. D rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features RVST TABLES CNTL Control Parameter MAIN STATION RVT STATION RVT TIME 05 ODID 00013000003xx RVT FIRSTLVL RVST JSSNAME OPC UNIT SYSDA RVST TABLES STATIONS Partner station SID TA2 ADDR RVS MVS TSOA ACME T LSIZE 32767 ULS YES TCPIPADR 299 446 086 246 XXNET TCPPORT 3308 TCPSESS 20 ODETID 00013000003xx TA2 RECVPW SENDPW SECURITY EXT COMPRESS EXT TYPE MVS SID TA3 ADDR RVS MVS TSOA ACME T LSIZE 32767 ULS YES TCPIPADR 499 556 086 246 XXNET TCPPORT 3308 TCPSESS 20 ODETID 00013000003xx TA3 RECVPW SENDPW SECURITY EXT COMPRESS EXT TYPEZMVS Virtual station for RVT SID TAV ADDR RVS MVS TSOA ACME T ODETID 00013000003xx TAV RECVPW SENDPW TYPE VIRT SID TAX ADDR RVS MVS TSOA ACME T ODETID 00013000003xx TAX RECVPW SENDPW TYPE VIRT SID TAY ADDR RVS MVS TSOA ACME T ODETID 00013000003 TAY RECVPW SENDPW TYPE VIRT SID TAZ ADDR RVS MVS TSOA ACME T ODETID 90013000003xx TAZ RECVPW SENDPW TYPE VIRT Virtual station for partner TA2 SID VA1 ADDR RVS MVS TSOL rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features ODETID 00013000003xx val SECURITY EXT COMPRESS EXT VIA TA2 SID VA2 ADDR RVS MVS TSOL ODETID 00013000003xx VA2 SECURITY EXT COMPRESS EXT VIA TA2 SID VA3 ADDR RVS MVS TSOL ODETID 00013000003xx VA3 SE
113. DF5503A A 111 111 READY TO TRANSMIT is displayed The status indicated by this message is necessary for any transmission If none of the above messages is displayed something does not work ok In most cases additional error messages will be written to console Depending on the kind of error error message the following things should be checked e definition of the line subchannel within the rvs stations table e IODEVICE generation for this subchannel parameter UNIT BSC2 e EP generation of the control unit e physical path between CPU control unit and modem hardware The line may be stopped again by entering the command P III Test of leased BSC line s Leased BSC lines should be activated within the monitor by entering the command A sid where sid denotes the station identification of the remote station For leased BSC lines there is a one to rvsMVS Installation Manual 7 Running Installation Tests one relationship between station identification and subchannel address for the assosiated line After activation the command DS should be used to obtain the status of the line If activation is ok one of the following messages will be displayed DF3019I A sid LINE 111 IS WAITING FOR WORK or DF30201 A sid 111 REMOTE STATION IS NOT READY If none of the above messages is displayed something does not work ok In most cases additional error messages will be written to console Depending on the kind o
114. DSN RVS USERDATA DISP SHR USERLOG DD DSN RVS USERLOG DISP SHR LOGDATA DD DSN RVS LOGDATA DISP SHR LOGLOG DD DSN RVS LOGLOG DISP SHR 9 6 4 Work with USP Panels Start Panel DF000U01 RECHNER VERBUND SYSTEM Ww REE WRK Ww Www RK RK WX KK KK KK KEK KK WK vx LEE KE wx KK REE wx RK KK LEE EE wx SELECT OPTION gt SEND A DATASET DISPLAY TRANSMISSIONS DELETE SEND REQUESTS CREATE RESIDENT RECEIVE ENTRY DISPLAY DELETE RESIDENT ENTRY DISPLAY TRANSMISSIONS EXTENDED CREATE USER SEPARATION ENTRY DISPLAY DELETE USER SEPARATION ENTRY DISPLAY USER SEPARATION LOG ENTRY S dq DE DE 4 e D X YES Z H RVS INFORMATIONS The start panel DFOO0U01 was expanded with the menu items 6 X Y Z Create a user mapping entry The menu item X shows a panel which allows the user to create new user mapping entries A user mapping entry is used by the user separation to map a given remote user id to a local RACF user id rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features RUSER LUSER USER JOBCARD SID SID of the remote station USERID Remote user id transmitted by the remote station during the OFTP communication LUSERID Local RACF user id used for mapping the remote user id JOBCARD of the dataset containing a jobcard for the remote user id This jobcard will be used for job submission by a resident receive entry rvsMVS In
115. E is used for this interface for IBM 3725 a LIC Type 1 is used This connection is used only for dialing If dialing is complete all data traffic is performed on the V 24 connection between contol unit and modem The Datenfernschaltger t DFG for the DATEX L network already includes the ACU But the physical connections to the controlunit are the same as if modem and ACU are separate boxes see figure below X 21bis data control DATEX L unit DFG V 25 dial The following is an example of an EP generation concerning the LINE and GROUP macros for a 2400 baud switched line with autodial function GROUP DIAL YES LNCTL BSC PAD NO TYPE EP LINE ADDRESS yyy xx AUTO zzz 20 CLOCKNG EXT CU 2703 DATRATE HIGH DUPLEX HALF SPEED 2400 TERM 2020 rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit Remarks e The parameters DIALZYES DUPLEX HALF LNCTL BSC and PAD NO mandatory The parameter CLOCKNG EXT should be specified for every line except for lines with a speed of 1200 baud If SPEED 1200 is specified CLOCKNG INT should be specified instead e denotes the last two characters of the MVS address for this line as specified in the IODEVICE macro yyy denotes the address of the control unit for the V 24 or X 21bis interface zzz denotes the address of the control unit for the V 25 interface used for
116. EDIT 999 DIRECTN B LSIZE 2000 OPTIONS NO PWMOD YES SPCLOGIC NO Direct Station Entry X 25 if you support more X 25 multi channel links Station XIS is directly connected and you support more than one X 25 multi channel links When dialing out rvsMVS looks for a not busy line among the specified X 25 group ISDN See also chapter 6 1 1 of this manual In addition to the explicitly coded parameters following default values are valid ACTMODE NORMAL CREDIT 999 DIRECTN B LSIZE 2000 OPTIONS NO PWMOD YES SPCLOGIC NO Direct Station Entry LU6 2 Station LU6 is directly connected In addition to the explicitly coded parameters following default values are valid AUTODIAL YES LBLKSIZE 2000 SPCLOGIC NO ACTMODE NORMAL Direct Station Entry rvsWIN Station PC1 is directly connected to rvsMVS rvs uses a fixed password while esablishing the session No LUNAME is needed any LUNAME is accepted rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 10 11 12 13 14 15 Direct Station Entry rvsWIN using RACF Station PC2 is directly connected to rvsMVS rvs checks the USERID and password of the user who wants to get access by rvsWIN see exit DFUX002 Appendix A No LUNAME is needed any LUNAME is accepted Direct Station Entry TCP IP Station TCP is directly connected In addition to the explicitly coded parameters the following default values are valid ISTATUS ACTIVE AUTODIAL YES DIALOP
117. FTP with xxx Subchannel address of the line sid identification of remote station nm Session denomination nn index of TCP IP control task nnnnn number of the used entry within SC Table 55555 used socket number will be dynamically allocated on a disk volume which belongs to the unit group with the symbolic name as stated in the rvs start parameter UNIT If a dataset with an equal name is already cataloged the existing dataset will be extended use with DISPZMOD Example After entering the commands TRACE rvs and ST1 S1 where S1 denotes the first send session to the remote station ST1 a dataset with name rvsMVS Installation Manual 8 Special Functions Procedures RVS ST1 S1 TRACE will be allocated 8 2 2 Start and Stop of rvs Trace For leased BSC lines the trace is started and stopped by the commands T sid and O sid With several lines to the same station you can choose one of them by stating the subchannel address Il T sid lll and O sid lll For switched BSC lines the trace should be started and stopped by the commands T III resp O III where denotes the subchannel address of the line For SNA sessions the trace is started and stopped by the commands T sid resp O sid where sid denotes the station identification of the remote station In this case a trace is started on all sessions which are defined for the remote station rvs stations table rvs sessions table indep
118. ION 02 FIRST RESTART AFTER TRANSMISSION ABEND THE FOLLOWING FOUR FIELDS CONTAIN DIFFERENT COUNTS FOR FILES BIGGER THAN 2 1 GB THESE VALUES MAY BE INCORRECT BECAUSE A FULLWORD IS LIMITED TO 2 1 GB FIELDS ACXDSBTE ACXLNBTE ACXRSTBL ACXBLCKS BELOW REPRESENT THE CORRECT VALUES BUT FOR REASONS OF COMPATIBILITY THE FOLLOWING FOUR FIELDS WILL ALSO BE PROVIDED WITH DATA FURTHER ON DS F NUMBER OF READ WRITTEN DATASET BYTES SINCE START LAST RESTART OF TRANSMISSION BINARY DS F NUMBER OF BYTES TRANSMITTED COMPRESSED DATA BYTES BYTES OF rvs CONTROL RECORDS SINCE START LAST RESTART OF TRANSMISSION BINARY DS F BLOCK OR RECORD NUMBER WITHIN DATASET FROM WHICH THE LAST RESTART HAS STARTED BINARY VALUE DS F NUMBER OF TRANSMITTED BLOCKS OR RECORDS OF DATASET INCLUDING THE NUMBER OF TRANS MITTED BLOCKS RECORDS OF ALL PREVIOUS RESTARTS BINARY VALUE DS UNITS OF FIELDS ACRSTBLK ACBLOCKS B COUNT OF DATASET BLOCKS R COUNT OF DATASET RECORDS DS X RESERVED DS CL3 SYSTEM COMPLETION CODE WHEN ABEND CHARACTER FORMAT DS CL3 USER COMPLETION CODE WHEN ABEND CHARACTER FORMAT DS F CORRESPONDING FIELD TO FIELD KDUSREXT OF THE KD RECORD USE IN DFUX001 EXTENSION STARTING WITH RVSMVS RELEASE 4 07 00 DC PL8 0 NUMBER OF BYTES IN DATASET PACKED FORMAT DC PL8 0 NUMBER OF BYTES TRANSMITTED PACKED FORMAT DC PL8 0 STARTING BLOCK NUMBER DURING RESTART PACKED DC PL8 0 TOTAL BLOCKS TRANSMITTED
119. If STORAC 0 is specified this display will be suppressed The value of this parameter may be displayed changed with the rvs command STORAC see Operation Manual TCPLOCAD xx ipaddress Own ip address of the local TCP IP stack This address will be used as source address when rvs acts as an initiator of connections Specification of this parameter may be useful when the local TCP IP stack includes more than one ip address If this parameter is not coded the default ip address of the local TCP IP stack will be used shown during initialization of the rvs TCP IP control task With release 2 5 11 the specified address will also be used for the listen task of the TCP IP control task Incoming connection requests will only be accepted if the connection request is sent to the specified ip address The ip address for this parameter may be specified as a dotted decimal number or as a symbolic name dns name Remark This parameter will be processed only in conjunction with parameter TCPPROD IBM TCPMAX xx 50 nnn nn value between 50 and 999 Maximum number of sessions for the specified TCP IP stack If the index xx for the stack is not coded the index value 1 will be automatically assigned TCPNAME xx name An 8 byte character field set to the name of the TCP IP address space used for this TCP IP stack For IBMs TCP IP the task s name of the address space is to be taken For the TCP IP product of Interlink the subsystem identi
120. MS OK 095 00 01 87 CALCULATION OF LINE ACTIVITY STARTS rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix D rvs statistics Output List Line Activity RVS SETAST ae age Rp 59 LINE ACTIVITY 01 87 gt LINE 0E3 CREATED 20 01 87 0 25 100 DAY 01 01 0 02 01 4 03 01 0 04 01 0 05 01 AAAAAAAARA RARA RARA 20 06 01 xxxskee 10 07 01 k de ke ke k k k k 11 08 01 x x x x 85 09 01 o kk II e e 30 10 01 0 11 01 0 12 01 e e e e e e e e e e e gt 153 13 01 IIIT III e e II Ke 34 14 01 FAAAAAAAAAA 1555863 15 01 AAAAAARAAAARA RAR 17 16 01 A A k e e e e e k k k k 13 17 01 0 18 01 0 amp 19 01 FAAAAAARARA RARA 20 20 01 4 21 01 0 22 01 0 23 01 0 24 01 0 25 01 0 26 01 0 27 01 0 28 01 0 29 01 0 30 01 0 31 01 0 D 6 Legend of rvs statistics TOTAL NUMBER OF RECORDS dd mm yy NUMBER OF VALID RECORDS NUMBER OF IGNORED RECORDS number of records of the chosen time interval number of valid records number of implausible or comment records Records will be ignored within the statistics for th
121. NA connection is established send session s receive session s all transmissions of datasets which are queued for sending will be performed automatically by the rvs monitor indicated by several messages If a leased BSC line is used for transmission all transmissions of datasets which are queued for sending will be performed automatically by the rvs monitor after activation of the line within rvs and depending on the situation within the remote installation If a switched BSC line is used for transmission after activation of the line within rvs the line connection to the remote installation must be established dialing and for telephone lines the modems on both sides must be switched from voice to data Both dialing and modem switching may be done manually or automatically depending on the hardware capabilities and the definitions within rvs autodial function If the line connection is established and the identification between local and remote station is complete the datasets queued for sending will be transmitted Remarks If transmissions on BSC lines are not executed a rvs trace and in special cases a GTF trace CCW trace should be activated for the used line in order to obtain more information about the failing transmission These information together with the rvs messages of this situation should be discussed with the software producer The following station identification is used for VW AG R11 Volkswagen AG Wolfsbu
122. NS of the rvs Tables file must be installed if the SNA component of rvs shall be used for transmissions to at least one remote station The use of a session profile is quite similar to the use of a program profile for BSC lines A session profile defines the number and type s of sessions to a remote station Additionally different transmission protocols may be defined for different sessions A session profile is assigned to each entry of the stations table which is defined to use VTAM SDLC line s This assignment is done during start of the rvs monitor Each session profile consists of a group of one ore more statements lines within this table which are summarized to the session profile name in columns 1 3 of the first line Each line within a session profile defines one session In general several parallel sessions are defined between two stations One session profile may be used for different remote stations The first line of a session profile must contain a nonblank character string in columns 1 3 the end of a session profile will be indicated if e end of the table is reached or e the next line contains in columns 1 3 a character string different from the previous session profile name Lines with a in column 1 are treated as comment The following fields are included within one line definition of one session of a session profile Name of the session profile alphanumeric free selectable This name is used o
123. OTREMAD xx ipaddress Remote ip address of the XOT capable hardware e g XOT Router used by the XOT communication task to establish a connection The ip address for this parameter may be specified as a dotted decimal number or as a symbolic name dns name XOTRPORT xx 2 1998 nn nn value between 0 and 32767 Remote port number of the XOT capable hardware e g XOT Router used by the XOT communication task to establish a connection The default value of 1998 is the port number recommended by the XOT RFC 1613 If the index xx is not coded the index value 1 will be automatically assigned rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset XOTUSE YES NO This parameter is used for the X25 component only It indicates the use of X 25 via XOT in case of YES or X 25 via NPSI in case of NO as X 25 network YPREFIX name TSO USERID This parameter is used for the compression security component only This parameter specifies the user prefix name 1 7 characters All compression security temporary files to be created by rvsMVS have to start with this prefix Alike with the parameter SECRPREF YSTORCL name This parameter is used for the security component only This parameter specifies the name of the SMS storage class used for the allocation of the compression security temporary files If not defined the value of the parameter SMSSTOCL will be used If both parameters YSTORCL and SMSSTOCL
124. OUT SYSLIB DD DSN RVS SOURCE DISP SHR SYSUT1 DD UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 1 SYSUT2 DD UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 1 SYSUT3 DD UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 1 SYSIN DD RVSDYN LOADLIB RVS LOADLIB PWKD RVSPASS rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS END Execution of this job results in creation of JCL stored in the dataset RVS DYN This JCL should be modified jobcard etc and executed For operating system MVS XA both addressing mode AMODE and residency mode RMODE must be set to 24 bit addressing 5 4 Change of dataset names within Tables file In order to adjust the sample jobs procedures of the Tables file to requirements of the installation the names of the following datasets unless the names of this manual shall be used should be changed wherever these names appear in the tables file rvs load library RVS LOAD rvs control dataset RVS KD rvs log dataset RVS LOG rvs tables dataset RVS TABLES rvs key dataset RVS KEY DS rvs permission tables dataset RVS PTABLES 5 5 Creation of rvs Control Dataset The following jobs members DEFKD and INITKD of rvs Tables Dataset may be used to create the control dataset A JOB KDDEFINE EXEC PGM IDCAMS STEPLIB DD DSN SYS1 LINKLIB DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSIN DD DEFINE CLUSTER NAME RVS KD CYL 3 1 VOLUMES volume FREESPACE 40 30 KEYS 70 O SHAREOPTIONS 4 3
125. Optional parameter ACTMODE NORMAL sessions can be activated by every activation command except A ALL NORMAL is default ACTMODE ALL sessions can be activated explicit or by an A ALL command Operator commands Activation of sessions see chapter 5 6 of rvsMVS Operation Manual ACTOPTS tw rt tw1 rt1 tw2 rt2 tw3 rt3 tw4 rt4 Options for automatic activation see AUTOACT of sessions Optional parameter tw tw1 tw2 specifies the time windows when AUTOACT is active Start time and end time must be written in hours and minutes Syntax tw hh mm hh mm Default value is 00 00 24 00 rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset rt rt1 rt2 specifies the AUTOACT retry time The retry time is a delay for the program to try the activation again The retry time is of no meaning if the last attempt was successful If last establishing of the session fails the next attempt starts after retry time has elapsed To avoid loops retry values less than 5 minutes are not allowed Allowed values 5 255 min Default value is 60 minutes The parameters must be put in brackets separated by comma Maximal input are four combinations of tw and rt Example ACTOPTS 11 15 12 00 5 14 02 17 00 10 ON OFF Autoactivation of SNA sessions Optional parameter Sessions will be automatically re activated after an abnormal or normal end The reactivation starts not immediately but
126. PE B BSC LINE SWITCHED OR LEASED V VTAM LINE SNA SESSION X X 25 LINE ODETTE PROTOCOL T TCP IP LINE ODETTE PROTOCOL H XOT LINE ODETTE PROTOCOL ACCTCPN DS H INDEX NUMBER ACLOCAL DS CL3 rvs STATION ID OF LOCAL OWN STATION DS XL5 RESERVED ACDIRECT DS CL3 rvs STATION ID OF DIRECT CONNECTED STATION DS XL5 RESERVED ACSENDER DS CL3 rvs STATION ID OF FIRST SENDER DS XL5 RESERVED ACRECEIV DS CL3 rvs STATION ID OF FINAL RECEIVER DS XL5 RESERVED ACLINEAD DS CL3 PHYSICAL LINE SUBCHANNEL ADDRESS IF ACLTYPE B DS x RESERVED ACNUMBER DS CL7 ACCOUNT NUMBER SPECIFIED OR OBTAINED BY DEFAULT FOR THIS TRANSMISSION DS RESERVED ACDSN1 DS CL44 NAME OF DATASET USED FOR COMMUNICATION WITH REMOTE STATION ACDSN2 DS CL44 PHYSICAL NAME OF DATASET USED TO ALLOCATE THE DATASET ON DISK ACVOLS DS CL6 DISK VOLUME NUMBER OF DATASET DS XL2 RESERVED rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix C Description of accounting information ACRECEM ACBLKSI ACLRECL ACRSTCNT E FF FF o ACDSBYTE ACLNBYTE ACRSTBLK ACBLOCKS ACDTYPE ACSCC ACUCC ACUSREXT ACXDSBTE ACXLNBTE ACXRSTBL ACXBLCKS ACEND DS X RECORD FORMAT OF DATASET SAME FORMAT AS FIELD DCBRECFM OF DCB1 DS X RESERVED DS H BLOCKSIZE OF DATASET DS H RECORD LENGTH OF DATASET DS H NUMBER OF RESTARTS BINARY PERFORMED TO TRANSMIT RECEIVE THIS DATASET 01 NORMAL START OF TRANSMISS
127. PROF J Name of SNA session profile Mandatory parameter No default value TYPE WIN 3270 Mandatory parameter for remote stations using rvsWIN rvsWIN is a file tranfer product for PC under MS WINDOWS using SNA 3270 protocol E g SID PC1 ADDR PC Nr 1 or SID PC2 ADDR PC Nr 2 TYPE WIN 3270 TYPE WIN 3270 RECVPW PSW_PC1 USERID USER_PC2 It is not necessary to define an LUNAME any LUNAME 15 accepted The entry is used for both directions SEND and RECEIVE The access to rvsMVS is controlled by either checking the password RECVPW only example PC1 or checking the RACF userid USERID in combination with a valid RACF password PC2 The type of checking depends on whether RECVPW or USERID is specified and is done in exit DFUX002 see appendix USERID 1 userid userid 1 8 characters UID J Userid of rvsWIN station user see above rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 3 Subset 3 valid for station entries using ODETTE FTP Definition COMPRESS Indication for use of OFTP compression CREDIT credit of data exchange buffer DIRECTN transmission direction EERPEXTR name of EERP receive user exit ODETID ODETTE identification OWNOID ODETTE identification of own station 1 RECVPW receive password s SENDPW send password SFIDEXTR name of SFID receive user exit SFIDEXT
128. RE WITHOUT RESTART PP4 DFO55A00 DF034MOO DF035MOO DF057BO0 DFO59C00 60062 PROFILE5 SLAVE STATION FOR SWITCHED LINE TO COMPUTERS USING THE rvs STANDARD PROCEDURE WITH RESTART PP5 DF055A00 DF034MOO DF035MOO DF057B00 059 00 0061 060 PROFILE6 SLAVE STATION FOR SWITCHED LINE COMPUTERS USING THE FILE TRANSFER PROTOCOL VDA 4914 PP6 DFO55A00 DF034MOO DF035MOO DF057B00 DF059COO F0061 PROFILE7 MASTER STATION FOR SWITCHED LINE TO COMPUTERS USING THE FILE TRANSFER PROTOCOL VDA 4914 PP7 DF055A00 DF034MOO DF035MOO DF057B00 DF059COO F0063 PROFILE8 MASTER STATION FOR SWITCHED LINE TO COMPUTERS USING THE rvs RJE PROTOCOL PP8 DFO55A00 DF034MOO DF035MOO DF057B00 DF059COO R0062 PROFILE9 MASTER STATION FOR SWITCHED LINE TO rvs DOS REL 3 PP9 DFO55A00 DF034K00 DF035K00 DF057B00 DF059COO E0062 PROFILEO LEASED LINE TO rvsMVS OR rvs DOS REL 2 PPO DF056B00 DF034K00 DF035K00 DF057B00 059 00 000E2 ke ke ke kk kk kk END OF TABLE xx k k k k d k kkk k kkk k kk kkk e kkk kkk e ke e ke e e ke ke kkk rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix l Key Data Utility Program DF054K I Key Data Utility Program DF054K 1 1 Introduction This document describes the changes for security referred to release level 02 05 05 rvsMVS 1 2 rvs Key Data dataset The rvsMVS Key Data dataset RVS KEY DS is organized as a VSAM KSDS This is a mandatory data set if the rvs installation wants to use the S
129. RECORDSIZE 550 1000 UNIQUE DATA NAME RVS KD DATA CONTROLINTERVALSIZE 4096 INDEX NAME RVS KD INDEX CONTROLINTERVALSIZE 1024 B JOB KDINIT EXEC PGM DF079B00 STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KD DD DSN RVS KD DISP SHR rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS Remarks The space for the control dataset has been selected for approx 30 transmissions per day If more transmissions are planned or already executed the space specification must be increased The IDCAMS parameter KEYS SHAREOPTIONS and RECORDSIZE should not be modified If the specified volume is shared between two or more systems the control dataset should be created on the same volume where the user catalog containing the catalog entry for the control dataset resides If you use SMS please use the job DEFKDSMS to create the control dataset Warning e f catalog and controldataset reside on different volumes in a shared environment interlock situations and system hang ups may occur e f you use KD dataset in SYSPLEX environment you can get a problem with duplicate indexes The Problem can occur if a new EXTEND of KD data set is created Solution The problem is fixed if your load library is APF authorized If not you have to use a primary allocation of KD data set which is large enough to avoid build of new EXTEND for KD data set 5 6 Creation of rvs Log Dat
130. S address as specified in the IODEVICE macro 3 1 2 BSC lines with autodial function Interface V 25 Two things must be done to define a BSC line with autodial function which is to be used by rvs e definition of the line within the IODEVICE generation MVS and e generation of the line within the control unit EP generation IODEVICE generation of BSC lines with autodial function The following parameters should be used for a BSC line with autodial function IODEVICE ADDRESS xxx FEATURE AUTOCALL ADAPTER BSCA TCU 2703 UNIT BSC2 xxx denotes the 3 byte subchannel address of the line rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit EP generation for BSC lines with autodial function The following figure shows the physical connections between control unit modem and automatic calling unit ACU V 24 data d network modem control unit V 25 dial ACU Remarks The physical connection between control unit and modem should be a connection as described in recommendation CCITT for V 24 or X 21bis interface For IBM 3705 a lineset 1D is used for this interface for IBM 3725 a LIC Type 1 is used This is the same connection as used for BSC lines without autodial function The physical connection between control unit and ACU must be a connection as described in recommendation CCITT for V 25 interface For IBM 3705 a line set 1
131. S USERS s kk e ke eek ke ehe eek ke ke ehe ee kk ke e hee e KK ke e he eek ke ke hehe eek ke ke ke ke ek He e ke e He eek kk He He He He He He de ke ke k k k COMMAND gt OPTION gt 1 CHANGE PASSWORD 2 UPDATE DELETE OR ADD USER PROFILE 3 DISPLAY USER PROFILES PASSWORD gt NEW PASSWORD gt USERID ll 11 rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS The term USERID means that a TSO userid is to be specified The required password has an initial value of rvs It may be changed after installation of rvs Note This password is also used within the logon procedure of the remote operating function see Appendix G With option 1 you may change this password If option 2 is selected the following screen will be displayed The valid rvs password and a USERID must be supplied for this function kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk DEA20POO k RARA RRA ke ke e RRA e ke e RA RRA AR RVS ADD OR CHANGE AUTHORIZATIONS OF RVS USERS KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK ee KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ke He He ec kk ke e He he RR RAR 522 INSERT TO ADD OR TO DELETE FOLLOWING AUTHORIZATIONS FOR USER XXXXXXX DELETING SEND REQUESTS DELETING OR UPDATING RESIDENT ENTRIES Specify the character A if authorization for this function is to be defined for a new or existing USERID A new profile will be created only if at least one of the input f
132. S name of SFID send user exit SPCLOGIC special logic SSIDEXTR name of SSID receive user exit SSIDEXTS name of SSID send user exit TYPE MVS mandatory parameter Description of rvs Station Table Parameters in detail COMPRESS YES RVS NO OFTP compression Optional parameter The parameter indicates whether the compression method defined for the OFTP is to be used or not Default value COMPRESS YES Note e This parameter works together with the general compression parameter please refer to chapter 6 2 0 CREDIT 1 10 999 Data exchange buffer credits Optional parameter Allowed are values between 1 and 999 The specified number of exchange buffers can be sent consecutively by the sender without response of the receiver DIRECTN S R Transmission direction Optional parameter This attribute specifies whether the local station wants only to SEND S files RECEIVE R files or do BOTH B functions during one session P stands for PAY ONLY FOR SEND DATA and implicits the value BOTH if the local station is responder and the value SEND if the local station is initiator of the session EERPEXTR name Name of the EERP_Receive_User_Exit See appendix A 6 for more details of using the exit rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset No default value ODETID 1 hz Odette id Odette id max 25 chars OID 1 Odette ident
133. SC line subchannel 094 shall be activated There are some special commands which are valid only in conjunction with the remote operating function if entered from the screen OP ON Initiates the function to process rvs commands this command is executed automatically after logon processing it must be entered only if the command OP OFF has been entered before RMSG ON Initiates the function to display rvs messages on the screen this command is executed automatically after logon processing it must be entered only if the command RMSG OFF has been entered before OP OFF Stops the function to process rvs commands which are entered from the screen and stops display of rvs messages on the screen If this command has been entered and processing of commands display of messages shall be reinitialized both commands ON and RMSG ON must be entered RMSG OFF Stops the function to display rvs messages on the screen To reinitiate this function the command RMSG ON must be entered RMSG ONP Same as command RMSG ON Additional all print only messages messages which are not displayed on console but only in the rvs job log will be displayed on the screen To stop display of print only messages but not display of others the commands RMSG OFF and RMSG ON must be entered rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix G Using the Remote Operating Function LOGOFF PF1 KEY PF2 PF11 and PF13 PF24 PF12 KEY
134. SID TAY OSID VA4 DSID TAX OSID VA4 DSID TAZ OSID VA4 DSID TAV OSID VA5 DSID TAX OSID VA5 DSID TAY OSID VA5 DSID TAZ Send requests examples ORT TAV DSN RVS DISP KEEP DSNOLD RVSA ORT TAX DSN RVS DISP KEEP DSNOLD RVSA ORT TAY DSN RVS DISP KEEP DSNOLD RVSB ORT TAZ DSN RVS 00001 00001 00001 00001 00001 00001 00001 TESTA T1801 for TESTA T1802 for TESTB T1801 for TESTB T1802 for user user user user RVSA RVSA RVSB RVSB rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features DISP KEEP DSNOLD RVSB 00001 DSN RVS 00001 TESTC T1801 for user RVSC DISP KEEP DSNOLD RVSC 00001 ORT TAX DSN RVS 00001 TESTC T1802 for user RVSC DISP KEEP DSNOLD RVSC 00001 ORT TAX DSN RVS 00001 TESTD T1801 for user RVSD DISP KEEP DSNOLD RVSD 00001 ORT TAZ DSN RVS 00001 TESTD T1802 for user RVSD DISP KEEP DSNOLD RVSD 00001 ORT TAZ DSN RVS 00001 TESTE T1801 for user RVSE DISP KEEP DSNOLD RVSE 00001 ORT TAX DSN RVS 00001 TESTE T1802 for user RVSE DISP KEEP DSNOLD RVSE 00001 ORT TAX DSN RVS 00001 TESTx T1801 for user RVSD NO PERMISSION NAME DISP KEEP DSNOLD RVSD 00001 ORT TAX DSN RVS 00001 TESTY T1802 for user RVSE NO PERMISSTON NAME DISP KEEP DSNOLD RVSE 00001 ORT TAV DSN RVS 00001 TESTE T1802 for user RVSE NO PERMISSION ORT DISP KEEP DSNOLD RVSE 00001 9 6 User Separation USP step by step instructions 9 6 1 Int
135. SPF Version 2 Release 3 is required There are three system files to install for using the ISPF panels e panel dataset RVS ISPF PANEL that contains the panel members DFSOOPOO to DF550P00 Member DFOOOPOO contains the primary panel member DF100P00 contains the panel of option 1 sending a dataset etc member DFAOOPOO contains the panel of option user authorization and member DFSOOPOO is for internal use only e message dataset RVS ISPF MSGS that contains all ISPF error information messages e Aclist dataset RVS ISPF CLIST that contains all clists for controlling the panels These datasets may be allocated to the DD names ISPPLIB ISPMLIB and SYSPROC or respectively copied into existing datasets which are already allocated to these DD names Another possibility is to use a dynamic allocation as layed out on the following page In this case you only have to specify the variables 4DFCLIST 4DFPANEL and DFMSGS with the appropriate names e g RVS ISPF CLIST etc For using the TSO command rvs the following member RVS ISPF CLIST rvs must be inserted in the installation TSO command procedure library TEST IF CALLED UNDER ISPF rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS DEFINITION OF FIXED VARIABLES PLEASE INSERT YOUR OWN VARIABLES SET amp DFLOAD RVS LOADLIB SET amp DFCLIST RVS ISPF CLIST
136. STATUS ACTIVE ODETID 00013000003xx TAY SECURITY EXT COMPRESS GZIP SID TAZ ADDR GEDAS TEST VIA RVT ISTATUS ACTIVE ODETID 00013000003xx TAZ SECURITY EXT COMPRESS GZIP RVS TABLES JRVSVIRT JOB ROTOR ROTOR ROTOR ROTOR RO RVSTCl EXEC PGM DF130B00 DYNAMNBR 14 DPRTY 12 11 REGION 4096K STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD DUMMY ACT DD DUMMY MSGID DD DSN RVS TABLES MSGID DISP SHR MSGIDO1 DD DSN RVS TABLES MSGIDO1 DISP SHR KD DD DSN RVS KD DISP SHR RVSLOG DD DSN RVS LOG DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN RVS KEYS DISP SHR SYSWTO DD SYSWTOOL DD DD SYSOUT INTRDRMP DD SYSOUT A INTRDR CNTL DD DSN RVS TABLES CNTL DISP SHR START DD DSN RVS TABLES START DISP SHR STATIONS DD DSN RVS TABLES STATIONS DISP SHR PROGPROF DD DSN RVS TABLES PROGPROF DISP SHR SESSIONS DD DSN RVS TABLES SESSIONS DISP SHR JOBCARD DD DSN RVS TABLES JOBCARD DISP SHR JOBCARDS DD DSN RVS TABLES JOBCARDS DISP SHR JOBCARDF DD DSN RVS TABLES JOBCARDF DISP SHR STAPEJC DD DSN RVS TABLES STAPEJC DISP SHR RTAPEJC DD DSN RVS TABLES RTAPEJC DISP SHR SYSOUTJC DD DSN RVS TABLES SYSOUTJC DISP SHR FTPRVSIC DD DSN RVS TABLES FTPRVSJC DISP SHR KEY DD DSN RVS TABLES TKEYSECR DISP SHR rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features PFKEYS DD
137. SYSOUT KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR KEYPARAM DD KEYID A274F096 DEL This job remove this key from key management Info Version 1 0x01 Serial Number 1 0x01 Mode 1 0x01 Created At Jul 10 10 32 27 2003 UTC Created By unknown Owner unknown KeyPair ID a2 74 f0 96 validity Not Before Jul 10 10 32 25 2003 UTC Not After Oct 10 10 32 25 2003 UTC Subject Key Info Public Key Algorithm rsaEncryption Exponent 65537 0x10001 KeyData EndData rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix l Key Data Utility Program DF054K 1 5 Return codes of DF054K 0 NORMAL OK Note Successfully executed 4 KEY VALUE NO DDNAME DEFAULT USED Note DDNAME for key dataset wasn t found The default value KEYIN is used 8 WRONG PARAMETER Note At least 1 parameter is wrong 12 ERROR DURING READ INPUT PARAMETER 16 ERROR DURING WRITE NEW KEY INTO KEY DATASET 20 ERROR DURING WRITE NEW KEY INTO KEY DATASET DUPLICATE KEY Note Key ld alr
138. Se oe ee ei a eee eee CNTLMSG MEMBER A A A AA START MESSAGES OF SNA COMPONENT SUBSET COMPSNA1 DF3601 DF3713 START AND TERMINATION MESSAGE OF X25 LU62 COMPONENT SUBSET COMPX251 DF9409 DF9415 COMBINATION COMPSNA1 COMPX251 SUBSET STANDARD DF3601 DF3713 DF9409 DF9415 OUTPUT OF DD COMMAND SUBSET DISPLAY1 DEFAULT CNSLDSPL DEFAULT RMOPDSPL DF5211 JOBSTART MESSAGE FOR STATION X01 SUBSET JOBSTRT1 gt 0 5801 R X01 lt Remark The example above in included in the tables dataset of the distribution tape 6 6 2 Additional SYSOUT protocols Most but not all of the rvs messages are displayed on the operators console For example all messages containing the character in column 7 of the message identifier are not displayed on console In some cases for example problem determination it is useful to have more information about the activity of the rvs monitor Because of such reasons it is possible to define one or more SYSOUT protocols for the rvs monitor The content of these protocols may be selected by message identifiers To define an additional SYSOUT protocol the following things must be done 1 Two additional DD statements must be inserted into the rvs start procedure for one SYSOUT protocol The first one is used to allocate a member of the rvs tables dataset which contains the information about the messages to be
139. Security files DSPTIR nn 600 Waittime in seconds after which the list of resident receive entries in the monitors address space will be refreshed Starting with version 4 02 a list of all resident receive entries is built during monitor start within the monitors address space This list is refreshed periodically in order to detect new or changed resident entries nn may be a value between 5 and 999 seconds the default value is 10 minutes 2 Parameters used only for the BSC component BSCUSE YES NO Indication for the use of the BSC component 3 Parameters used only for the SNA component SNAUSE YES NO Indication for the use of the SNA component APPLID name Application ID of the local own station 4 Parameters used only for the X25 component MAXSVC xx 1 n Max number of switched virtual circuits ODID xx name Odette identification of the own station PSIZE xx 128 nnn Packet size of the national X25 network WSIZE xx 2 n Windowsize for packet layer XBFSIZE 2000 nnn Max exchange buffer size XNUMBER xx number calling number of the local multichannel link X25GROUP groupid n m Definition of X25 groups X25TOT 10 nn timeout interval X25USE NO YES Indication for the use of the X25 component Note If you want to support more than one X 25 multi channel links you have to extend some of these parameters by an index xx 1 32 For instance X25NUMBER 1205361123456 X25NUMBER 12 05361654
140. Special Functions Procedures e e MAIN SYSTEM XR33 RVSFTP1 EXEC PGM FTP STEPLIB DD DSN SYS1 LINKLIB DISP SHR SYSUDUMP DD SYSOUT SYSDUMP DD SYSOUT INPUT DD DISP SHR DSN FIX0GG3 FTP FTPID FD2FA4 FA4 F000019 OUTPUT DD DISP OLD DSN FIX0GG3 FTP FTPOD FD2FA4 FA4 F000019 SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT RVSFTP2 EXEC PGM IEBPTPCH SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSUT1 DD DSN RVSFTP1 OUTPUT DISP OLD SYSUT2 DD SYSOUT PRINT MAXFLDS 1 RECORD FIELD 80 RVSFTP3 EXEC PGM IEFBR14 NEW DD DISP NEW CATLG CATLG DCB RVSFTP INPUT SPACE TRK 1 1 DSN FIX0003 TEST FTPND FD2FA4 FA4 F000019 TRACE DATA BLOCK FTP OUTPUT FILE gt SEND REMOTE STATION FA4 DATASET NAME FIX0004 TESTX33 QUEUEING TIME 97 133 11 19 50 EZA14501 MVS TCP IP FTP V3R1 EZA14561 OPEN name of foreign host EZA17721 FTP EXIT has been set EZA17361 conn 143 163 23 4 00021 EZA15541 Connecting to 143 163 23 4 port 21 220 SFTPSER IBM MVS V3R1 at OR11 11 21 17 on 05 13 97 220 Connection will close if idle for more than 50 minutes EZA1459I USER identify yourself to the host EZA17011I gt gt gt USER FIX0004 331 Send password please EZA17011I gt gt gt 55 k x 230 FIX0004 is logged on EZA1460I Command EZA17361 TYPE E EZA17011 gt gt gt 200 Representation type is EBCDIC EZA14601 Command EZA17361 MODE S EZA17011 gt gt gt MODE s 200 Data trans
141. Steps for installation of rvsMVS CNTL rvs Start parameter JOBCARD JCL for copy jobs RTAPEJC JCL for copy jobs STAPEJC JCL for copy jobs SYSOUTJC JCL for copy jobs MONITOR rvs Start Procedure MSGID no changes necessary PDF0002A procedure for display of complete transmissions PDF0009A procedure to delete old records from rvs Controldataset PDF0014A procedure to save rvs Controldataset PDF0015A procedure for recovery of rvs Controldataset PDF0015B procedure for recovery of rvs Controldataset SMS is used PROGPROF rvs Program Profile Table only necessary for spec profiles SESSIONS rvs Sessions Table START rvs commands to be executed automatically after start STATIONS rvs Stations Table PFKEYS RMOP PF Keys The other members of the Tables Dataset are used for optional functions for example rvs Statistics A detailed description of all members containing control information for the rvs Monitor may be found in chapter 6 of this manual 5 8 Installation of the rvs ISPF panels The rvs ISPF panels allows access to the control dataset of rvs in a convenient manner The rvs user may use the panels for e Queuing of datasets for transmission Display of completed transmissions Deletion of send requests Creation update or deletion of resident receive entries A detailed description of the functionality of the panels may be found in the rvsMVS User s Manual rvsMVS Benutzerhandbuch At least I
142. TP output return messages while execution of FTP commands A dashed line separates the individual entries An example of a complete trace is printed on the next pages An example shows the complete contents of an rvsMVS FTP trace file send direction e e ee ce ede e cede ce e ee ee ce eee ce ee e ee he ee e ce e cfe ce e ce ce e ce cec ce cec ce ec ce ec e e x kv TRACE STARTED DATE 97 133 TIME 11 21 2396 KKK ee hehehe hehehe hehe hehehe ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke Sk Sk Sk de de kk kk kk ke ke e e e e eee hehehe he he ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke e He ke ke kk e e He ke e ke de ke ke ke ke TRACE DATA BLOCK FTP HEADER FILE gt SEND REMOTE STATION FAS DATASET NAME FIX0004 TESTX33 QUEUEING TIME 97 133 11 19 50 HFIDCMD H HFIDDSN FIX0004 TESTX33 FA4 F000019 HFIDDATE 1997 05 13 HFIDTIME 11 19 50 HFIDUSER HFIDSIDC FD2 HFIDSIDS FAZ HFIDDEST 00013000001VW FAS HFIDORIG 00013000001VW FD2 HFIDFMT F HFIDLREC 00138 HFIDFSIZ 0000013 HFIDRESP Y HFIDEERP Y TRACE DATA BLOCK FTP JOB FILE SEND REMOTE STATION FAS DATASET NAME FIX0004 TESTX33 QUEUEING TIME 97 133 11 19 50 JOBNAME JDFA4001 FIX00031 JOB ABCDEFG 000 00 XXXXXXXX ABC DEF NOTIFY x xx x CLASS A MSGCLASS B PRTY 9 TIME 0030 RRR RR IKK RIKKI RARA KKK RVS JOBCARD rvsMVS Installation Manual 8
143. TP transmission to station sid is traced If a dataset is allocated for trace output the allocation uses the value from the startparameter UNIT for the symbolic unit group For more information about this trace see the chapter rvs Trace TSTAMP YES NO This parameter is used only at a realais station for indirect file transfer A timestamp Thhmmsst is appended to any name of a dataset that is routed over this relais station The dataset is allocated under this new name but will be sent to the next station under its original name This is useful in order to prevent datasets of same name to be allocated UCC uuu uut uun Specification of user completion codes in decimal for which an extended SNAP dump of the abended task will be taken DD statement RVSDUMP see rvs start procedure is used to write the dump data If other completion codes occur only a short SNAP dump will be taken If the same user completion code occurs more than one time within one monitor run an extended dump will be created only after the first occurrence of this abend code UNIT SYSDA unit Symbolic name of a disk unit group which will be used by the rvs monitor to allocate datasets during reception if other specifications resident receive entries see User Manual are not available This parameter is exclusive with the VOLUME parameter This unit group is also used when a partitioned organized dataset is queued for sending with me
144. TS 00 00 24 00 60 DIRECTN BOTH PWMOD YES SPCLOGIC NO Direct Station Entry FTP Station FTP MVS station is directly connected In addition to the explicitly coded parameters the following default values are valid TYPE MVS FTPHFILE YES FTPREFN YES FTPPORT 21 ISTATUS ACTIVE AUTODIAL YES DIALOPTS 00 00 24 00 60 Direct Station Entry FTP Station FPC PC station is directly connected In addition to the explicitely coded parameters the following default values are valid FTPPORT 21 FTPSESS 1 FTPRESP NO FTPERESP NO FTPHFILE NO FTPREFN NO ISTATUS ACTIVE AUTODIAL YES DIALOPTS 00 00 24 00 60 Indirect Station Entry Station IST is indirectly connected Relais station is BST Files to IST will be transmitted via BST The chosen relais station must also be specified see entry 1 BST Line Entry Entry for line OE2 In addition to the explicitly coded parameters following default values are valid ACCESSMET BTAM ACTMODE NORMAL ADDEVICE NO LBLKSIZE 2000 LINETYPE S OPTIONS NO PWMOD NO SPEED HIGH UCBNAME 0E2 Line Entry Entry for line 001 The BTAM subchannel address will be FE3 In addition to the explicitly coded parameters following default values are valid ACCESSMET BTAM ACTMODE NORMAL ADDEVICE NO LBLKSIZE 2000 LINETYPE S OPTIONS NO PWMOD NO SPEED HIGH Virtual Station Entry local Virtual Station local Station VC2 is local virtual station More info see chapter 9 5 Virtual Station Entry r
145. Table Parameters in detail ACCOUNT account J account 1 8 chars Account of remote station This value is taken when a dataset is to be received and no account is transmitted by the sender and no RR entry account exists No default value rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset ACTCLASS type distance Account classification for the connection with the remote station This parameter is used only if the rvs startparameter SMF is also coded The classification consists of the linetype L leased S switched and a specification for the distance L local F far distance l international Default ACTCLASS S L For more information see description of the SMF accounting record in the rvs source library RVS SOURCE ADDRESS P text string text string max 20 chars ADDR J Address of the station Optional parameter The text string must be put into quotes Within the quotes all characters blanks commas etc are allowed and will not be recognized as delimiters The maximal length of the string is 20 characters ADDRESS is only comment and can be shown on the console by the operator command X sid ALIASSID b sid sid 3 characters ASID J Alternative station identification Optional parameter This parameter can be used to address the remote station by a second name No default value AUTODIAL t YIESI NIO AD J
146. This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix rvsMVS Tables H rvsMVS Tables H 1 rvsMVS Program Profile Table only used for the BSC component The internal Program Profile Table contains a number of standard entries corresponding to the supported FTP s In addition to these fixed profiles some special profiles can be added using the dataset RVS TABLES PROGPROP Special program profiles are necessary for example for BTAM leased lines The name of the user defined profile must be defined within the rvs Stations Table by the parameter PPROF PPROF ppnamewith ppname 3 char The name of the program profile is free selectable but must not start with a A program profile is assigned to each entry station or line of the stations table which is defined to use BTAM BSC line s This assignment is done during start of the rvs monitor A program profile which is assigned to a line entry of the stations table is used only during activation of the line command A IIl see Operation Manual The only information of the program profile which is used in this case is e the name of the line control program column 5 12 and e the definition how the identification phase shall be done after a line connection is established column 72 All other information will be taken from the program profile which is assigned to the stations entry for the remote station at the time when this other informatio
147. VOLKSWAGEN T Systems Release 04 08 00 Installation Manual 2009 03 05 rvsMVS Installation Manual Contents This documentation is valid for rvsMVS release 04 For rvsMVS the following documentations are provided rvsMVS Benutzer Handbuch german Manual for rvs Users rvsMVS User Manual english Manual for rvs Users rvsMVS Operator Handbuch german Manual for rvs Operator rvsMVS Operation Manual english Manual for rvs Operator rvsMVS Messages and Codes english Overview about rvsMVS messages and abend codes Distribution information will be given kindly T Systems Enterprise Services GmbH Corporate Customers Silke Peigert Vertriebsassistenz rvs Goslarer Ufer 35 10589 Berlin Tel 49 30 3497 1165 Fax 49 30 3497 4139 Email mailto Silke Peigert t systems com Technical information will be given kindly T Systems Enterprise Services GmbH rvs Systems Goslarer Ufer 35 10589 Berlin Tel 49 30 3997 1777 Fax 49 30 3497 4139 Email mailto rvs service t systems com Copyright 2009 by Volkswagen AG T Systems gedas deutschland GmbH rvsMVS Installation Manual Contents Contents Ts uoi tada dada 5 2 Installation 2 5 2 1 Software Requirements
148. VS generates a Batch Job out of these information which invokes the FTP Session setup dataset transmission and session shutdown are executed within this FTP Job The processing of the FTP commands is logged in an output dataset which is checked after transmission by rvsMVS In this way it is ensured that the dataset has been correctly transmitted to the partner or if not the transmission is restarted automatically by rvsMVS To give the partner information regarding the transfer sender dataset format queuing time etc there is the possibility to send an information file along with the data itself This information file will be generated automatically by rvsMVS if desired Receiving data from an FTP partner rvsMVS as receiver first of all has no influence on receiving the dataset This is done only by the FTP To support the partner in sending the dataset s rvsLight is used a shell script which enables the FTP access and which creates and transmits the information file for the dataset to be transmitted sender final receiver name and format of the dataset etc rvsMVS is looking for information files periodically evaluates them registers the previous receiving of a dataset and starts the desired processing rename of dataset job start routing etc The following pictures shows transmission using the FTP component of rvsMVS partner rvsMVS station stations FTP partner transmitted Data File Queuing files DF0
149. VS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Column Description Session for operator operator communication This type of session is used for sending messages sid commana display of send requests queued in the remote station for transmission to the local own station Q sid command and mofification of the status of send request s queued in the remote station for transmission to the local own station sid command Send session used only to send datasets Receive session used only to receive datasets Transmission protocol for 3270 interface Change Direction Indicator within request header of a VTAM RU will be sent only in case of a change direction Normally rvs does not care about the Change Direction Indicator and will send it within each VTAM RU This specification may be useful in conjunction with sessions to PU type 2 computers where the rvs transmission protocol is half duplex flip flop Change Direction Indicator within request header of a VTAM RU will never be sent Normally rvs does not care about the Change Direction Indicator and will send it within each VTAM RU This specification may be useful in conjunction with sessions to PU type 2 computers where the rvs transmission protocol is half duplex flip flop specification for example necessary for NCR computers Each session to the remote station uses a different Logical Unit name no parallel sessions to the remote application
150. VS installation datasets rvsMVS documentation files in Word format Installation Manual doc Messages and Codes doc User Manual doc Benutzer Handbuch doc Operation Manual doc Operator Handbuch doc rvsMVS documentation files in Acrobat Reader format Installation Manual pdf Messages and Codes pdf User Manual pdf Benutzer Handbuch pdf Operation Manual pdf Operator Handbuch pdf 5 3 Creation of module DF067A Macro rvsDYN rvsMVS requires the generation of a module with name DF067A This module contains the installation dependent datasetnames and if used passwords of the rvs Systemfiles The dataset names and if present passwords will be scrambled and stored within the module This module is used by many rvs programs in order to perform dynamic allocation of one or more of the rvs Systemfiles if required Member rvsDYN of the Source Library second file of the rvs installation tape contains the macro rvsDYN which may be used to create the module This macro generates JCL statements Execution of these statements results in assembly and link of module DF067A rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of 5 Caution For operating system MVS XA both addressing mode AMODE and residency mode RMODE must be set to 24 bit addressing Coding of macro RVSDYN RVSDYN LOADLIB RVS LOADLIB dsname DSNKD RVS KD dsname DSNLOG RVS LOG dsname DSNTBL RVS TABLES ds
151. X25 component ODETTE FILE TRANSFER PROTOCOL This explains the different length of the fields If KDEXTFLD is filled with data in the sending station field KDEXTTYP should be set to character E Example of exit DFUX001 An example of DFUX001 is located on the rvsMVS installation tape in the rvs source library 2 file Please refer to this example in case of need of adaptation to your environment A 2 rvsWIN Exit DFUX002 The exit DFUX002 may be used to check authorization for access of rvsWIN users to rvsMVS The use of this exit allows for example an accommodation of rvs to RACF requirements the exit might check if an rvsWIN user using an RACF userid is authorized to get access to the rvsMVS on the host The loadname DFUX002 of this exit is required For operating system MVS XA both addressing mode AMODE and residency mode RMODE must be set to 24 bit addressing rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits The rvs loadlibrary on the installation tape contains this exit as load module The source module is distributed as well This distributed exit is adapted to RACF and may be adjusted if another security subsystem is used The exit is executed when an rvsWIN user wants to establish a session with rvsMVS A password record V record is exchanged between rvsWIN and rvsMVS and then checked in the exit DFUX002 Depending on the results returncode and the environment of the exit the access to rvsMVS is acc
152. XLUNAME1 MODE NAME MODNAME1 REMOTE STATION 106 DATE 92 223 TIME 13 28 5197 RPLADDR 07945538 RPLDATA 00206270 87953B66 079454C8 00000000 00001004 00800000 00038310 00000000 07945378 00000000 29800000 00000000 00000013 00000000 10309450 00000000 RC 00 00 00 80800000 40000000 00000000 079455A8 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 80008012 00000000 00000000 00000000 RPL EXTENSION C1D7D7C3 10140000 0100000A 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 08000000 00 090 0009 00000000 80008800 000000 8 0000010C 10309450 00000000 00001000 01000000 00000000 07945538 E7D3E4D5 C1D4C5F1 D4D6C4D5 C1D4C4F1 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 APPCCMD CONTROL ALLOC QUALIF Y ALLOCD WHATRCV ZERO RETURNCODE PRI SEC 00000000 OK 130502FF 0003D100 0006D9E5 E2D9C3E5 00000000 PA au A REM ON go enuen uonejeisu SANSA 2911810 9981 10 U0ISSIS senpe204g eroeds 8 rvsMVS Installation Manual 8 Special Functions Procedures 8 2 6 Format of TCP IP Trace For each executed TCP IP command socket interface assembler macro API a formatted trace record consisting of several rows is written Trace records are separated by a line of hyphens An example is printed on the next page Explanation of trace fields 1st row SOCKET REMOTE ADDRESS REMOTE PORT REMOTE STATION DATE TIME 274 row REQUEST Status of request S Request dependent row and data and parameter follo
153. YSOUT SYSIN DD DELETE RVS KDSAVE TEMP RRR KK HK KKK e ke e He hehe e HK HK KKK e e HK KKK ke e e He he ee eee je ke e e e He eje eee eee e He e ARA 7 SUBMIT OF SAVETEMP TO COPY KDSAVE TO TAPE ke e He e hee e ke HK KKK KH e e IKK e He e He he hee He He He He je ke e e e He eje eee eee he He e e KK SUBMIT EXEC PGM DF901A00 COND 0 EQ TEST 0 LT SAVE STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR IN DD DSN RVS TABLES SAVETEMP DISP SHR OUT DD SYSOUT A INTRDR KH KKK KKK HK HK KKK KKH KI KKK HK HK IKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK ARK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK DELETE OLD RECORDS FROM CONTROLDATASET k e e h e IK KK IKK IK KIRK KK IK IKK AK KKK KKK KR KK PDF0009A EXEC PROC PDF0009A INTV 2 COND 0 EQ TEST 4 LT SAVE 0 LT SUBMIT KKK KKK KH HK KKK KK HK IKK KK KK IKK ke e e He he hee ke ehe jeje ee e e eje ee AA rvs MONITOR J RRR HK KKK KKH KK hee e KH HK KKK e HK KKK ke e ehe he hee ke eee jeje e e e He eje eee MONITOR EXEC PROC PDF0001A COND 0 EQ TEST 4 LT SAVE 0 LT SUBMIT rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix E Example for an extended rvs Start Procedure Remarks for the single steps within this job Step TEST The first step of this job determines if the dataset RVS KDSAVE TEMP is cataloged or not If it is cataloged this step ends with condition code 0
154. YTE 2 PRIPROT X 31 BYTE 3 SECPROT X 31 BYTE 4 COMPROT X 2000 BYTES 5 U 6 SSNDPAC X 06 BYTE 7 SRCVPAC X 06 BYTE 8 RUSIZES X 8888 BYTES 9 U 10 5 06 11 PSERVIC X 860000000000000000000000 BYTES 13 24 RVS3 MODEENT LOGMODE RVS3 COS BATCH3 DIALOG VR LOW PRIORITY TYPE 1 BITS 4 7 VON BYTE 0 FMPROF X 03 BYTE 1 TSPROF X 04 BYTE 2 PRIPROT X 31 BYTE 3 SECPROT X 31 BYTE 4 COMPROT X 2000 BYTES 5 U 6 55 06 7 SRCVPAC X 06 BYTE 8 RUSIZES X 8888 BYTES 9 U 10 5 06 11 PSERVIC X 860000000000000000000000 BYTES 13 24 RVS5 MODEENT LOGMODE RVS5 COS BATCH3 DIALOG VR LOW PRIORITY FMPROF X 03 BYTE 1 TSPROF X 03 BYTE 2 PRIPROT X 31 BYTE 3 SECPROT X 31 BYTE 4 COMPROT X 3080 BYTES 5 U 6 SSNDPAC X 00 BYTE 7 SRCVPAC X 01 BYTE 8 RUSIZES X 8888 BYTES 9 U 10 5 02 11 PSERVIC X 000000000000000000000000 BYTES 13 24 MODEEND END VTAM definitions for the remote rvs installation The remote rvs installation must be defined within VTAM as a cross domain resource VBUILD TYPE CDRSC RVSB CDRSC CDRM Mnn Mnn denotes the name of a cross domain resource manager which must also be defined if not already existing rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit Example for a definition o
155. a PDS member the name of this PDS and member may be found in fields KDJOBDSN and KDJOB of the current KDRECORD see appendix If the JCL card shall be modified by the exit these modifications can be done directly within the area containing the current card This area contains the original card no copy which rvs uses for processing after execution of the exit The exit may set one of the following return codes in register 15 rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits 0 the current JCL card is to be used for job submit If the address of the card within the parmlist is zero the card will be omitted 4 Indication to insert one ore more cards Processing of the current card is done in the same way as for return code 0 but the next call of the exit is performed without reading the next JCL card 8 Indication that the exit is no more to be executed during this job submission Processing of the current card is done in the same way as for return code 0 All following cards will be read from the input file and stored into the internal reader without execution of the exit For this return code a message may be passed from the exit to the calling program 16 Indication that the job submission is to be cancelled All prior processed cards are flushed For this return code a message may be passed from the exit to the calling program All other return codes will be handled in the same way as return code 16 Rules for c
156. ables Dataset 6 2 0 Subset 0 general parameters valid for all stations The following table shows general parameters which are needed by nearly all station table entries ACCOUNT Definition station account ULS Entry local ULS entry remote ACTCLASS Accounting classification ALIASSID alias identification AUTODIAL automatic dial BACKUP backup station identification COMPRESS Type of Compression Feature for this station CSVER Header version of external Compression Security Feature for this station DIALOPTS options for automatic dial DIALOPT2 times for mandatory automatic dial DIALOPT3 polling function for automatic dial DOPTS options for automatic dial spec day EERPIN Handling of incoming EERPs EERPOUT Handling of outgoing EERPs ISTATUS initial status of stations entry NORELAIS suppression of routing ODETID ODETTE identification OPTIONS authorization for remote job proc PHONE telephone comment number only SECURITY Usage of Security Feature for this station 1 SID rvs station identification LIX X XXXXDX of the station e g if the station is a virtual station ULS Usage of User Level Security USP Usage of User Separation 1 mandatory parameter Description of rvs Station
157. ables in the member TRNTABLE of the dataset RVS TABLES These tables are hard coded in the rvs programs and are used for code translation when CODETRNS YES or FORMAT TEXT is specified rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset table name parameter direction CODETRNS YES Send CODETRNS YES Receive FORMAT TEXT Send FORMAT TEXT Receive FORMAT TEXT is a parameter used in the ODETTE File Transfer Protocol When both CODETRNS YES and FORMAT TEXT are coded the standard tables STDE2A and STDA2E are used instead of ODTE2A and ODTA2E for further information see User Manual Benutzerhandbuch These four standard tables may be adapted to user s requirements when they are coded in the member TRNTABLE The hard coded tables are then overwritten by these tables Also any table may be taken even for FORMAT TEXT by coding CODETRNS owntable The table owntable must be coded in the member TRNTABLE as well rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 12 Users and Permission Members in Permission Table Basically User Level Security is provided by two features that may not be used independently for other use cases e user is represented by its own RACF User ID and ODETTE ID e Permissions are applied which files are permitted to be transferred from which sources to which destinations Transfer Permission For usage of User Level Security you have to create a n
158. actual user mapping entry Display of USP Log Entries The menu item Z shows a panel which allows the user to display user separation log entries The panel DFZOOPOO helps to select a corresponding entry by specifying some selection criteria DEZOOPOO 7 Ye de de de de de dede dee dee DISPLAY USER PERMISSION D ENTRIES dex dede dee yet TIME 15 19 TO DISPLAY A LOG ENTRY SPECIFY THE FOLLOWING PARAMETERS DATE STD 05 311 DATE 2005 11 07 SID gt RV1 STATION ID OF REMOTE STATION TYPE gt R RECEIVE S SEND USERID gt MAPPED USERID DSN gt LUSER DSN FULL OR PARTIALLY QUALIFIED FROM DAY gt 2005 11 07 YYYY MM DD TIME 00 00 00 HH MM SS TO DAY 2005 11 07 YYYY MM DD TIME 23 59 59 HH MM SS STATUS ALL OK ERR ALL PF1 PF13 HELP PRESS END KEY TO TERMINATE SID SID of the remote station TYPE S show entries for send activities rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features R show entries for receive activities USERID Local RACF user id DSN Name of the transmitted dataset wildcards are possible no quotation marks are used the first level pointer is entered automatically FROM DAY Only entries with a queuing date greater or equal FROM DATE and TIME will TIME be used TO DAY Only entries with a queuing date less or equal TO DAY and TIME will be TIME used STATUS Status of the transmission OK Show only transmissions which were ended successfully ERR Show only
159. allation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset PAD1 1 PE XX ZZ xx X 28 parameter number PAD2 J zz X 28 parameter value Optional parameters You can modify the international X 28 parameters by using these fields PAD1 defines the X 28 parameters from 1 to 12 and PAD2 defines the X 28 parameters from 13 to 22 If you want to change any X 28 parameter please define it in the following way PAD1 1 1 for X 28 parameter 1 PAD1 1 1 2 1 for X 28 parameter 1 and 2 PAD2 13 1 21 1 for X 28 parameters 13 and 21 X 28 parameters correspond to ODETTE Revision 1 3 If you have specified TYPE PAD for your partner these parameters are defined as default TYPE PAD type of X 25 connection This parameter must be coded if the communication with the remote station is done via an X 25 PAD No default value XNUMCHCK YES NO Checking of remote X 25 number in case of an incoming call Optional parameter If XNUMCHCK YES is coded and an incoming call is received the X 25 number of the received call indication packet is compared with the value of parameter X25NUM of this station In case of different values activation of the session will be rejected this means the received ODETTE data unit SSID will be responded by an ESID data unit end of session with reason code 03 user code not known or invalid If XNUMCHCK NO is coded no checking will be performed Default If parameter XNUMCHCK is not coded the val
160. ameter SECURITY EXT has to inserted into the STATION entry to inform about the partner capability Please refer to chapter 6 1 and 6 2 9 4 1 7 Steps to Prepare the Use of External Security Feature The following chapter gives a short description of How to prepare ImstallivsMVS 1 chaperb OE A A AR ES 1 Geta valid license with security code Y 7 gedas 2 CreatetheSecurityKeyDataSet 7 3 Create your own Public and Private Security Key chapter Appendix 4 Iinsertthese keys into the Security Key Data Set chapter Appendix AAA A 5 Getthe public security key of your partner 6 Insert this key into your Security Key Data Set chapter Appendix Add the parameter SECURITY EXT to partner s station entry chapter 6 2 0 Now the rvsMVS user is available to send data Hx Create a send request see USER Manual All remaining steps will be done by rvsMVS automatically rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features 9 5 User Level Security ULS step by step instructions In this chapter you will find the step by step description of the User Level Security ULS configuration with examples 9 5 1 Introduction Basically User Level Security enables a user to user communication It is provided by two features 1 A user is represented by its own RACF User ID and Odette ID 2 Permissions are appli
161. ample A JOB GENKEYS EXEC PGM DF054K PARM GENKEYS STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR KEYPARAM DD KSIZE 1024 KPERIOD 12M KNAME RVST V2CS NEWO1 KEY Note For a description of parameters see appendix 1 4 1 1 3 5 Import your own key pair to the key management rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K The job KEYIMPAL can be used to import your own key pair to the key management Set UID to your own SID Example A JOB KEYSIMPT EXEC PGM DFO54K PARM KEYS STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR KEYPROOO DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEY PR DISP SHR KEYPUOO0 DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEY PU DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KEYPARAM DD UID LOC DDNAME KEYPROOO NEW UID LOC DDNAME KEYPUOOO NEW 1 3 6 Import a public key of your partner The job KEYIMPPU can be used to import a key of your partner to the key management Set PID to SID of your partner Example A JOB KEYIMPT EXEC PGM DFO54K PARM KEYS STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR KEYPUOO0 DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEY PU DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KEYPARAM DD PID R11 DDNAME KEYPUOOO NEW I 3 7 List all keys of the key management The job KEYLIST ca
162. an one TCP IP stack shall be used this parameter must be coded for each stack TCPUSE YES This parameter is used only for the TCP IP component It indicates that this component is to be used by rvs In this case during start of the monitor rvs will check if the other parameters related to the TCP IP component are completely specified or if default values are available If one ore more of these parameters are not specified and if no defaults are available the TCP IP component cannot be used A list of all parameters for this component may be found at the beginning of this section TEXTBLSZ 6000 nn nn value between 9 and 32760 TEXTLREC 2048 nn nn value between 5 and 32756 Specification of a blocksize TEXTBLSZ or a maximum record length TEXTLREO to be used for files which are to be received as text format files These files are always allocated with record format variable blocked but the values for maximum record length and blocksize may be specified different from the ODETTE recommendation These parameters apply only for components which use the ODETTE FTP as transmission protocol LU6 2 X 25 TCP IP The value for TEXTBLSZ must be greater than or equal to TEXTLREC 4 If a textformat file is to be received which includes records longer than the value of TEXTLREC the transmission is terminated abnormally the session is terminated with OFTP reason code 06 invalid data TIME 10 nn nn value between 1
163. and 99 Time interval in minutes after which the rvs command DS is issued automatically status display for all active BSC lines SNA X 25 and TCP IP sessions of the rvs monitor The value of this parameter be displayed changed with the rvs command TIME see Operations Manual TRACE E pointer Specification of a SYSOUT class or dataset name to which data created by the rvs internal trace will be written If only one character is specified rvs will treat this value as a SYSOUT class specification If more than one character max 8 is specified rvs treats this value as the first pointer of a dataset which will be e allocated dynamically if not existing or e extended DISP MOD if already existing at the time when the trace is started rvs command T sid see Operations Manual The complete name of this dataset is e pointer LINExxx TRACE if a BSC line is traced and xxx is the subchannel address of the line e pointer sid nm TRACE if a SNA session to station sid is traced nm denotes the session type and number e pointer XMLU TRACE if the X25 master LU session is traced e pointer VCLUnnn TRACE if the nnn th virtual circuit LU SVC is traced X25 component only rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset e pointer sid VOLUnnn TRACE if the nnn th virtual circuit LU SVC is traced but only data traffic with station sid X25 component only e pointer sid TRACE if an F
164. ans of the program DF080A00 The unloaded temporary dataset is allocated on a volume of this unit group UNTCOUNT 1 nn Unitcount for multivolume datasets Starting with version 2 2 05 rvs supports multivolume datasets when files are to be received The unitcount specifies the maximum number of volumes to be used for files which are to be received nn may be a value from 1 up to 20 This parameter is only used for files to be received on work volumes It is ignored when files are to be received on special volumes or when existing files are to be replaced The default value UNTCOUNT 1 is set because of compatibility with elder rvs versions but it is recommended to specify the maximum value UNTCOUNT 20 USERSEP YES NO Enables user separation for the own rvsMVS station VOLUME volume rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Name of a disk volume which will be used by the rvs monitor to allocate datasets during receiption if other specifications resident receive entries see User Manual are not available This parameter is exclusive with the UNIT parameter If both the VOLUME and UNIT parameter are specified the UNIT parameter will be ignored Specification of this parameter causes the rvs monitor to receive all datasets on the specified disk volume with following exceptions A resident receive entry see User Manual is available and a different receive volume is specified within this entr
165. are located at this level between the application layer and rvs It works as a part of the application layer controlled by rvs Monitor In the past there are some features comparable with this e to control output for SYSOUT e to send data to RJE e to handle PDS data sets which are located at the same external feature level The new External Compression and External Security Feature enhances this interface layer to prepare and to finish data transfer with more DDF TEST DB Tanamiseoncomplety A 2 activate sid R11 le sending xti 2 listing 2252 ds LU62 P acd Dialog Feature CALL rus Interface Interface Interface Interface Controlling Supervision File transfer protocol Driver for network access public network Network rvsMVS T Note special automatic File transfer User Application area HR Reside Receive Entry _ gt DB Data Base service The following picture shows the structure of rvs Abb Structure of of rvsMVS wit rvs Features To handle this features inside rvs some special information will be transferred in front of the data with which the receiving rvs is able to call the services necessary to create the file Because of the layer architecture rvs handles this on top of the file transfer protocol Therefore such a file may be routed through other stations without any influence over or from this stations Especially in
166. are not defined the default value is NONE With value no storage class is used YMAGMCL name This parameter is used for the security component only This parameter specifies the name of the SMS management class used for the allocation compression security temporary files If not defined the value of the parameter SMSMNGCL will be used If both parameters YMAGMCL and SMSMNGCL are not defined the default value is NONE With value no management class is used YDATACL name This parameter is used for the security component only This parameter specifies the name of the SMS data class used for the allocation Compression Security temporary files If not defined the value of parameter SMSDATCL is used If both parameters YDATACL and SMSDATCL are not defined the default value is NONE With value NONE no data class is used YPALLOC nnnn 20 This parameter is used for the security component only This parameter specifies the primary allocation in cylinders for allocation Compression Security temporary files nnnn may be a value from 1 up to 9999 YSALLOC nnnn 50 This parameter is used for the security component only This parameter specifies the secondary allocation in cylinders for allocation Compression Security temporary files nnnn may be a value from 1 up to 9999 rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset YUNITC nn 10 Thi
167. ase for the security feature It works as an interface between the rvs Monitor and rvs Security Administrator which maintains the security key data Security keys will be obtained by a data set key of KEYTYPE SID and KEYID KEYTYPE may be PU for public keys or PR for private keys SID is identically with the rvs parameter SID and KEYID is a hexadecimal character string which make the key unique in a rvs installation The key identification KEYID will be generated by the key generation program and is equal for a key pair consisting of a public and private key Remark e The program DF054K may be used for maintaining the Key Data set For more information about this program see appendix within this manual 4 6 rvs Permission Tables Dataset ULS feature only The Permission Tables Dataset RVS PTABLES is organized as a PDS Its members contain different information e USER member contains user to station mapping local side e members SN xxxxx contain permission entries direction send for one neighbour e members RN xxxxx contain permission entries direction receive for one neighbour See for further information chapter 9 5 too 4 7 Datasets for USP feature only rvs User Mapping Dataset USP RVS USERDATA VSAM KSDS rvs User Mapping Log USP RVS USERLOG BDAM dataset rvs User Log Dataset USP RVS LOGDATA VSAM KSDS rvs User Log RVS LOGLOG BDAM dataset rvs User Mapping Dataset VSAM dataset with user
168. aset The following job member DEFLOG of rvs Tables Dataset may be used to create this dataset A JOB DEFLOG EXEC PGM DF071A00 PARM RECORDS 500 STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT rvsLOG DD DSN RVS LOG DISP NEW CATLG DELETE UNIT unit VOL SER volume SPACE 1000 501 1 Remarks e The space for the Log Dataset has been selected for approx 30 transmissions per day If more transmissions are planned or already executed the space specification number of blocks must be increased e The number of blocks within the rvsLOG DD statement must specify at least one block more than the RECORDS parameter within the EXEC statement e Log Dataset and control dataset should reside on different disk volumes data security in case of a failing disk volume 5 7 Modification of the rvs Tables file The Tables file is organized as a PDS It contains e different control information used by the rvs monitor e jobs used for maintenance of the rvs system e procedures All members of the rvs Tables Dataset should be treated as sample members In general these members must be modified before they can be used by RVS As far as jobs procedures within this file are concerned most of the required changes are done when changing of dataset names see chapter 5 4 is complete The following members of the Tables Dataset should be checked modified one after the other rvsMVS Installation Manual 5
169. ation the maximum value DSPTINTV 999 should be specified in order to avoid overhead access to control dataset The value of this parameter be displayed changed with the rvs command DSPTI see Operations Manual EERPAD YES automatic send of EERP It AN Record send is controlled by parameter DIALOPT See also new command DD EERP EXPDT yyyyddd NONE With this parameter the expiration date of received datasets is determined rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset year e g 1998 ddd day e g 365 this means 31 12 1998 or nnnn number of days from the current day on e g 30 current date 1 12 1998 expiration date 31 12 1998 If the parameter EXPDT is specified within a resident receive entry this value will be taken With NONE no expiration date is used for dataset allocation FIRSTLVL name NO name 1 8 characters first must be alpha This parameter is used only for indirect file transfer using a relais station name is a first level qualifier that precedes the dataset name at a relais station The dataset is allocated under this new name but will be sent with the original name to the final station So it is possible to protect a dataset regardless of its name at a relais station by using a protected first level pointer FTPMAXznnn This parameter specifies the maximal number of parallel FTP transmissions nnn may be a
170. ation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset LINETYPE r S L LLT J Linetype Optional parameter Valid values are S for switched and L for leased line Note A BSC switched line needs an own entry within your Stations Table see Line Entry subset 9 LONGID long id same as ODETID PROGPROF 1 tz ppname ppname 3 chars PPROF J Name of the user defined program profile no default value For more information and an example please look for this manual into appendix H rvsMVS Tables RECVPW P pw pw1 pw2 0 pw pw1 pw2 1 8 characters RPW J Receive passwords Optional parameter mandatory for FTP 4914 1 One or two passwords which will be compared with the password sent by the remote station No default value SENDPW 1 t pw pw 1 8 characters SPW J Send Password Optional parameter mandatory for FTP 4914 1 Password will be sent to the remote station No default value SPEED LOW HIGH Transmission speed Mandatory for low speed lines 1200 bps SPEED LOW If switched lines with 1200 bps are used SPEED HIGH If lines with more than 1200 bps are used SUBCHANL b sc sc1 sc2 sc sc1 sc2 3 characters the first SCNL 1 character must be 0 Subchannel or line address Mandatory parameter One or more different alternative and parallel used addresses may be specified No default value see also parameter UCBNAME rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of
171. ault device type for this file is tape In this case rvs starts a job in order to copy the received dataset from disk to tape e adataset has been received and a specification has been made to store the received data in a sysout queue In this case rvs starts a job in order to copy the received dataset from disk to the specified sysout queue Member JOBCARD of the rvs Tables Dataset This member must contain a valid jobcard consisting of one or more lines This jobcard is used exception see description of member JOBCARDS for the above mentioned copyjobs To avoid double jobnames one part of the jobname may be replaced by up to three question marks character The rvs Monitor replaces this question marks by an ascending number Example jobname RVS CPY will be replaced by RVS05CPY if this is the fifth copyjob started by rvs since last monitor start If VWJOBC YES is specified see section rvs Start Parameter within this chapter rvs generates a jobname in the following manner J d sid nnn L ascending number 001 up to 999 rvs name of the remote station to from which the dataset is to be sent received direction of transmission R for receive S for send constant character Member JOBCARDS of the rvs Tables Dataset The use of this member is optional If it does not exist or if it is not allocated to the rvs Monitor with DD statement JOBCARDS member JOBCARD will be use
172. b submit after reception of a data set specified T copy job disk tape has been started S copy job disk sysoutqueue has been started X the writing of an event to a job sched system failed 1 byte Sysout Class 44 bytes Name of Job Dataset or Event Resource Name Dataset name of a PDS containing a job to be started by rvs after receiving or Resource name of an event which has been written indicated by an E in column 262 8 bytes Name of Job Dataset Member Name of the PDS member containing a job to be started by rvs after receiving 8 bytes Jobname name of the job to be started after receiving 1 byte Dataset could not be cataloged N dataset could not be cataloged R existing and cataloged dataset has been replaced and could not be cataloged a second time 8 bytes RACF userid for deleting entry If this record has been changed for example a send request has been deleted the rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Reference Utility program DF076A RACF userid of the user will be issued in this field Name of delete job If this record has been changed by a job for example a send request has been deleted the jobname will be issued in this field Number of restarts Number of attempts to restart the transmission RACF userid of user job who created this entry Jobname of job user who created this entry Line or subchannel name of BSC
173. bchannel addresses without rvs restrictions The value defined in parameter LINE will be used as alias name for this line Default value is the value defined in parameter LINE rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 10 Subset 10 valid for local Virtuel Stations TYP VIRT entries with ULS feature only TYPE VIRT I virtual station identification mandatory parameter Description of rvs Station Table Parameters in detail TYPE VIRT Local virtual station identification Mandatory parameter No default value Follow parameter are mandatory for local virtual station ODETID see chapter 6 2 3 ACME T X L see chapter 6 2 4 6 2 5 6 2 6 RECVPW see chapter 6 2 3 SENDPW SECURITY see chapter 6 2 0 COMPRESS rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 11 Examples of a Stations Table 1 Example Different Entry Types lt 72 characters gt lt 8 gt ok ke ke ke RARA RARA KARA KK KK KKK TOP OF DATA ck ke che ce RR ce e e e e e RR e 1 1 SID BST SCNL 001 0E2 FTP 4914 0 PHONE 34567 KUNZE ADDR BSC STATION WOB
174. be done by entering the command A RVSX25 If activation was successful message DF95011 RVS X 25 CTCP INITIALIZATION COMPLETE is displayed If activation is not successful error messages will be displayed which indicate the kind of error After activation of the rvs X25 control task sessions to the remote station may be activated by entering the command A sid In this case rvs tries to establish a switched virtual circuit SVC to the remote installation Message rvsMVS Installation Manual 7 Running Installation Tests DF9401I F sid ODETTE TASK STARTED TYPE type indicates successful activation of the SVC to the remote station In case of error conditions error messages will be displayed instead of the above message The SVC will be stopped automatically if there is nothing more to send or receive or if any error occurs X25 loop test In order to verify your VTAM and NPSI generation you can start a simple loop test For the loop test you don t need a partner station because you call your own station The call packet is set up on one of your SVCs routed back by the first switching node of the X 25 network and received by a second SVC of your multichannel link This implies that the multichannel link must have at least 2 SVC s and the rvs start parameter MAXSVC must specify a value of at least 2 SVC s The station you call is to be defined within STATIONS TABLE in the usual way see chapter 6 X25 entry The values
175. blocking restart and password exchange rvsDOS rvs Internal Protocol of VOLKSWAGEN AG for exclusive use with rvs DOS stations rvs Internal Protocol of VOLKSWAGEN AG for exclusive use with rvs RPG stations VW FTP B1 0 Open Protocol of VOLKSWAGEN AG published in rvsMVS Interface Description no restart no blocking VW FTP B1 1 Open Protocol of VOLKSWAGEN AG see rvsMVS Interf Descript with blocked transmission mode VW FTP B2 1 Open Protocol of VOLKSWAGEN AG see rvsMVS Interf Descript with blocking and restart VW FTP B3 0 Open Protocol of VOLKSWAGEN AG see rvsMVS Interf Descript RJE procedure similar to 2780 IDENQ YES The remote station may send its identification together with the BSC control character enquiry X 2D within one string Optional IDENQ NO can be defined if the remote station sends it s ID in a separate control record IDENQ YES enables rvs to receive the remote station id and enquiry X 2D in one string This is necessary for some remote stations which must send their ID together with the enquiry IDENQ YES works also if the remote station sends a separate control record for the station ID but rvs internal tables might overflow if more than 255 station entries with IDENQ YES on the same subchannel are defined LBLKSIZE 2 400 2000 LSIZE J Line blocksize for transmission Optional parameter Allowed are values from 400 up to 2000 bytes rvsMVS Install
176. cations e SYSPRINT the output datset for DF076A REXX This step starts the REXX script ion a TSO Environment Allocations SYSTSPRT REXX Messages Sysout e LOAD rvsMVS Loadlib e KDPARSER the REXX Script for parsing the control dataset e KD rvsMVS control dataset e SYSIN configuration dataset for sort routine e SYSPRINT reference to DF076A output dataset e SORTIN reference to DF076A output dataset SORTOUT the output dataset for sort routine ICEMAN e OUTFILE dataset which contains the formatted output e SYSTSIN start of the REXX Script please use the following format EXEC RVS EXEC DF078B OPTIONS EXEC DELTMP2 rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This step deletes the temporary datasets The configuration dataset of the sort routine may be changed according to your environment Please refer manual for DFSORT for further information A detailed description of this procedure may be found in rvsMVS User Manual rvsMVS Benutzerhandbuch 6 9 3 Deleting old entries from the rvs Control Dataset The rvs Controldataset contains among others records with information about executed transmissions of the last time These records are not deleted automatically after some time So it is necessary in order to avoid space problems within the rvs Control Dataset to execute the following procedure from time to time for example once a week This procedure is contained in member PDFOOO9A of the
177. ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce RR AR AAA A e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e RRA e cese ce ce cec cc e e RARA A x x FURTHER INFORMATION oe ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce RARA RARA A e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ee ee e ce eee e ec e ec AR e e ARA RR DS CL5 RESERVED KDFIRST DS CL3 ORIGIN STATION ID DS CL5 RESERVED KDFINAL DS CL3 ID OF THE FINAL STATION DS XL30 RESERVED KDUSERID DS CL8 TSO USERID OR NAME OF THE BATCHJOB WHICH CREATED THIS RECORD SEND REQUEST OR RESIDENT RECEIVE ENTRY DS CL14 RESERVED e oe ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce AAA A AA AAA e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ee e ce e e e e e eee cec 333 INFORMATION ABOUT REMOTE DATASET REMOTE OPTIONS oe ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e e ce ce e A A AAA AR AR e e ARA RR DS CL8 RESERVED KDVOLNRR DS CL6 VOLUME NO OF REMOTE DATASET rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix B Description of the rvs controldataset record KDRECORD KDDEVR DS KDDISPR DS KDBITSR DS KDBITSR1 DS KDRJE EQU KDREPL EQU KDBITSR2 DS KDBITSR3 DS KDBITSR4 DS XL31 OXLA x 20 10 DEVICE TYPE OF REMOTE DATASET DISPOSITION OF REMOTE DATASET RESERVED RJE FUNCTION IS REQUESTED REQUEST TO REPLACE EXISTING DATASET MEMBER kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk FIELDS USED BY EXITS RACF
178. cols e g rvsWIN rvsNT FTP or 3270 emulations like Extra Reflection PC3270 or Irma using the host program IND FILE In all cases it is important to use binary mode with recfm FB and Irecl 80 This is very important in order to be able to reload the datasets correctly on the MVS host Using rvsWIN you have to choose the option for advanced users Menu Options Einstellungen User Level Benutzerebene Professional Fortgeschrittene at first For queuing the datasets it is important to specify fixed record format with record length 80 but NO Text Be sure to specify a valid first level qualifier for the MVS environment e g your USERID It may take some time to transfer all files by rvsWIN For IND FILE it might be necessary to allocate enough space for the datasets e g 5 cylinders for the load libraries This may be done in the emulation software when transferring the files For FTP the options may differ dependent on the FTP server on the host Anyhow record length of 80 and record format FB are mandatory Reloading the host datasets All datasets except RECEIVE are unloaded PDS datasets that have to be loaded with TSO command RECEIVE To do so copy the job RECEIVE into your JCL library as a member adjust the job and the dataset names according to your installation requirements and submit it When the job has finished you will find six partitioned datasets with following names RVS CLIST RVS LOAD RVS MSGS
179. connection Autodial count number of automatic dial attempts that preceded this transmission Connection type A Automatic Dial Processing options in RR entry G GDG processing B date and timestamp processing T timestamp processing D datestamp processing R REPLACE of dataset 14 bytes High Level Response Time Date and time of reception at the final receiver Format YYYYDDDHHMMSST see Queuing Time 1 byte Indication for code translation Blank no code translation requested R code translation rejected code table not found T code translation successfully executed 8 bytes Name of code translation table 8 bytes Name of symbolic disk unit group 7 bytes Expiration Date Format dd dd number of days or fixed date YYYYDDD year date 8 bytes SMS management class 8 bytes SMS storage class 8 bytes SMS data class 7 bytes Earliest transmission date Format YYYYDDD YYYY year DDD day 7 bytes Earliest transmission time Format HHMMSST HH daytime hours MM daytime minutes SS daytime seconds T 1 10 seconds 16 bytes Number of Transmitted Bytes compressed Extended format up to 15 digits 16 bytes Number of Transmitted Bytes uncompressed Extended format up to 15 digits 36 bytes Legend Reserved blank A alphanumeric left justified N numeric right justified character l
180. consequent physical input dataset records which are considered to form one logical record The keyword parameters are separated by a comma and or one or more blanks A single keyword with its value cannot be spanned to the next record The eight last positions of the physical record are ignored supposed to contain record sequence number Keyword format INPARM is also used to identify the input and output datasets and output format e n fixed format the search arguments are given according to the layout described below set of search arguments in this format occupies exactly one physical record The data length of this format is 112 bytes and the records are supposed to have no sequence field Both formats may be given from any source and also mixed in dataset input rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix F Reference Utility program DF076A NOTE If mixing of these two different formats is desired e g by concatenating input files the LRECL definition have to be taken care of the fixed format requires LRECL of at least 112 while for the keyword format 80 is sufficient The DD name of the input dataset is set to the value of the INFILE keyword parameter or defaulted to SYSIN if the parameter input area is omitted or it contains no valid set of search arguments Keyword format input parameters INFILE ddname Input file DD name 1 8 characters optional This keyword parameter identifies the DD name of the dataset which
181. contains the input Default is SYSIN if there is no parameter input area at all or the value of this keyword is omitted or blank When this parameter is defined all keywords other than OUTFILE and FMT should be omitted This parameter is valid only in call parameter input The synonyme of this parameter is INF OUTFILE ddname Output file DD name 1 8 characters optional This keyword parameter identifies the DD name of the dataset on which the output will be written Default is SYSPRINT if the parameter output area is omitted or the input is read from a dataset The given value must not be SYSOUT If the dataset is explicitely or implicitely defined as output dataset and the output is written in keyword format see below it will also contain error and informational messages unless the dataset SYSOUT or dataset for WTO messages is available When this parameter is defined all keywords other than INFILE and FMT should be omitted This parameter is valid only in call parameter input The synonyme of this parameter is OUTF FMT format Output format 2 characters optional This keyword parameter defines if needed the format of the output The valid values of format are The output is written in fixed format records see below which are derived from the accessed rvs Control Dataset records KD The output is written as truncated rvs Control Dataset records with no editing If output goes to parameter output area the whole record is m
182. ctive end to end response in relais station A AS AR BS Terminated send transmission BR Terminated receive transmission BS BR CS Successfully completed send transmission CR Successfully completed receive transmission CS CR DS Active not yet started send transmission DR Active not yet started receive transmission D DS DR RS Resident send transmission RR Resident receive transmission R RS RR JA Job active JC Job completed J JA JC S AS CS E AR CR Any record type Examples TYPE B All abended transmissions TYPE AR AS C active receive send transmissions and all completed transmissions Synonyme of this keyword is TYP rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix F Reference Utility program DF076A SID sid Station identification 1 3 characters optional The station identification of the remote station sid If the searched sid is exactly one or two characters long the value should be followed by a dash otherwise the given sid of one or two characters will be considered as generic A generic sid may also be an expression with an asterisk at the end of the sid indicating the wildcard character s Synonyme of this keyword is ORT DSNAME dsname Dataset name with or without member name optional DSNAME dsname member Name of the searched dataset If the given dataset name is shorter than the maximum of 44 characters it will be considered as a generic one A generic
183. d the message sid INVALID PASSWORD REENTER will be displayed If four invalid passwords are entered within one sequence the SNA session will be closed by rvs and a new logon is required If the logon request is not successful an SNA session between rvs and the logical unit of the screen could not be established the following points should be checked in order to determine the reason of this e The specified application id of the logon request is invalid or the application id is not defined within VTAM or some cross domain resources are missing or incorrect e The application is not active the rvs monitor is not active or the remote operating control task has not been started see rvs command A RMOP within the Operation Manual e The remote operating function is not defined within rvs this means the rvs start parameter RMOPAPPL has not been specified e The maximum number of parallel remote operating sessions is exceeded Starting with release 2 5 the maximum number of parallel remote operator sessions has been extended from 1 to 8 sessions Entering rvs commands from the screen If the logon procedure to the rvs monitor is complete all rvs commands may be entered from the screen except commands of the form f rvs for example P rvs The syntax of the rvs commands is the same as described within the rvs Operations Manual but all commands must be preceeded by the character for example A 094 must be entered if the B
184. d Stop of rvs 2 24 100044000 5 8 2 8 Format of BTAM Trace BSC 5 8 2 4 Format of VTAM Trace SNA 5 8 2 5 Eormatot PUB Trace dia 5 8 2 6 Format of TCP IP 1 1 0 nnnm nnne nennen nnne nennen 5 8 2 7 Formatot FTP Trac i tene ans e 5 A _ A aaeeeo eee aai 5 9 1 Feature Architecture 5 9 2 Partioned Data Set PDS Transfer 44422 11 5 9 3 aida 5 9 3 1 2 Steps to Prepare the Use of External Compress Feature 5 9 4 External ii 5 9 4 1 7 Steps to Prepare the Use of External Security 5 9 5 User Level Security ULS step by step instructions eere 5 9 5 1 A LUNES 5 9 5 2 10 Steps to Prepare the Use of ULS User Level Security Feature 5 9 5 3 Install and configure rvsMVS as normal 5 9 5 4 new licence key with Components 5 9 5 5 Exchange information with your partner 5
185. d for all defined X 25 multi cannel links in your rvs Monitor RELNCTRN NO YES This parameter takes effect only if rvsMVS is a relais station In ODETTE text mode files are transmitted using ASCII codepage If rvsMVS is a relais station content of a file was translated from ASCII to EBCDIC during receive and from EBCDIC to ASCII before send This behaviour can be disabled by setting RELNCTRN to YES This can avoid corruption of the content caused by code translation Enable or disable this feature takes only effect on new transmissions IMPORTANT If rvsMVS is a relais station and there is a text file to be routed without code conversion it is not possible to downgrade to version 4 05 00 or previous You can list such files with program DF0145E Refer installation notes for more information REPLY rvs OC READY text Text of the rvs ready message on the console When specifying text the default message will be replaced by your text The text must be enclosed within quotes and must not exceed 50 characters RMOPAPPL name This parameter is used only for the remote operating function This name must be specified in an APPL statement of the local VTAM If the SNA component is used this value must be different from the value specified within the rvs startparameter APPLID If this parameter is not coded the remote operating function cannot be used rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset
186. d instead of it The only reason for the use of this alternate jobcard is the following If received data shall be copied into a sysout queue it may be very useful to assign a special jobname with these data rvs replaces the question marks by the jobname userid of the job userid which has specified to copy the received data into a sysout queue This specification might have been done either during creation of a resident receive entry for this dataset or in the remote station during creation of a send request for this dataset In both cases the SYSOUT parameter has been specified For more details about resident receive entries or send request see rvsMVS User Manual rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset If the length of this jobname userid is less than 8 characters the character S will be added to this name Member RTAPEJC of the rvs Tables Dataset This member contains the following JCL statements which are used if a dataset shall be copied from disk to tape after receiption RECTAPE EXEC PGM DF024A00 PARM IN DD UNIT SYSDA DISP OLD DELETE KEEP VOL SER DSN E HEH H HH HH HH HH B BERE OUT DD UNIT TAPE DEFER DISP CATLG WILL BE MODIFIED DSN HEHHEE HEHHHEH STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR In this case rvs will generate and submit a job consisting of the modified content of members JOBCARD
187. d or removed Other parameters for example UNIT should be adapted to the corresponding installation rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 6 Control of rvs Messages 6 6 1 Control of Messages for Console and remote Operating Starting with Release 1 4 Level 01 four new functions have been implemented to allow more control for the display of rvs messages on console and for the remote operating session These functions are 1 Suppression of messages on console 2 Display of messages on console 3 Suppression of messages for remote operating 4 Display of messages for remote operating Both display functions have highest priority in view of all other control algorithms for message processing In particular the display of special P messages which are normally only written to sysout protocols see 6 6 2 is now possible Another example for the display function is the general suppression of some messages which however will be displayed only for a special remote station The messages to be suppressed displayed must be defined within a member of the rvs tables dataset This member is called CNTLMSG member The above functions may be used only if this member is allocated to the rvs monitor with DD name CNTLMSG If this allocation does not exist rvs can not activate the above functions Th
188. d receive user exit EXSFID DSECT SFIDCMD DS CL1 SFIDDSN DS CL26 DS CL21 SFIDUSER DS CL8 EERP receive user exit EXEERP DSECT EERPCMD DS CL1 EERPDSN DS CL26 DS CL21 EERPUSER DS CL8 This exit may be used to inform an application of the reception of the receipt EERP which is the only valid indication for a complete and safe file transfer The virtual file name of the transmitted dastaset may be found in the 26 bytes field starting at offset 1 of the EERP ODETTE FPDU Look to the ODETTE SPECIFICATIONS FOR FILE TRANSFER for more informations about ODETTE FPDU s The actual edition is OFTP Revision 1 3 Dec 1992 Programming rules e the AMODE and RMODE of this exits are not restricted you can use AMODE 24 or AMODE 31 modules e the exit must be reentrant e the exit gets control via a branch instruction e the exit must fulfill the MVS linkage convention he must restore the registers 2 13 in returning to OFTP and register 15 may contain a returncode a nonzero returncode will cause termination of the transmisson Starting with rvsMVS 1 2 10 there will be an OFTP user exit for a user aided check of the X 25 number In the flow of the ODETTE protocol session this user exit is executed in the following situation rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits When the exit gets control register 1 points to a parameterlist consisting of the following 5 fullwords 1 fullword address of the
189. dais 62 63 FETPRV S Cocina Gene taa 131 142 User Exits peneralz iste cid ad 32 33 34 213 a ads abia ha 151 DEUX OOT ttd tete eee 205 se aa ls dude 129 142 DEUXO002 id aee odis 211 dut RN IIS 131 DEUXOOS uta 214 JOBGARDS Sucina a a 129 Identification iint ede thes 217 Mod Movida ds 40 OR ER ratita aides 221 MSGPERM reet 136 USERID outside 91 Program Profile 86 259 MU ii tas 111 117 Program Profile Table sess 123 VOEUME dinero E 63 Sessions 125 142 WW ACC ari A 63 STAR Ti vetet i 137 141 atia dit 63 Start Parameter sess 47 141 WSIZE enki etti ee 63 100 stations table iin ce eene tie tees 71 98 Statronstable aiii 142 io 99 SYSOUTJIG 130 142 oi a ar ttes 64 TRNTABEE 153 29 de 99 Tape Dataset X25DPSIZB cheer ete leg pera 99 JCL for Copy Job u 129 142 MDZISESS UR 100 TEPIPADR 105 ities 64 ueterem 60 65 66 iaa oir 64 66 T CPM AX to caido 60 XZIW SIZE rocio 100 TEPNAME sitio ie 60 XAPPE 1 B PREA EEE E RR UNUS 64
190. dataset name may also be indicated by an asterisk at the end of the dsname part of the value to indicate the wildcard character s If the searched dataset name should be of the same length as the given dsname part of the value of 43 characters or shorter a dash should follow the dsname If the dataset is partitioned and a member name is given it must be enclosed in parentheses and follow immediately the dataset name as described above The maximum length of the member name is 8 characters and the maximum length of the entire value is 54 characters Generic member names are not recognized QTMzyydddhhmmsst Queuing date and time 1 12 numeric characters optional Queuing date and time of the transmissions to be queried yy is year ddd day number hh hours mm minutes ss seconds and t tenths of second The value may also be truncated to the right to define a time interval when only the given digits are considered as part of search argument If this keyword is given QDATE QDAY or QTIME must be omitted in the same set of search arguments Examples QTM 9413811 looks for transmissions queued from 11 00 to 11 59 in 18 05 1994 QTM 92138112341 looks for transmissions queued at 11 23 41 in 17 05 1992 QDATE date1 date2 Queuing date s optional QDATE nrofdays One or two dates to limit the queuing time frame in days of the queried transmission s The explicitely given dates have format yy ddd or simply ddd but even the more natu
191. dialing e The only difference between generation of a switched line with autodial function and generation of a switched line without autodial function is the coding of the AUTO parameter 3 1 3 BSC lines with autodial function Interface V 25bis The interface V 25bis is nowadays the standard for the autodial function and it is more comfortable in view of installation than V 25 This interface requires at least NCP V5R3 EP V1R8 Two things must be done to define a BSC line with autodial function based on V 25bis which is to be used by rvs e definition of the line within the IODEVICE generation MVS and e generation of the line within the control unit EP generation The IODEVICE generation for a switched BSC line with autodial function for V 25bis interface is exactly the same as for V 25 interface see chapter 3 1 2 EP generation for BSC lines with autodial function V 25bis The connection between control unit and automatic calling unit ACU is simply a one cable connection between control unit and modem with V 25bis support control V 25bis dial data network unit modem The following is an example of an EP generation concerning the LINE macro for a 2400 baud switched line with autodial function based on V 25bis LINE ADDRESS yyy xx 0 xx 1 V25BIS YES DLSS AUTO YES DUPLEX HALF SPEED 2400 TYPE EP PAD NO CLOCKNG INT CODE EBCDIC TERM 2020 STATOPT MDG1 4MX22
192. ding The following values are valid within this field C 4 switched line with SMF data switched line without SMF data C C leased line with SMF data C E leased line without SMF data Remark rvs creates SMF records if the rvs Start Parameter SMF nn is specified with nn not equal zero see chapter 6 1 of this manual If SMF 0 is specified no SMF recording is done independent of the value in this column Specification for identification phase of the transmission The following values are valid C O definition of the local own station as a slave station the own station identification will be sent in one string together with the BSC control character X 2D C 1 definition of the local own station as a slave station the own station identification will be sent within the first text buffer If the own station shall be defined as a slave station this value should always be specified definition of the local own station as a master station the identification of the remote station is expected in one string together with the BSC control character X 2D C 3 definition of the local own station as a master station the identification of the remote station is expected in the first text buffer Remarks This value of the program profile defines which of the two stations local or remote has to send its identification first after the line connection dial is established For leased lines the value
193. e for example if the SYSOUT parameter has been specified within a resident receive entry for this dataset Job control used for FTP file transfer FTP component only Specification of member USER with license parameters Specification of member PFKEYS with definitions of RMOP PF keys optional rvs Security Key Data data set Code Translation Tables optional see chapter 6 11 ULS User Level Security control data set USP Userseparation user mapping dataset USP Userseparation user mapping log USP Userseparation log event dataset USP Userseparation log event log Output results of the Y commands written by rvs optional Configuration dataset for extended tracing of XOT and online encryption rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Remarks USERDATA USERLOG LOGDATA LOGLOG is only necessary if USP User Separation is used PTABLES is only necessary if ULS User Level Security is used Some allocations are not included within this start procedure They will be done dynamically after start of rvs if necessary Such allocations are ddname Resource rvs Control Dataset dynamic allocation will be done immediately after start of the rvs Monitor RVSLOG rvs Log Dataset dynamic allocation will be done immediately after start of the A detailed description of the datasets and members within this procedure is contained in prior sections of this manual The DD statement for membe
194. e rvs tables dataset on the installation tape EXCEPT 6 6 3 Definition of non deletable messages Every rvs message may be defined as non deletable this means the message is written to console by using the parameter DESC 2 during execution of the WTO macro Those messages will be kept on the MVS console as long as they are deleted manually To define some rvs messages as non deletable the following action is necessary A new member within the rvs Tables Dataset must be created membername MSGPERM The following DD Statement must be inserted in the rvs start procedure MSGPERM DD DSN RVS TABLES MSGPERM DISP SHR The member MSGPERM contains the information whether a message shall be non deletable or not The layout of this member is the same as for member MSGID described at the beginning of this section rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 7 Automatically executed rvs commands The member START of the rvs Tables Dataset may be used to specify rvs commands which are to be executed immediately after start of the rvs Monitor So it is possible for example to activate one ore more lines after start of rvs automatically The member START may be empty or may be totally left out of the rvs start procedure If one ore more commands shall be executed automatically after start of rvs the following rules must be noticed e Every command must be specified on a separate line whithi
195. e amount of storage in units of 1K which is to be treated as the maximum size for the bufferpool Default value BFPOOLSZ 2000 BSCUSE YES NO Specification whether the BSC component is to be used or not If BSCUSE NO is specified all commands related to the BSC component for example commands for activation of BSC lines or BSC stations will be rejected CHAPSDS N N N value between 0 and 9 Change the SDS Task Priority Higher numbers increase the priority CHAPRDS N N N value between 0 and 9 Change the RDS Task Priority Higher numbers increase the priority COMPRESS rvskey NO It specifies how the Compression Feature is used Parameter COMPRESS EXT YES is not longer necessary The External Compression module is active if it is allowed by licence key Y Use COMPRESS NO to switch off compression although it is allowed by licence key If COMPRESS NO is specified the External Compression will be rejected for all send requests of this installation DDEVTYP TAPE DISK Default devicetype used for receiving This default will always be used if a dataset is received and there are no further specifications for reception of this dataset resident receive entry see User s Manual DISK means that the dataset will be received and kept on disk TAPE means that the dataset is received on disk and will be copied to tape after reception rvs generates and starts a batch job to copy the received file t
196. e control of additional sysout protocols see 6 2 2 is not affected by these functions this means that these functions do only control display suppression of messages on console and for the remote operating session The content of the CNTLMSG member may be changed at any time It may be activated immediately by entering the command MSG REFRESH or MSG R The member itself is devided into groups subsets of message definitions each subset is assigned with a name The reason for this division into different subsets is a high flexibility when selecting different subsets of messages to be suppressed displayed on console rem operating The selection of a subset of messages for a certain function may be controlled by the following commands MSG CNSLSUP name or MSG CS name suppression of console messages MSG CNSLDSPL name or MSG CD name display of console messages MSG RMOPSUP name or MSG RS name suppression of rem op messages MSG RMOPDSPL name or MSG RD name display of rem op messages The assignments of message subsets to the different functions and the fact which of the function is active or not may be displayed with the command MSG DISPLAY or MSG D After start of the rvs monitor and after entering of the REFRESH command the functions will be assigned with default subsets of messages if defaults are defined see below If there is no default assignment for a function this function remains inactive until t
197. e following reasons Implausible records TIME End time of transmission is less than start time of transmission COMPRESSED Number of linebytes is less than 1 96 of number of databytes Linebytes transmitted bytes compressed 7 Databytes origin number of bytes uncompressed rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix D rvs statistics OVERHEAD Number of linebytes is greater than 125 of the number of databytes too much overhead Exception Small datasets databytes 1000 Every dataset to transmit will be expanded by adding the control records of transmission protocol So it is possible that a very small dataset could become greater than 125 of its origin size SPEED Transmission speed is lower than 25 bits per second EMPTY FILES Number of databytes or number of linebytes is equal zero POOR FILES Number of linebytes is less than 300 Exception Excepted are small datasets databytes 1000 Comment records Only comment the valid transmission data are represented by extra records CANCELLED A transmission has been cancelled by operator DELETED The send request of a transmission has been deleted by the operator RETRANSMITS A retransmission has been started by operator rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix D rvs statistics This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix E Example for an extended rvs Start Procedure E Example f
198. e following rows describe the channel program pointed to in the DECB containing the respective buffer contents in dump format Only those CCWs be listed which are available in main storage after termination of the BTAM macro If BTAM has started several channel programs during execution of the macro eg repetitions in case of line faults only the CCWs executed last can be listed enuen uonejeisu SANSA 3S8 2 JO 9981 10 S SXX DSN DVV R115SXX A3146W VOL W80111 42 5 00 IND1 00 9 57 353 BLKS 00482 5 0040082 OAF PGMADDR 002208 001E42 OPT F600F080 0000 FEAT 00 RETRY 03 01 5 0 0 006 BITS 61 DECB 7 14 SN 00 L 004C 0000 02 FLAG 00 RESP 1061 TPCD A5 ERRST 00 CSWST 0C00 BUFFADDR 1177FA CCW 011177FA 6011004C WRITE 1002E3C4E5E54BD9 F1F1E2E7E74BC1F3 F1F4F 6E6 40404040 404040F0FOF 4F 8F2 TDVV R11SXX A3146W 00482 FOFOFOF3F8F5F6FO FOFOF8FOFOFOF8FO FO40D9F1F1E2E7E7 4040404040404040 00038560008000800 R115XX 4040404040404040 40404040 CCW 01112166 60130002 WRITE 1003 22 CCW 021120BA 20A50002 READ 1061 S SXX DSN DVV R115SXX A3146W VOL W80111 42 STAT 00 IND1 00 9 57 359 BLKS 00482 BYTES 0040158 OAF PGMADDR 002208 001F6A 600 080 0000 FEAT 00 RETRY 03 01 5 0 0 006 BITS 61 DECB P 7F 5 00 L 004C R 0001 02 FLAG 00 RESP 2D00 TPCD 8B 5 00 CSWST 0C00 BUFFADDR 1177FA CCW 011
199. e of a certain remote station command T sid This trace records all l O events for the specified station For incoming connection requests this trace starts with sending of the OFTP protocol unit SSID the received SSID is not available in this case For outgoing connection requests the trace starts with the CONNECT macro rvsMVS Installation Manual 8 Special Functions Procedures In case of parallel sessions to the remote station different trace output is written for the different sessions see trace dataset names above 8 2 3 Format of BTAM Trace BSC lines For each executed BTAM macro a trace entry consisting of several rows is written The individual entries are separated by a dashed line An example is printed below Explanation of trace fields within a trace entry 1st row column 1 Active function S send R receive dataset column 3 5 of remote station DSN Name of transmitted dataset VOL Volume number of transmitted dataset KENN International fields of line control program STAT IND1 TIME Time of day BLKS Number of line blocks line buffers transmitted since start of this dataset BYTES Number of characters transmitted since start of this dataset 2nd row Column 3 5 subchannel address of the line All other fields are internal fields of the line control program 3rd row Listing of the BTAM control block DECB A short explanation of these fields is given in the prefix of the trace 4th row etc Th
200. e oirn nie en Ue ere REN Ve ES ARR MR re eee 5 6 9 2 Overview rvs Transmissions 5 6 9 2 1 PDFO0002A nennen 5 0 9 2 2 DE0Z8B rent uti 5 6 9 3 Deleting old entries from the rvs Control 5 6 9 4 Saving and Recovery of the rvs 5 6 10 JCL Member for failing automatic 5 6 11 Code Transition peras ee 5 6 12 Users and Permission Members in Permission 5 6 12 1 Users Table 5 6 12 2 Permission Table Members oooooooocccccnccccononcnoncccnnncnonnnononcnnnnnonannnnnncnnnnccanannnnnnccno 5 7 Running Installation Tests iiie 1 0 20 cour ii ii 5 7 1 Start of rvs Monitor Procedure PDF0001A Alias MONITOR 5 7 2 Transmission Of 5 8 Special Functions Procedures iria 5 8 1 Using BSC Line s as Backup for 5 8 2 A E 5 rvsMVS Installation Manual Contents 98 244 race OUIDUE i Detto REA ee 5 8 2 2 Start an
201. e parameters subset 0 must be specified Description of rvs Station Table Parameters in detail ACCESMET t F TP ACME Access method must be FTP Mandatory parameter FTPERESP FERS NO YES Specification whether an end to end response file shall be sent will be expected after data file transmission FTPERESP YES or not FTPERESP NO If parameter FTPRESP is set to NO then then FTPERESP will be set to NO too Optional parameter FTPHFILE FHF NO YES non MVS stations only Specification whether an additional information file including further information about the transmission partners etc header file shall be sent after data file transmission FTPHFILE YES or not FTPHFILE NO If parameter FTPHFILE is set to NO then parameters FTPRESP and FTPERESP will be set to NO too Optional parameter Default values are YES if TYPE MVS is specified NO else rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset FTPHNAME FHN name name 1 64 characters Remote IP address This address may be specified either in dotted decimal notation for example FTPHNAME 10 211 036 20 or as a symbolic name length up to 24 bytes for example FTPHNAME VWRVSB No default value FTPPASS FPS text text 1 20 characters FTP password for the partner station No default value FTPPORT FPT 21 nnnnn X xxxx port 1 65534 Remote portnumber nn may be a value between 0 and 65534 hexadecimal X FFFE
202. eady exists 24 ERROR DURING DELETE A KEY FROM KEY DATASET 28 ERROR DURING READ KEY DIRECT FOR DELETE Note Can t read key from key management Deletion isn t possible 32 ERROR DURING READ KEY DIRECT Note Can t read key from key management Key doesn t exist 33 ERROR DURING READ A BEST KEY FUN S Note Can t get key for encryption best key 34 ERROR DURING READ A BEST KEY FUN R Note Can t get key for restoring best key 36 ERROR DURING UPDATE AN EXISTING KEY Note key doesn t exist 40 ERROR DURING KEYDS PROCESSING NO FLAG 41 ERROR DURING READ BEST KEY PROCESSING NO FLAG a8 FUN S ERROR DURING READ BEST KEY PROCESSING NO FLAG FUN R 43 ERROR DURING IMPORT KEYS NO FLAG 44 ERROR DURING PREPARING KEY DATASET UPDATE 48 ERROR DURING PARAMETER PROCESSING 52 ERROR DURING KEY DS OPEN PROCESING 56 ERROR DURING LIST DS OPEN PROCESING 60 USER ID PARAMETER NOT COMPLETE 64 ERROR DURING READ KEYID NO HEX VALUES 68 ERROR DURING READ KEYID NO HEX SYNTAX 72 ERROR DURING READ KEYID LENGTH ERROR 76 ERROR DURING KEY FILE OPEN PROCESSING 80 ERROR DURING UPDATE OF KEY DATA SET 84 ERROR DURING PREPARING UPDATE NOT ALL PARAMETERS rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K 88 NOT VALID KEY FOUND 95 KEYIMPRT FILE NOT DEFINED Note DD Statement KEYIMPRT doesn t exist 96 KEYPARAM FILE NOT DEFINED Note DD Stat
203. echnical parameter to send a data set to this direct connected station The logical parameter agreed with the final station must be defined in this VIA Entry Such logical paramer may be ODETID see chapter 6 2 3 SECURITY see chapter 6 2 0 with ULS feature only COMPRESS rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 9 Subset 9 valid for BSC Line Entries definition ACCESMET TP access method ACTMODE Activation mode ACTOPTS options for automatic activation AUTOACT automatic line activation observation ADDEVICE line prepared for autodial ADDRESS address of line only comment SLAVE line profile master slave LINE BTAM switched line identification LINETYPE Linetype PHONE telephone number only comment SPEED speed of transmission UCBNAME BTAM line address 1 mandatory parameter Description of rvs Station Table Parameters in detail ACCESMET b B TAM ACME TP access method Must be BTAM This parameter may be omitted because it is the default ACTMODE 1 P N ORMAL A LL S PECIAL Activation mode of line control Optional parameter ACTMODE NORMAL line control can be activated by every activation command except A ALL ACTMODE ALL line control can be activated explicit or by an A ALL co
204. ecifies whether a response file will be expected shall be sent after data file transmission FTPRESP YES or not FTPRESP NO If parameter FTPRESP is set to NO then FTPERESP will be set to NO too FTPSESS FSS 1 1 16 Specifies the max number of parallel transmissions to the same FTP partner station Allowed are values between 1 and 16 FTPUID FUID user id user id 1 64 characters FTP login name of the partner station No default value TYPE MVS SINIX PC This parameter specifies the computer type of the partner stations The FTP component of rvsMVS supports three types of stations MVS SINIX PC Optional parameter rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 8 Subset 8 valid for Indirect Stations VIA entries UA J relais station identification mandatory parameter Description of rvs Station Table Parameters in detail VIA sid sid 3 characters Relais station identification Mandatory parameter The transmission runs exclusively via the chosen relais station No default value Note This entry points to an entry of a directly connected station which works as a relais station Due to this it is necessary that the chosen relais station must have an own Direct Entry within your station table This Direct Entry describes all t
205. ecurity Feature All private and public keys used in a rvs installation have to be stored in the Key Data dataset This data set is the central information data base for the Security Feature It works as an interface between the rvs Monitor and rvs Security Administrator which maintains the key management Security keys are identified by KEYTYPE SID and KEYID KEYTYPE may be PU for public keys or PR for private keys SID is identical with the rvs parameter SID and KEYID is a hexadecimal character string which makes the key unique in a rvs installation The key identification KEYID will be generated by the key generation program and is equal for a key pair consisting of a public and private key 1 3 Maintenance of the key management I 3 1 Overview There are some members in the dataset TABLES for maintenance of the key management For a description of parameters and DD statements see chapter 4 e KEYSDEF create VSAM key dataset e KEYSINIT initialize VSAM key dataset e KEYSGEN generate a key pair e KEYIMPAL import key pair to the key management e KEYIMPPU import public key to the key management e KEYLIST list keys from the key management e KEYEXPRT export keys from the key management to a sequential file e KEYIMPRT import keys from a sequential file to the key management e KEYDELET delete key s from the key management 1 3 2 Creation of rvs Key Data dataset The jobs KEYDEF and KEYSINIT can be used to create and ini
206. ed which files are permitted to be transferred from which sources to which destinations Transfer Permission User related RACF ID and Odette IDs A rvsMVS user represents a user account on the operating system RACF ID Now for every rvsMVS user can be defined an own Odette ID When the user sends a file the source Odette ID that is usually the Odette ID of the local station is replaced by the user s Odette ID Partner stations have to configurate the user s Odette ID as if it would belong to a Odette station that is reached by routing When rvsMVS receives a file for a user s Odette ID rvsMVS delivers the file locally and gives it user s access permissions Transfer Permission Transfer permissions are applied on a per neighbour station base For each neighbour station the appliance of the permissions may be switched on by the station configuration parameter ULS YES When transfer permissions are switched on ULS YES for a given neighbour station then all transmissions in receive and send direction are restricted Only these transmissions are allowed that are defined in the USER member SN sid member for send and RN sid member for receive in permission dataset see chapter 6 12 for more information about transfer transmissions 9 5 2 10 Steps to Prepare the Use of ULS User Level Security Feature The following chapter gives a short description of How to prepare What to do Help is where Install vsMVS cha
207. eft justified rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix F Reference Utility program DF076A Return codes reason codes Return code is returned in register 15 and reason code in register O to the caller Additionally they are printed with an explaining message in the SYSOUT dataset or in the output dataset if the output is in keyword format Return codes and their meanings 0 12 16 The search has been successfully executed the number of matching records is exactly one The search has been successfully executed the number of matching records is two or more The search has been successfully executed the number of matching records is zero Logical error s in parameter input area or in some of input dataset search argument s The execution of the program has been continued at the next set of search arguments Severe errors The execution of the program has been terminated Reason codes 00 04 08 T2 16 20 24 28 Parameter record missing in the Control Dataset Read error in the Control Dataset Invalid set of search arguments no start found Unidentified keyword Illegal search argument value Invalid search argument value length Conflicting search arguments Syntax error in search arguments Abend codes 760 761 762 769 Invalid length of parameter input area Parameter output area defined no parameter input area Input output dataset needed but could not be opened
208. ement KEYPARAM doesn t exist 97 KEYDATA FILE NOT DEFINED Note DD Statement KEYDATA doesn t exist 98 KEYPRINT FILE NOT DEFINED Note DD Statement KEYPRINT doesn t exist 99 SYSPRINT FILE NOT DEFINED Note DD Statement SYSPRINT doesn t exist 1 6 DF054K Messages This chapter contains a short description of the messages of program DFO54K It also gives some hints for error reasons and error corrections CSUTLOI PROCESSING OF KEY MANAGEMENT STARTED The message occurs during start Protocol message only CSUTLIP KEY DATA SUCESSFULLY READ STORE STARTS The message occurs after new security key data are read sucessfully from the KEYIN or DDNAME input Protocol message only CSUTL2P KEY UPDATE FUNCTION XXXXXXXXX 25 CHAR XXXXXXX reserved CSUTL3E ERROR DURING 1 1 2 4 3 The message describes an error The space may contain one of the following error reasons PREPARING KEY DATA SET UPDATE Summary message above this message the error reason will be shown PARAMETER PROCESSING The message occurs during start Protocol message only KEY DS OPEN PROCESSING The Key Data data set RVS KEY DS could not be opened Look for VSAM return code in the System message protocol KEY VALUE OPEN PROCESSING The Security Key value data set user KEYDS could not be opened Look for correct DDNAME parameter or KEYIN DD statement rvsMVS Installation Manual
209. emote rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Virtual Station remote Station VL1 is indirectly connected Relais station is LNX Files to VL1 will be transmitted via LNX The chosen relais station must also be specified This station enty is equal to VIA entry More ifo see chapter 9 5 2 Example Automatic Dial lt 72 characters gt lt 8 gt kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk KkKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK TOP OF DATA 1 SID ADS SCNL 099 0E3 FTP 4914 0 AD YES DNUM 5361829C3 ADDR AUTODIAL STATION DOPTS 09 25 12 00 6 14 30 17 00 12 DOPT2 22 15 2 LINE 099 ADDV YES ADDR AUTODIAL LINE 099 3 LINE 0E3 ADDR LINE 4 SID VAD ACME V LU T4711 SPROF 0S1 AUTOACT YES 2 2e e e e ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke ke e ke e ke e ke e ke e ke BOTTOM OF DATA e e ke khe ehe che che ke e ke e ke e ke e ke e ke e ke e ke e Explanation 1 BSC Station ADS is directly connected Autodial is possible because the necessary parameters AD and DNUM are specified and one of the chosen lines subchannel 099 is prepared for autodial see entry 2 The autodial function is activ between 9 25 am and 12 am first interval with a retry time of 6 minutes The second interval starts at 2 30 pm and stops at 5 pm with a retry time of 12 minutes Station ADS will be called automatically at 10 15 pm even
210. en With NONE the data class is not used for dataset allocation SNAUSE YES Specification whether the SNA component is to be used or not If SNAUSE NO is specified all commands related to the SNA component for example commands for activation of the SNA subtask or for SNA stations will be rejected STATION sid sid sid2 Identification s of the own local station Normally only one station identification must be specified sid 3 alohanumeric characters This is the station identification by rvs conventions One additional identification sid2 max 10 alphanumeric characters is necessary if communication with the DAKS system Daimler Benz is done This is the station identification by DAKS conventions Note In order to avoid duplicate rvs station id s the Volkswagen AG has taken the responsibility to administer a central definition table Please refer to the following address for receiving a new station id when you install rvs for the first time Volkswagen AG Abt K DOI 33 Brieffach 1398 0 D 38436 Wolfsburg Phone 49 5631 9 27118 Mr Strohmeyer 49 5361 9 76484 Mr Sekulla Fax 49 5361 9 25500 The STATION parameter is mandatory 0 nn value between 0 and 99 rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Specification of a time interval in minutes after which the virtual storage currently used by the rvs monitor is listed message DF2000P
211. end entries EFPA triggered by the ODETTE element End File Positive Answer EERP triggered by the ODETTE element End to End Response SMF 0 nnn nnn denotes the number of an installed User SVC 139 255 which may be used to write SMF records for rvs transmissions SMF 0 indicates that no User SMF records are to be written by the rvs monitor An example of a SVC used for writing SMF records and the layout of the SMF records created by the rvs monitor are included in the source library of the installations tape members ACTSVC SMFREC SMSMNGCL name rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Name of the SMS management class For more informations see description of MGMTCLAS parameter in DD statement JCL Reference If the parameter MGMTCLAS is specified within a resident receive entry this value will be taken With NONE the management class is not used for dataset allocation SMSSTOCL name Name of the SMS storage class For more informations see description of STORCLAS parameter in DD statement JCL Reference If the parameter STORCLAS is specified within a resident receive entry this value will be taken With NONE the storage class is not used for dataset allocation SMSDATCL name Name of the SMS data class For more informations see description of DATACLAS parameter in DD statement JCL Reference If the parameter DATACLAS is specified within a resident receive entry this value will be tak
212. endent wether the sessions are active or not By stating the denomination of the session you can select single sessions T sid mn resp O sid mn where m denotes the type of the session O Operator session S send session R receive session and n denotes the relative session number 0 only one session of the specified session type is defined 1 2 first second session of the same session type The rvs trace is automatically stopped with end of BTAM line control resp VTAM session control command P sid or P III For X25 connections different traces may be started for e acertain remote station command T sid the X25 Master Logical Unit command T XMLU This session is established during initialization of the X25 control task CTCP and is used to establish switched virtual circuits transfer of callpackets e a certain switched virtual circuit SVC independent of the remote station command VCLUnnn All traces for the X25 component are stopped automatically during termination stop of the X25 control task For TCP IP connections two different types of traces may be selected 1 Trace of the server task command T TCPR This trace records the following events Accepting incoming connection requests Receiving of the Odette protocol unit SSID Sending of the Odette protocol units SSRM and SSID This trace may be used in case of problems with incoming connection requests 2 Trac
213. ent used for the connection of the host with the IP network rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit 3 7 Definitions for rvsWIN stations This section contents special hints for using rvsWIN Creating rvsWIN installation disks The rvsMVS installation tape contains the file RVS RVSWIN EXE After copying this file to disk on MVS host you have to transfer this file to your PC You should use the file transfer function of the 3270 terminal emulation on your PC options without including CR LF without code translation This dataset is a self extracting file and it will create the directory RVSSETUP on your PC This directory contains all rvsWIN installation files Defining rvsWIN stations You can find the definitions for rvsWIN stations in chapter 6 2 2 and 6 2 10 of this manual Running rvsWIN To run rvsWIN the rvsWIN user needs following information and authorization rvsWIN Stations ID defined in rvsMVS Stations Table see chapter 6 2 2 fixed password or RACF authorization Application ID LU name of rvsMVS SNA component defined in member CNTL of rvsMVS table file parameter APPLID In addition the rvsWIN user needs authorization to enter the following LOGON line including DATA operator from his terminal PC with 3270 emulator rvsWIN creates this LOGON for session establishment LOGON APPLID applid DATA WI sid applid application identification o
214. epted or rejected return code RC An appropriate message is generated in DFUX002 and sent back to the rvsWIN user as further information Interface description of exit DFUX002 If the exit is entered e register 13 points to a 72 bytes savearea e register 14 contains the return address and e register 1 points to a fullword which contains the address of a parameter list with the following fields offset dec length description fullword Address of password record received by rvsWIN VRECORD layout see below Should not be modified fullword Address of remote station of the assigned station entry STNAME length 8 bytes first 3 bytes significant In case that no valid station entry is found a default entry W1 or W2 is provided In this case the access is to be rejected Should not be modified fullword Address of password STRECVPW 8 bytes specified in station entry STNAME May be blank if it is not specified Should not be modified fullword Address of userid STUSERID 8 Bytes specified in station entry STNAME May be blank if it is not specified Should not be modified fullword Address of message area MSGAREA 30 Bytes sent back to rvsWIN as a result of DFUX002 fullword Address of return code RC 2 Bytes sent back to rvsWIN as a result of DFUXOO2 The following record is sent by rvsWIN to rvsMVS directly prior to call of exit DFUX002 V RECORD PASSWORD RECORD rvsWIN gt rvsMVS
215. er of the X25MCH macro must contain the value LLC4 Parameter LUNAME of the X25MCH macro corresponds with the rvs start parameter XLUNAME The same value must be specified for both parameters Parameter LCN of the X25VC macro corresponds with the rvs start parameter MAXSVC see chapter 6 1 OUT for parameter CALL of the X25VC macro is inhibited Allowed are IN and INOUT Important The NCP Generation must contain a LUDRPOOL definition with NUMTYP1 n nis the number of control blocks conserved in your NCP necessary for establishing the lu lu sessions between rvs CTCP and NPSI You should code this value according to the number of SVCs 3 3 3 Definitions for using the ISDN network The use of an ISDN network will be able by using a special hardware box which is switching the X 25 protocol to the ISDN protocol Such a special hardware box may be delivered e g from the COMTES or the DATUS company The box works as a protocol converter for X 25 To transfer data through the ISDN network rvsMVS uses an X 25 component Therefore the definitions are the same like for native X 25 network connections It is necessary to create station entry along the X 25 rules The partner s ISDN dial up number must be filled into the X25NUM field and for X 25 via NPSI connections an XAPPLID must be created for every SVC rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit which is connected to the hardware b
216. er Protocol Both installations must have an X 25 multi channel link For further information about router configuration see router manuals 3 3 2 Definitions for using the X 25 network via NPSI This section describes VTAM definitions and NPSI definitions which are necessary for a X 25 connection between the local and a remote installation rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit The following requirements must be satisfied in order to establish an X 25 connection with a remote installation The local rvs installation must include the X 25 component The local control unit must include the X 25 NPSI program product The remote installation must support the ODETTE File Transfer Protocol Both installations must have an X 25 multi channel link VTAM definitions for the local rvs installation The local rvs installation must be defined within VTAM as a separate VTAM application VBUILD TYPE APPL RVSX APPL AUTH ACQ PARSESS YES VPACING 7 Remarks The name of the APPL statement here RVSX must be the same as specified for the rvs Startparameter XAPPLID see chapter 6 1 It must be different from the application names if used for the SNA component and the remote operating function Switched Major Node For the set of switched virtual circuits to be used by rvs the definition of a switched major node within VTAM is required The following code is an e
217. er is used only for the rvsFTP component It indicates that this component is to be used by rvs All parameters for this component must be given and a list may be found at the beginning of this section GDGTOR 20 Maximum number of ENQ requests for a target GDG after receiving a GDG file GDGTOT 1 nn Time to wait in seconds to get ENQ for a target GDG after receiving a GDG file HLDRESET NO t o 15 p This parameter is used for releasing dynamically send requests from hold status without involving any operating When an abnormal end of transmission occurred and a send request has been put into hold status this parameter provides for an automatic retry of transmission after an appropriate time interval This does not work if the send request has been put into hold status by operator You may suppress this automation by specifying HLDRESET NO HLDRESET t o t time interval 5 999 min o option e p e equal time interval p progressing time interval When e equal time interval is specified a send request remains in hold status for t minutes before a next attempt of transmission may be done When p progressing time interval is chosen the request remains in hold status for t times n minutes where n denotes to the number of unsuccessfull attempts that have already been made Examples o e t 15 After an abnormal end the send request remains in hold status for fifteen minutes before a new attempt may be done
218. er of transmitted bytes compressed data DATABYTES number of bytes of the origin data COMPRESSN average compression in percent of origin size COMPRESSN LINEBYTES x 100 DATABYTES SPEED BPS average speed of transmission in bits per second SPEED LINEBYTES 8 TIME rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix D rvs statistics D 5 Line Activity Program Jobs Line Activity Starting of Line Activity is possible either by a TSO CLIST member LINECL of dataset RVS TABLES gt or by a batch job member LINEJOB of dataset RVS TABLES Batch Job RVS TABLES LINEJOB A JOB ec KKK KK HK HK KKK ARK ARK RVS STATISTICS LINE ACTIVITY REQUIRED PARAMETERS DAY MONTH YEAR NUMERICS EACH IF MONTHLY CALCULATION REQUIRED SET DAY 00 REQUIRED PARAMETER M SUBCHANL 3 CHARACTERS BR KKK KKK HK KK KKK HK HK HK KKK KK HK KKK KK HK KKK LINEJOB EXEC PGM DF553A PARM DAY MON YEAR SUBCHANL STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSUT1 DD DSN RVS TPSTAT DISP SHR SYSUT2 DD SYSOUT TSO Clist You will find an example of this CLIST on rvsMVS installation tape file RVS TABLES LINECL Clist layout RVS Sway wae SS LINE FX Ge ag Y SELECT LINE LINE gt 095 SELECT DAY MONTH YEAR DAY 00 MONTHLY STATISTICS DAY gt 00 MONTH gt 01 gt 87 PAR
219. ero address of current kdrecord The layout of this record is described in Appendix B of this manual No field of this record should be modified by the exit The results may be unpredictable address of an area into which the exit may place a message text in case of a nonzero returncode Within the monitor this message will be displayed by rvs with one of the following message identifiers DF3526E or DF3736E if the exit is called in the receiving section DF5632E or DF1602E if the exit is called in the send section The layout of this message area is as follows Bytes 1 2 Halfword containing the length of a following message buffer This length is at least 80 Bytes This field should not be changed by the exit Bytes 3 n Message buffer rvs always clears this buffer with blank characters before the exit is called After call of the exit rvs checks this buffer for blanks in order to decide whether a message is to be displayed or not The exit may set one of the following return codes in register 15 0 to indicate that transmission or receiption of the dataset shall continue normally 4 to indicate an abnormal condition Depending on the environment in which the exit is executed this may result in e rejection of an update of the controldataset e rejection of sending of a file e suppression of processing options when receiving a file 12 to indicate that reception of a file is to be rejected This returncode is meaning
220. erriden possible with NPSI Version 1 Rel 4 3 other values may be valid x25num x25num 15 characters X25NUM nn 4 x25group max 8 characters x25num x25group nn 1 99 25 number Germany Datex P Rufnummer If you want to support more than one X 25 multi channel links in your rvs monitor it is possible to comprise several links to groups You can reach partners by more than one link automatically In this case you have to define such X 25 groups as rvs Start Parameter member CNTL of the rvs Tables file Each defined X 25 group consists of a group name up to eight alphanumeric characters and a list of the numbers of the multi channel links which should be comprised in this group For instance X25GROUP ISDN 1 3 4 In the partner stations table entry this group may be refered to by specifying this group name additional in X25NUM parameter For instance X25NUM 0123456789 ISDN When dialing out rvsMVS looks for a not busy line among the specified links In case of receiving a CLEAR packet after dialing to a partner number rvs will dial to the next defined partner number automatically X25FAC nn cc cc 1 128 characters nn 1 99 Facility fields of X 25 call request packet Optional parameter This field could be useful to select an closed user group or any other facilities of X 25 Example Select closed used group X25FAC 0312 byte 0 1 basicversion byte 2 3 reference number
221. et rvs User Log Dataset USP RVS LOGDATA VSAM KSDS rvs User Log Log USP RVS LOGLOG BDAM dataset rvs JOBS Dataset RVS JOBS rvs EXEC Dataset REXX 4 1 rvs Load Library RVS EXEC The rvs software is provided in load module form The load library contains all modules which are used for rvs operation and control Some modules within this library are dummy modules for example modules used as installation dependent exits These modules may be replaced by other programs A description of these exits is contained in the appendix of this manual Remarks The installation tape contains different load libraries depending on the fact which components of rvs are distributed BSC SNA X25 Message DF30461 INCLUDED COMPONENTS OF rvsMVS will be displayed after start of the rvs Monitor in order to indicate which components of rvs are available in the installation The rvs load library may contain an expiration date This date is used to distinguish between test installations of rvs and normal installations If an expiration date is included message DF30441 EXPIRATION DATE OF CURRENT SOFTWARE ddd yy will be displayed after start of the rvs Monitor where ddd is the julian date and yy is the year of the expiration date 4 2 rvs Controldataset The rvs Controldataset RVS KD is organized as a VSAM KSDS All information required on the individual transmissions are stored in the Con
222. eter SECURITY EXT NO determines the default value for all transfers with this station This default becomes always effective if the user doesn t use the SECURITY parameter during create of send request SECURITY EXT this means external feature security is used SECUTITY NO this means no security Default value of the station parameter SECURITY NO The user can also control the use of the external security via the parameter SECURITY EXT NO in the program DF080A00 The table shows the combinations of the parameters and its results assume that the external security feature is enabled by license key Station Parameter SECURITY Parameter Result SECURITY DF080A00 unspecified unspecified no Encryption unspecified SECURITY NO no Encryption unspecified SECURITY EXT no Encryption with hint at users rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset SECURITY NO unspecified no Encryption SECURITY NO SECURITY NO no Encryption SECURITY NO SECURITY EXT no Encryption with hint at users SECURITY EXT unspecified External Encryption SECURITY EXT SECURITY NO no Encryption SECURITY EXT SECURITY EXT External Encryption Routing The external feature security is a function which is always used as end end function This means that the external feature security is not performed if the destination is not the own sta
223. etwork is used it may be necessary depending on the automatic calling unit that the telephone number is preceeded by character D waiting for indication from the network that a number may be dialed german Freizeichen abwarten The characters C3 must be added to the number as well as for Datex L lines Examples The number of Datex L line 5361829 must be specified by DIALNUM 5361829C3 the telephone number 05361 123456 must be specified by DIALNUM D05361123456C3 Remark If the remote station has more than one line which may be used for transmissions specification of a second or third dialnumber might be useful In this case a second third stations entry should be coded The only difference between the additional station entries for one remote station should be the different dialnumbers FTP ftpname Name of File Transfer Protocol Mandatory Parameter If you use switched lines the FTP parameter will substitute the old PROGPROF parameter for leased line the PROGPROF parameter is valid further on rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Following FTP s are supported by rvsMVS BSC 4914 0 VDA File Transfer Protocol April 85 no blocking no restart no password exchange 4914 1 VDA File Transfer Protocol March 88 no blocking no restart with password exchange autodial mandatory rvsMVS rvs Internal Protocol of VOLKSWAGEN AG for exclusive use with rvsMVS stations with
224. ew PDS with the following members e for user virtual station mapping e send permissions receive permissions 6 12 1 Users Table Member The user virtual station mapping is configured the member USER Layout e Each line that begins with an asterisk is a comment line e Each non comment line defines a relation between a RACF user and a virtual station e The first user that maps to a certain station is its owner The syntax of the record 1 Comment record Column 1 asterisk 2 user virtual station mapping SID ABC USER RACFUserlD Example Comment first user of A21 is owner of A21 SID A21 USER FIXOGTE SID A21 USER FIX0GG2 station A24 SID A24 USER FIXOABC SID A24 USER FIXODFF SID A24 USER FIXOXYZ station A25 SID A25 USER FIXOERT This member defines 3 virtual stations A21 A24 A25 A21 has two users the user with the UserID FIXOGTE and the user with the RACF UserID 2 The user FIXOGTE is the owner of the station 21 A24 has 3 users FIXOABC FIXODFF and FIXOXYZ FIXOABC is the owner of A24 A25 has only a user FIXOERT who is at the same time the owner of this station 6 12 2 Permission Table Members rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset For each neighbour station non virtual station with the parameter ULS YES is it necessary to define a permission table member Note The term neighbour station i
225. example in case of need of adaption to your environment A 6 ODETTE FTP User Exits Starting with rvsMVS 1 2 06 there are OFTP aided user exits in different layers of the ODETTE file transfer protocol These user exits are e SSID User Exit e SFID User Exit e EERP User Exit send and receive send and receive receive Starting with rvsMVS 2 2 00 the user fields of SSID and SFID are used for the PDS transfer function If SSID and or SFID user exits are installed for certain stations the PDS transfer function is not supported for these stations In the flow of an ODETTE protocol session the user exits are available for the following protocol elements sender receiver OFTP OFTP SSRM lt SSID send SSID 2 SSID recv exit exit SSID recv SSID SSID send 2 exit exit SFID send SFID SFID exit exit EERP recv EERP exit When the user exit gets control register 1 points to a list of two words which points to the data portion of the OFTP buffer e tothe current station entry On this way you can address all fields of an ODETTE FPDU and you have access to all informations of the station entry The first byte of an ODETTE FPDU is the OFTP command code rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits e SSID send and receive user exit EXSSID DSECT SFIDCMD DS CL1 SFIDDSN DS CL51 SSIDUSER DS CL8 e SFID send an
226. f a cross domain resource manager VBUILD TYPE CDRM Mxx CDRM SUBAREA xx CDRDYN YES CDRSC OPT Mnn CDRM SUBAREA nn CDRDYN YES CDRSC OPT Definition of ACF VTAM routes to the remote host example Fxxnn PATH DESTSA nn ERO yy 1 VRO 0 Remarks e nn denotes the sub area of the remote host remote rvs installation e xx denotes the sub area of the local host e yy denotes the sub area of the next node host if the connection between local and remote host is not a direct connection e The name of the cross domain resource for the remote rvs here rvsB must be specified within the rvs Stations Table entry for the remote rvs installation see chapter 6 2 parameter LUNAME 3 3 Definitions for X25 component of rvs 3 3 1 Definitions for using the X 25 network via XOT This section describes the principles of X 25 connections via XOT XOT is a protocol for transmitting X 25 packets over a TCP IP network It was recommended by CISCO as RFC1613 An XOT capable hardware is able to extract the X 25 packets from XOT and send it over an X 25 network The following requirements must be satisfied in order to establish an X 25 connection with a remote station The local rvs installation must include the X 25 component The local control unit must include the IBM TCP IP program product TCP IP connection to an XOT capable hardware e g CISCO or BINTEC Router The remote installation must support the ODETTE File Transf
227. f error error message the following things should be checked e definition of the line subchannel within the rvs stations table IODEVICE generation for this subchannel parameter UNIT BSC1 EP generation of the control unit physical path between CPU control unit and modem hardware The line may be stopped again by entering the command P sid Test of SNA connections Before SNA sessions can be activated between local and remote installation the rvs VTAM subtask must be started This must be done by entering the command A RVSVTAM If activation was successful message DF9005I RVS VTAM CONTROL TASK READY is displayed If activation is not successful error messages will be displayed which indicate the kind of error After activation of the rvs VTAM subtask sessions to the remote station may be activated by entering the command A sid In this case rvs tries to activate all sessions which are defined stations table session profile for the remote installation Message DF99021 F sid nm SESSION ESTABLISHED FOR LU luname CID address indicates successful activation of one session to the remote station In case of error conditions error messages will be displayed instead of the above message Activated sessions may be stopped by entering the command P sid Test of X25 connections Before X25 sessions can be activated between local and remote installation the rvs X25 control task must be started This must
228. f rvsMVS SNA component sid rvsWIN Station ID It is possible that you have to change some VTAM definitions 3 8 Definitions for remote operating function This section describes VTAM definitions which are necessary if the remote operating function shall be used The only requirement for the use of the remote operating function is the definition of an application within VTAM VBUILD TYPE APPL RVSO APPL AUTH ACQ PARSESS NO Remark The name of the APPL statement here rvsO must be the same as specified for the rvs Startparameter RMOPAPPL see chapter 6 1 rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 4 rvs System Files 4 rvs System Files The following files are required for the control of rvs Dataset names are freely selectable for each installation The following names will be utilized throughout this manual Designation Load module library Dataset name RVS LOAD Dataset organisation Library PDS rvs Controldataset RVS KD VSAM KSDS rvs Logdataset RVS LOG BDAM dataset rvs Tables Dataset RVS TABLES Library PDS rvs Key Dataset RVS KEY DS VSAM KSDS rvs Permission Tables Dataset RVS PTABLES Library PDS rvs User Mapping Dataset USP RVS USERDATA VSAM KSDS rvs User Mapping Log USP RVS USERLOG BDAM datas
229. fer mode is Stream EZA14601 Command EZA17361 PUT FIX0003 BX FIX0004 TESTX33 FA4 F000019 EZA17011 gt gt gt 5 FIXrecfm 138 Lrec1 138 Recfm FB BLKSIZE 18630 200 Site command was accepted EZA17011 gt gt gt PORT 143 163 32 2 4 31 200 Port request OK EZA1701I gt gt gt STOR FIX0004 TESTX33 FA4 F000019 125 Storing data set FIX0004 TESTX33 FA4 F000019 250 Transfer completed successfully EZA16171 13761 bytes transferred in 1 020 seconds Transfer rate 13 49 Kbytes s EZA14601 Command EZA17361 TYPE E EZA17011 gt gt gt TYPE e rvsMVS Installation Manual 8 Special Functions Procedures 200 Repre EZA14601 EZA17361 EZA17011I 200 Data EZA1460I EZA17361 EZA1701I 200 Site EZA1701I 200 Port sentation type is EBCDIC Command MODE B gt gt gt MODE b transfer mode is Block Command PUT FIX0003 TEST FTPHD FD2FAA4 FA4 F000019 FIX0004 TEST FTPHD FD2FA4 gt gt gt SITE FIXrecfm 160 Lrecl 160 Recfm FB BLKSIZE 16000 command was accepted gt gt gt PORT 143 163 32 2 4 32 request OK EZA17011 gt gt gt STOR FIX0004 TEST FTPHD FD2FA4 FA4 F000019 125 Storing data set FIX0004 TEST FTPHD FD2FA4 FA4 F000019 250 Transfer completed successfully EZA16171 163 bytes transferred in 0 504 seconds Transfer rate 0 32 Kbytes sec EZA14601 Command EZA17361 QUIT TRACE DATA BLOCK FTP TRAILER FILE gt RECEIVE REMOTE STATION FA DATASET NAME FIX0004 TESTX33 QUEUEING TIME 97 133 11 19 50
230. fier 4 byte must be defined If this parameter is not specified and only one TCP IP stack is used the system derives a value from the configuration file of the TCP IP installation If the index xx for the stack is not coded the index value 1 will be automatically assigned TCPPORT xx 3305 nn nn value between 0 and 32767 Local port number used for the TCP IP server function of the used stack After start of the specified TCP IP stack a server task is automatically started to look for incoming requests for connection This server task only cares about requests for the specified port number If the index xx for the stack is not coded the index value 1 will be automatically assigned The default value of 3305 is the port number recommended by the Odette organization which is officially registered by IANA USA for the OFTP TCPPROD xx IBM INTERLINK This parameter specifies the product name of the TCP IP stack to be used rvsMVS supports the stacks of IBM or INTERLINK If the index xx for the stack is not coded the index value 1 will be automatically assigned rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset TCPSTKID xx name Reference name for the specified TCP IP stack This name corresponds with the stations table parameter TCPIPADR Name may be any alphanumeric string with a length of max 8 bytes If the index xx for the stack is not coded the index value 1 will be automatically assigned If more th
231. for the X25 component This name must be specified in an APPL statement of the local VTAM If the SNA component or the remote operating function or both is used this value must be different from the values specified within the rvs startparameters APPLID and RMOPAPPL This application id is used to establish sessions between rvs and the NPSI To support more than one X 25 multi channel links you have to define this parameter for each X 25 multi channel CTCP XBFSIZE 2000 nnn This parameter is used only for the X25 component It specifies the max exchange buffer size to be used by rvs nnn may be a value between 128 and 32000 This parameter corresponds with two other values e Parameter LBLKSIZE within the rvs stations table for stations defined to use the X 25 network stations table parameter ACCESMET X25 If the value of parameter LBLKSIZE is greater than the value of parameter XBFSIZE the value for LBLKSIZE will be reduced to the value of XBFSIZE automatically during start of rvs Thus the value of parameter XBFSIZE is always the maximum size of exchange buffers used for X25 stations e For the set of switched virtual circuits to be used by rvs a definition of a switched major node within VTAM is required The value for the MAXDATA parameter of the PU macro within the switched major node definition must always be greater than the value for the rvs start parameter XBFSIZE XLUNAME xx name This paramete
232. for transmissions which satisfy the search arguments and the results are presented for the caller Input Input may be given in either of the two ways e As an call parameter input area originating from JCL EXEC statement command processor CALL or call from another application program according to the convention of JCL EXEC statement or command processor execution parameter area expression presenting exactly one set of search arguments The length if this parameter area may be zero no input via input INPARM or 2 256 The existence length and contents of area are checked and when it defines a set of search arguments it will be used rather than the dataset input even even though an input dataset would be available e As an input from a dataset containing or more sets of search arguments Even in this case parameter input area may be present to define input and output dataset names and output format Dataset input may also include comment records placed between any two sets of search arguments The comments are recognized by an asterisk in position one followed by at least one blank character There are two valid formats of input records either in parameter area or dataset input e n keyword format the search arguments are given selectively identified by the keywords described below A set of search arguments begins with text STATUS ST REFNR RNR or TYP and occupies the whole parameter input area or one or more
233. he command MSG fkt name is entered fkt denotes one of the four functions see above rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Each function may be set inactive by entering the command MSG fkt NONE Additionally there is a command to reset all functions to their default assignments MSG SETDEF or MSG S This command also displays the new assignments for all functions Syntax of the CNTLMSG member Lines starting with a in column 1 are treated as a comment The length of a line 80 characters may completely be used for definitions etc The first non comment line must define the group subset name of the message subset Syntax SUBSET name where name is a string of up to 8 alphanumeric characters No differences are made between small capital letters all input from the CNTLMSG member will be translated to capital letters before interpretation After the definition of the subset name one or more default assignments for the different functions may be done Syntax DEFAULT CNSLSUP default assignment for suppression of console messages DEFAULT CNSLDSPL default assignment for display of console messages DEFAULT RMOPSUP default assignment for suppression of rem op messages DEFAULT RMOPDSPL default assignment for display of rem op messages Subset definition and default assignment s must be separated by at least one blank The default assignments become active after start of the rvs mo
234. i 85 PAD 2 cito iia 98 IDEXIT iia 55 oido 159 Installation Tests ee 159 PDEDODZA dct hee de 143 Interlink boina hte 61 66 BDEO00094 ntn Rep 146 INTRDR elei 142 BDEOO0TAA eni Ree metet e 147 ISPF Panels PDEFO0OTS5A needed deo dede 148 43 NA eei ete tn 178 Installation 41 PEKEYS see Remote Operating PFKEYS JEP asics 55 PHONE dtt teen ede 79 115 JOBCARD see Tables Dataset Jobcard e 86 JOBCARDE tete 142 see Tables Dataset Program Profile JOBCARDS see Tables Dataset JOBCARDS Table JSSNAME itti dee ep 55 dte edi Endet 57 100 JSSSYSID coincide tdt beenden 56 RECWVPW iei eti edet eet 86 90 94 KD idee teet eb 143 Remote Operating KEY iiie eie det hdi 142 ied rat t crie deo tede 139 Key Data data set PEKEYS uscar 142 Sonrisa 32 Usar tii 255 Key Data data set REPLY ius ic 58 Gon iia ias 263 Requirements Key Data dataset Hard Wate 2 ettet e aee 11 CreatlOn eesti din erecta dian bien 45 263 SOME ti iaa 11 KEY DATA conti 142 RMOPAPDL ertet teste ee EE e 58 KEY DELET asics tis oct toi 263 ROUD otitis 58 KEYBEXPRT uti start 263 RRW tt dit eons eae uidere 86 9
235. ication User annnm annnm 5 6 ODETTE FTP US r ExitS cocina 5 B Description of the rvs controldataset record KDRECORD 5 C Description of accounting information nennen 5 D S EEUU OO RO 5 D 1 General Informatlon nia 5 D 2 PrereQUISITOS me M 5 rvsMVS Installation Manual Contents D 3 Job to gain the basic data for the statistics 1 2 5 D 4 Station Activity Program cerei 5 D 5 Line Activity Program 5 D 6 Legend of rvs statistics 5 E Example for an extended rvs Start 5 F Reference Utility program 076 2 2 1 0 1 11 nnmnnn 5 G Using the Remote Operating 1 5 a 5 H 1 rvsMVS Program Profile Table only used for the BSC component 5 l Key Data Utility Program DFO54K
236. ication of rvs start parameters Specification of automatically executed rvs commands rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset INTRDR STATIONS SESSIONS JOBCARD JOBCARDF STAPEJC RTAPEJC SYSOUTJC FTPRVSJC KEY PFKEYS KEYDATA TRNTABLE PTABLES USERDATA USERLOG LOGDATA LOGLOG Y EXTCONF Allocation of Internal Reader for example used for jobstart after receiption of a dataset Since version 4 01 00 If this statement is used dynamic allocation deallocation and open close are used once only Allocation of rvs Stations Table contains information about all connected stations Allocation of rvs Sessions Table information about the transmission protocol and other specifications which are to be used for the communication with certain stations This information is used for all transmissions working with the SNA component Allocation of a valid jobcard used for example if received datasets are to be copied to tape or sysout Allocation of a valid jobcard used for for jobs of the FTP component Job control used a dataset queued for transmission resides on tape and must be copied to disk before transmission Job control used if a dataset is to be copied to tape after receiption for example if the start parameter DDEVTYP TAPE is active and no other control for receiption of this dataset has been specified Job control to copy a received dataset into a SYSOUT queu
237. id will not be rejected Remark if sid specifies the station ID of the own local station receiving of all files from the remote station with this destination will be rejected In this case the remote station may only send files via the local station to other destinations ODETID 1 z Odette id Odette id max 25 chars OID J Odette identification of remote station The Odette id must be put into quotes if it contains blanks No default value Mandatory parameter if you use VDA FTP 4914 1 ODETTE identifications will be defined and issued by the national automotive associations For the Federal Republic of Germany the following address should be consulted Verband der Automobilindustrie e V VDA WestendstraBe 61 Postfach 170563 Kennwort VDA AVKD 4914 60079 Frankfurt Tel 069 97507 283 Fax 069 97507 300 Mail habild vda de Registration and distribution of ODETTE ID is not free of charge OPTIONS P NO RJOB RJE ROPT REPL ALL OPTS J Authorization for remote job processing Optional parameter Single and combined values are allowed OPTS NO No authorization for remote job processing OPTS RJOB Remote job processing is allowed OPTS RJE RJE output may be requeued OPTS ROPT Remote options DISPR DEVR UNITR VOLR will be processed OPTS REPL Replace function is authorized OPTS ALL Full authorisation 1 Only usable with a special software Output Writer distributed by VW
238. ields contains the character A If an existing profile is to be deleted both input fields must be changed to blank characters rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS If option 3 is selected the following screen will appear the valid rvs password must be supplied for this function kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk 0 0 00 ROW 1 TO 2 OF 2 RVS DISPLAY AUTHORIZATIONS OF RVS USERS 9 eek ke ehe ee kk KKK KKK ke ke ehe He de KK KKK e ek ke ke ec ke ke ke e He e He He kk He He ec kk ke He He ke k COMMAND gt SCROLL gt PAGE USER SEND REQUESTS RESIDENT ENTRIES USERID1 X USERID2 x X KKKKKKKKEKKKKKKKKKKKKKKEKKKKKKKEKK BOTTOM OF DATA x xk k k k k k k kk kk kkk kkk kkk ke ke ke kkk This panels displays all USERID that have any authorization for deletion of SEND or RESIDENT RECEIVE ENTRIES 5 9 Creation of rvs Key Data dataset Creation and Initialization of the rvs Key Data set if Security Feature will be used see chapter appendix l 5 10 Installation of the Security Library Data dataset There are no additional installation steps because all modules necessary for Security Feature of rvsMVS are linked together with the new program Service Provider DF310A 5 11 Creation of rvs Permission dataset See chapter 9 5 for Creation and Initialization of the rvs Permission data
239. ification of remote station Mandatory parameter The Odette id must be put into quotes if it contains blanks No default value ODETTE identifications will be defined and issued by the national automotive associations Up to now it is not completely clear which organizations will do this work in the different countries For the Federal Republic of Germany the following address should be consulted Verband der Automobilindustrie e V VDA WestendstraBe 61 Postfach 170563 Kennwort VDA AVKD 4914 60079 Frankfurt Tel 069 97507 283 Fax 069 97507 300 Mail habild vda de Registration and distribution of ODETTE ID is not free of charge OWNOID Odette id Odette id max 25 chars Odette identification of own station The Odette id must be put into quotes if it contains blanks No default value This parameter may be used if a special own ODETTE identification other than the own specified in the start parameter ODID is requested by the partner This parameter may only be specified in main station entries not for sub entries RECVPW 1 P pw pw1 pw2 0 pw pw1 pw2 1 8 characters RPW J Receive passwords Mandatory parameter One or two passwords which will be compared with the password sent by the remote station No default value SENDPW 1 p pw pw 1 8 characters SPW Send Password Mandatory parameter Password will be sent to the remote station ODETTE protocol requires a password exchange
240. is set rvs intern to corresponding value of the license key If the GZIP function is not available in license key and if parameter COMPRESS GZIP is used in STATIONS this parameter is ignored error message is written If the user uses the parameter GZIPZYES at the create of send request this is also ignored error message is written The rvs stationtable parameter COMPRESS OFTP YES NO GZIP EXT determines the default value for all transfers with this station This default becomes always effective if the user doesn t use the GZIP parameter during create of send request COMPRESS OFTP this means that OFTP compression is used COMPRESS YES equal like COMPRESS OFTP Compatibility COMPRESS NO this means no compressing COMPRESS GZIP this means GZIP compression external feature COMPRESS EXT equal like COMPRESS GZIP Compatibility Default value of the station parameter is COMPRESS YES The user can also control the use of the GZIP compression via the parameter GZIP YES in the program DFO80A00 Because of compatibility the previous DF080A00 parameter COMPRESS YES NO RVS EXT is accepted too The values of this parameter are handled as follows COMPRESS YES is converted in GZIP NO COMPRESS NO is converted in GZIP NO COMPRESS RVS is converted in GZIP YES COMPRESS EXT is converted in GZIP YES The table shows the combinations of the parameters and its results assume that the compression feature is e
241. kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk To use rvsMVS you must give us the CPU Identification of your Computer You can find this CPU ID by using of program DF018C Example JOB EXEC PGM DF018C CPU DD DISP NEW KEEP UNIT SYSDA DSN SPACE TRK 1 1 We generate a key and send it to you To use User Level Security you need the following components e C for User related Odette IDs e D for Transfer Restrictions e Efor Virtual Stations Please insert this values into the member USER under consideration of all spaces and lines by using an default editor e g TSO Editor or ISPF Editor After correctly modifying of member USER you can use rvsMVS rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit 3 1 Definition for BSC component of rvs Two things must be done to define a BSC line which is to be used by rvs e definition of the line within the IODEVICE generation MVS and e generation of the line within the control unit EP generation 3 1 1 BSC lines without autodial function IODEVICE generation of BSC lines without autodial function BSC lines must always be defined as point to point connections The following parameters should be used for a switched BSC line IODEVICE ADDRESS xxx ADAPTER BSCA TCU 2703 UNIT BSC2 The following parameters must be used for a leased BSC
242. l station VC5 All defined users are the owners of the virtual station 9 5 8 Add new DDName in Monitor Jobstart JCL Program Add information about the PDS which includes user and permission information Example PTABLES DD DSN FIXOGTE RVSULS PTABLES DISP SHR 9 5 9 Add new DDName in DF080A JCL Programm Add information about the PDS which includes user and permission information Example PTABLES DD DSN FIXOGTE RVSULS PTABLES DISP SHR 9 5 10 New commands on remote operator console X SID ULST display permission table from to SID X SID ULSU display user table rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features 9 5 11 Send und Receive Scenario The following structures illustrate the send and receive scenarios with ULS Send This check is implemented in the programs DF080A and DF052A send a file look for neighbour station to send the file ls user level security allowed and the parameter LILS ES is set for neighbor station ls there a virtual station for set odette ld of local current RACE user station as originator set odette ld of virtual set odette Id of local station as originator station as originator Is there a permission to send the given NDSN to given destination from given originator SN return KO It isn t allowed ta send this file to the destination as current user send the file rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features Receive This check is implemented i
243. ld be noticed rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix rvsMVS Tables A switched line defined as an autodial device see description of the rvs Stations Table in this manual cannot be used for remote stations which have installed rvs DOS Release 2 This problem can be solved if the remote station installes rvs DOS Release 3 Module name of the send routine Module name for communication with rvsMVS or rvsDOS DF034K00 Module name for communication with rvsRPG DF034L00 Module name for all other communications DFO34M00 Module name of the receive routine Module name for communication with rvsMVS or rvsDOS DFO35K00 Module name for communication with rvsRPG DFO35L00 Module name for all other communications DFO35M00 Module name of the transmission control routine DF057B00 must always be specified Module name of the termination routine DFO59C00 must always be specified Definition of the transmission protocol The following values may be specified rvs internal protocol used if the remote station has installed rvsMVS or rvs DOS Rel 2 C 6 rvs standard procedure specifications of this protocol are described in the rvs Interface Description protocol VW FTP B1 0 This protocol does not support restart each data record is transmitted separate on the line no blocking Transmission protocol used for a special software on Siemens 330 computers only VW internal use rvs internal
244. le IXTDBID address of a 10 byte field containing the value of parameter DBID as specified within the rvs stations table for the remote station This address is set to zero if no DBID parameter is specified or available IXTLINE address of a 3 byte field containing the subchannel number of the used line The exit may set one of the following return codes in register 15 0 4 8 1 to indicate that identification and following activities shall continue normally reserved reserved 2 to indicate that the identification phase is to be cancelled In this case the line connection will be broken All other returncodes will be handled in the same way as returncode 12 Rules for coding of the exit This exit should be coded reentrant linkage editor attributes reusable and reenterable If the exit is not coded reentrant the exit must be link edited without attributes reenterable and reusable Link attribute reusable may cause errors if more than one BSC line is used within the installation The exit must restore the contents of registers 2 13 when returning control to the calling rvs program The exit should not modify e field within the parameter list described above e any field pointed to by the parameter list except the identification record Environment of the exit The exit is loaded after activation of the line start of the line control program DFO55A00 If more tha
245. less if the exit is executed outside the address space of the rvs monitor or if it is executed within the send section of the rvs monitor All other returncodes will be handled in the same way as returncode 4 Rules for coding of exit DFUX001 rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits This exit must be coded reusable or reentrant The exit must restore the contents of registers 2 13 when returning control to the calling rvs program The exit should not modify e field of the current record of the rvs Control Dataset KDRECORD e length field of the message buffer The following logic send or receive section applies to e each active send session rvs SNA session e each active leased line BTAM BSC e each active switched line BTAM BSC after establishing line connection to a remote rvs station e each active switched virtual circuit SVC to a remote rvs station Active here always means that the line or session has been activated within the rvs monitor rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits Logic within the send sections select first or next dataset for transmission isa dataset available to send 2 yes link to exit DFUX001 2 5 return code equal 2 zero yes 2 NV transmit send the selected dataset place send request in HOLD state display message about this
246. m column 19 80 comment station line column 1 must be blank column 2 4 station identification column 6 27 station address column 28 80 comment kt comment line column 1 column 2 80 comment Example of RVS GROUPS ok ke ke KARA e ke e ke KARA TOP OF DATA Kk ke ee ehe e e ehe ke ce ee ec ke e ke e e e e e e e e e e ek I ILIVILEITIELTLIVILII2ELELIVITLELISIEELEIVIELEIAI LELIVILTISI TEIVILITODI L 101081 1 BK BANKS B15 DEUTSCHE BANK B16 CITI BANK B17 BANKS OF THE OHIO IM IMPORTERS USA UNITED STATES MIAMI CAN CANADA TORONTO DAN DANMARK KOPENHAGEN RR RIK BOTTOM OF DATA 6 RK IIR III II III II III II III IC rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix D rvs statistics A group of stations will be selected only by its short title two characters long the long form will be written into the headline of the outputlist The logical end of a group is reached at the next short title beginning at the first column Station addresses will be put into the address fields of the output list Note An all station evaluation is possible with or without allocated dataset RVS GROUPS The difference is that the address field in your output list can be filled only if this station is mentioned in RVS GROUPS Jobs Station Activity Starting of Station Activity is possible either by a TSO CLIST member STATCL of dataset RVS TABLES gt or by a batch job member STATJOB
247. mapping rvs User Mapping Log log of User Mapping Dataset rvs User Log Dataset VSAM dataset with log events rvs User Log Log log of User Log Dataset For detailed information see chapter 9 6 4 8 rvs Jobs Dataset The Jobs Dataset RVS JOBS is organized as a PDS Its members contain JCL for starting some usefull rvs tools rvsMVS Installation Manual 4 rvs System Files 4 9 rvs EXEC Dataset The Exec Dataset RVS EXEC is organized as a PDS Its members contain REXX scripts for different tasks rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS The Distribution medium of rvsMVS is Distribution CD 5 1 Installation Guide from the Compact Disk The following steps must be performed when installing rvs 1 2 System Device generation for all used BSC lines see chapter 3 Generation of all used BSC lines within the control unit for example IBM 37x5 see chapter 3 Definition of VTAM resources if SNA or X25 component or the remote operating function are used and generation of the NPSI if the X25 component is to be used see chapter 3 Transferring files to the MVS host All of the files except README TXT DOC RVSWIN EXE release info and rvsMVS documentation are datasets for the MVS environment These datasets have to be transferred from the workstation to the MVS host This may be done by various programs using different proto
248. me of the transmission TDATE Transmission start date TTIME Transmission start time Example SEONR 000001 TYPE AS SID RF2 DSNAME ENK ZNEEBS ECIA ODATE 94 125 OTIME 08 13 06 0 TDATE 94 125 TTIME 09 39 15 7 Control Dataset record format output Also this format is self explanatory The output contains unprintable characters and should thus be used only for further processing Layout of this format is identical to the one of Control Dataset record Fixed format output This format is also mainly for further processing but does not contain unprintable characters and not all the information from the Control Dataset recora Layout of the fixed format Reference Dataset output Columns Length Description Transmissionstate recordtype Active Receive Entry Active Send Entry Break Entry Receive Break Entry Send Complete Receive Entry Complete Send Entries Resident Receive Entry Response not yet received Dataset is sent completel rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix F Reference Utility program DF076A response has not yet been received 3 bytes rvs Station Identification of the chosen station 5 bytes Reserved 44 bytes Name of transmitted Dataset Dataset name used between the local and the remote station It may but need not to be the physical dsname 8 bytes Name of transmitted Dataset Member Name of a member of the above mentioned dataset 3 bytes First Station Station Identification of
249. mes Users are represented by ODETTE lds and datasets can have asterisks at the end as wildcard 9 5 6 Change station table Neighbour station If ULS is used you have to add the parameter ULSZYES to the neighbour station From now the ULS check is used for this station Local virtual station Define all needed local virtual stations see the following example Example SID VC1 ADDR LOCAL VIRTUAL STATION for user FIXOGTE ODETID 00013000001VW VGTE TYPE VIRT ACME T RECVPW AAA SENDPW AAA Note We need the parameters ACME RECVPW and SENDPW for the purpose of compatibility Use ACME T RECVPW AAA rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features SENDPW AAA as standard values How to define for a virtual station needed users please see the chapter 6 12 1 Remote virtual station Add for each user of the remote station his own station in your station table It looks like a routed station VIA but your neighbour station can identify this ODETTE ld Example SID VTE ADDR VIRTUELLE STATION BEI TEP ODETID 00013003210GEDAS VTEP VIA TEP 9 5 7 Create new PDS for user and permission information Create a PDS with e Member USER it contains user to station mapping e Members SN it contains permission entries direction send for one neighbour e Members it contains permission entries direction receive for one neighbour Example PDS FIXOGTE RVSULS PARTNERS Members SNZTEP
250. mitted data is counted in blocks 184 193 10 bytes Number of Tranmsitted Data blocks records 194 1 byte Reserved 195 204 10 bytes Number of Transmitted Bytes compressed For values bigger than 9999999999 use extended format below 205 1 byte Reserved rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Reference Utility program DF076A 10 bytes Number of Transmitted Bytes uncompressed For values bigger than 9999999999 use extended format below 1 byte Multi Volume Dataset M Dataset is a multi volume dataset 6 bytes Volume Number Disk Number of first volume if multi volume dataset 6 bytes Volume Number Tape 1 byte Kind of Error U User Abend Code S System Abend Code A Allocation Error 8 bytes Error Code 5 bytes Logical Record Length in bytes 5 bytes Blocksize in bytes 1 byte Record Format F fixed record length V variable record length U undefined record length 1 byte Resident Receive Entry or Remote Options R Resident Receive Entry found and used Resident Receive Entry ignored because of exit DFUX001 O Remote Options of sender used Reserved Dataset Organization P partitioned Dataset S sequential Dataset Accounting Number Disposition K keep catalog uncatalog delete Action after Receiving E write event to a job scheduling system specified F a job submit failed after reception of a data set J jo
251. mmand ACTMODE SPECIAL _ line control of this station has to be activated under declaration of the line address Operator commands Activation of BSC lines see chapt 5 5 of the rvsMVS Operation Manual ACTOPTS2 at rt at1 rt1 at2 rt2 at3 rt3 at4 rt4 Options for automatic activation see AUTOACT of line control Optional parameter at at1 at2 specifies the activation times when automatic activation will be active Start time and end time must be written in hours and minutes Syntax at hh mm hh mm Default value is 00 00 24 00 rt rt1 rt2 rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset specifies the activation retry time The retry time is a delay for the program to try the activation again after the last try wasn t successful Allowed values 1 255 min Default value is 5 minutes The parameters must be put in brackets separated by comma Maximal input are four combinations of at and rt Example ACTOPTS 11 15 12 00 5 14 02 17 00 10 Note Do not specify time interval beyond midnight seperate it Instead ACTOPTS 23 00 06 00 5 use ACTOPTS 23 00 24 00 5 00 00 06 00 5 ADDEVICE 1 t Y ES 01 ADDV J Automatic dial devices Optional parameter Significates whether autodial devices for the line are installed or not ADDRESS P text string text string max 20 chars LADDR Address of the station Optional parameter The text string
252. mp Indication for the using of the Security Feature see YPREFIX Trigger of Serialize SVC number for writing SMF records SMS Management Class SMS Storage Class SMS Data Class Identification s of the local own station Time interval for display of used virtuell storage in minutes Blocksize to be used for received TEXT format files Max reclen to be used for received TEXT format files Interval for status display Sysout class dataset name for trace data Timestamp for dataset name at relais station User completion codes Name of disk unit group Unitcount for multivolume datasets USP User Separation Name of a disk receive volume Accounting information within VW conventions Generated jobnames within VW conventions Prefix for creating the temporary Compression Security files Storage_class parameter during creation of temporary Compression Security files Management_class parameter during creation of temporary Compression Security files Date_class parameter during creation of temporary Compression Security files primary_allocation parameter during creation of temporary Compression Security files secondary_allocation parameter during creation of temporary Compression Security files unit_count parameter during creation of temporary Compression Security files rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset YUNITN name unit_count parameter during creation of temporary Compression
253. must be put into quotes Within the quotes all characters blanks commas etc are allowed and will not be recognized as delimiters The maximal length of the string is 20 characters ADDRESS is only comment and can be shown on the console by the operator command No default value AUTOACT ON OFF Automatically activation of BSC lines Optional parameter The line control will be automatically re activated after an abnormal end occured The reactivation starts not immediately but after a specified delay time see ACTOPTS Autoactivation is suppressed after the operator has stopped the line by a stop command Autoact function works again if the operator starts the line again DIALINTF V25 V25BIS Interface for switched BSC lines with AUTODIAL function This parameter specifies whether the AUTODIAL device e g modem uses V25 or V25bis Interface This parameter must correspond with the EP generation of this line LBLKSIZE 2 400 2000 LSIZE rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Line blocksize for transmission Optional parameter Allowed are values from 400 up to 2000 bytes LINE lineaddress lineaddress 3 characters Name of the line BTAM subchannel address Mandatory parameter Must be the first parameter of each Line Entry LINE is used for Line Entries like SID for Station Entries No default value LINETYPE S LLT J Linetype Optional parameter
254. n indicated by bit KDRMTOPT in field KDBITS2 This group includes KDVOLNRR KDSUNIT KDDEVR KDDISPR and KDBITSR1 If remote options are specified in the sending station and this station is authorized for this see Installation Manual definition of the stations table a resident receive entry in the receiving station will be ignored by rvs 3 Specifications within a resident receive entry indicated by bit KDRESREC in field KDBITS3 This group includes KDDEVTYP KDSUNIT KDVOLNRD KDDISP KDJOBDSN KDJOB KDUSERID KDRUSER and all fields of group 1 Automatic jobstart after receiption of a dataset is indicated by a nonblank field KDJOB If the field KDJOBDSN does not contain the name of a PDS the name of the central rvs jobdataset is valid the central jobdataset is allocated to the rvs Monitor with the ddname RVSJOBS see Installation Manual description of the rvs Start Procedure Fields KDUSERID and KDRUSER contain the values which have been taken from the job TSO session during creation of the resident receive entry These fields may be blank if the resident receive entry had been created in earlier rvs releases than rvs OS Release 3 2 4 User fields KDEXTFLD KDUSER The content of these fields is transmitted from sender to receiver of the file So these fields may be used for communication between exits within sending and receiving station Field KDEXTFLD is used by the SNA and BSC components field KDUSER is used by the
255. n be used to list all keys from the key management Example A JOB KEYLIST EXEC PGM DF054K PARM LIST ALL STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT 1 3 8 Export all keys from the key management to a sequential file The job KEYEXPRT can be used to export all keys from the key management to a sequential file see KEYIMPRT too Example A JOB KEYEXPT EXEC PGM DFO54K PARM EXPT ALL rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KEYPRINT DD DSN P390A KEYPRINT DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR 1 3 9 Import keys from a sequential file to the key management The job KEYIMPRT can be used to import keys from a sequential file to the key management see KEYEXPRT too Example A JOB KEYSIMPT EXEC PGM DFO54K PARM IMPT ALL STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KEYIMPRT DD DSN P390A KEYPRINT DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR 1 3 10 Delete key from the key management The job KEYDELET can be used to delete key s from the key management Example A JOB KEYDEL EXEC PGM DFO54K PARM ADMN STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR 2 SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR KEYPARAM DD
256. n byte 0 and 1 Write return codes may be 0 normal end 4 record not found update 8 record not found read 12 no space new 16 duplicate key caused the message below 20 reserved 64 logical error 68 physical error during VSAM Action terminated the key will not be written into the Key Data data set WRITE xx KEY DUPLICATE KEY The Key Data data set write module detects an error with return code 16 see above The xx may be PU fora public key PR fora private key Action terminated the key will not be written into the Key Data data set rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K DELETE A KEY FROM KEY DATASET Summary message above this message the error reason will be shown READ KEY DIRECT FOR DELETE The Key Data data set write module detects an error during delete processing Action terminated the record will not be deleted READ A KEY DIRECT The Key Data data set write module detects an error during read processing Action terminated KEYDS PROCESSING NO FLAG The Key Data data set read module detects Action terminated CSUTLAP KEY SUCESSFULLY The message finishes the xxxxxxxx action The xxxxxxxx may be ADDED DELETED READ DIRECT Protocol message only CSUTLSP 1 4 l1 52225 CSUTL7P CSUTL7P CSUTL8P CSUTL9I CSUTLAP Protocol message only The space may contain
257. n is needed rvs already knows the station id of the remote station because the identification phase is already complete Each line of the program profile table defines one program profile Lines with a in column 1 are treated as comment The following fields are included within a program profile Name of the program profile alphanumeric free selectable This name is used only for reference to the rvs Stations Table see parameter PROGPROF The names of program profiles must be unique within this table For test purposes the program profile for station sid may be changed within the rvs monitor by entering the command F sid PP prf where prf is the name of another program profile of the profile table see Operations Manual Module name of the line control program The specified module name is only used during activation of a BSC line command A sid or A sid lll see Operations Manual DFO56B00 must be specified for leased lines and and for stations connected via a leased line Additional this value must be specified for e switched lines if at least one of the remote stations using this line has installed rvs DOS Release 2 e remote stations which have installed rvs DOS Release 2 DF055A00 must be specified in all other cases Remark Module DFO55A00 includes support for autodial and password exchange functions module DFO56B00 does not include this support Thus the following restriction shou
258. n iti gate aden E RR atten as 109 Description eee te see pee case 224 ETPUID 5 ce diee e o ehh lea idas 109 General eerstes ie a elt uii qu da 31 55 Saving and Recovery 147 A ani a eia i aai 109 CONVTYP ii is 101 Generations CREDIT i nne cadet oe Er Bac 93 PP aa an 13 15 16 DBID a 84 fOr BS Cuat iaa Bands Mentos ees 13 tava been fod Aelia eaae 52 for FTP 26 DEMIG iaces code iris apela tects 52 for LU 6 2 component esee 25 DF054K sua cesa ie a hdd aes 263 for remote operating function esses 29 DEBOGTA n aec ti 37 for rvsWIN stations nnn 29 rvsMVS Installation Manual Index for SNA 17 MSGID 3 uenenum 57 141 for TCP IP 26 MSGPERM see Tables Dataset MSGPERM for X 25 component sse 19 ODETID tn E 78 94 metet ia 13 14 ODIS 1 ident eee eene meos 57 Logmodetable e 17 78 94 ie boi 22 OPTIONS nde nene tels 79 Switched Major Node 22 2444 424 4 20 OPT Sui te te e eter tois 79 HEDRESET tutto 55 OWNOID iii nee teles 94 How to use EXTERNAL SECURITY 179 180 181 PAD di dia 98 IDENO Riot er aii
259. n one BSC line is used by rvs the exit is loaded for each line after line activation this means the exit checks and controls the identification phases only for one line rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits After loading the exit rvs passes control to the exit first call of exit in order to allow initialization of the exit open processing etc The next calls of the exit are performed in order to check and control the identification phases which are executed on the line If the line line control program is stopped rvs command P Ill or P ALL the exit is given control a last time which may be used for close processing etc Example Use of this exit for identification to DAKS s stations Communication with Daimler Benz Understanding for use The exit can work successfully only if e rvsMVS is calling with automatic dial in this case the partner station of Daimler Benz is known Or e the partner station sends their own identification first If first vsMVS sends the identification slave reaction or no automatic dial is used the exit does not work successfully Working mode The exit changes the identification record X record wich will sent by rvs if e the exit is called before sending own identification exit parameterlist field IXTCNTL bit IXTCBSND is on e Daimler Benz ID of the partner station is known exit parameterlist field IXTDBID is filled e the identification record is kn
260. n the member e Every command must start on column 1 e Blank lines or comment lines are not allowed The rvs Tables Dataset on the installation tape contains an empty START member rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 8 RMOP PF Keys The member PFKEYS of the rvs Tables Dataset may be used to specify default settings of RMOP PF keys Format PFxxbv command xx 02 11 13 24 PF key number b blank v character or S indirect command S direct command command rvs command Example 02 SDS PF14 SDv PF23 x rx2 all rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 9 rvs Procedures and JOBS This chapter contains a description of all procedures or jobs which are necessary or helpful for operation use and maintanance of rvs 6 9 1 rvs Start Procedure The following example of a rvs Start Procedure is contained in member MONITOR of the rvs Tables Dataset on the installation tape PDF0001A PROC PAPER DUMP EXEC PGM DF130B00 MONITOR STEPLIB RVSDUMP MSGID SYSWTO CNTLMSG CNTL START INTRDR STATIONS PROGPROF SESSIONS JOBCARD JOBCARDF STAPEJC RTAPEJC
261. n the program DF119A SFID check receive a file receive SFID start file ld in ODETTE protokoll look for neighbour station which send the file Is user level security allowed and the parameter LILS ES is set for neighbor station Is there a permission to receive the given receive and deliver VDSN to given destination from given originator the file fas before receive and deliver the file to destination with user check retu m KO It isn t allowed receive this file from the originator to destination 9 5 12 Error Codes The following error codes concerning the new feature ULS and the program DFO80A are possible Error code Description 0 Request accepted 24 Check of permission rights failed member missing 28 Matching entry in permission member for given dataset not found 32 Matching entry in member for user RACF not found 40 Used OSID with ULS YES is invalid rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features 9 5 13 ULS Configuration Example 9 5 13 1 Description of Example In the next chapters is described a configuration example of two rvsMVS environments The rvsMVS 1 environment Station RVT own station Station TA2 normal partners station Station TB2 next normal partners station Station TAV Station TAX Station TAY Station TAZ local virtuale station for RVT next local virtuale station for RVT next local virtuale station for RVT next local
262. nabled by license key Station Parameter GZIP Parameter in Result COMPRESS DFO80A00 unspecified unspecified OFTP Compression unspecified GZIP NO OFTP Compression unspecified GZIP YES OFTP Compression with message rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset COMPRESS OFTP unspecified OFTP Compression COMPRESS OFTP GZIP NO OFTP Compression COMPRESS OFTP GZIP YES OFTP Compression with message COMPRESS NO unspecified no Compression COMPRESS NO GZIP NO no Compression COMPRESS NO GZIP YES no Compression with message COMPRESS GZIP unspecified GZIP Compression COMPRESS GZIP GZIP NO OFTP Compression COMPRESS GZIP GZIP YES GZIP Compression Note The GZIP compression is used as end to end file transfer That means compressed files are not influenced by routing station If COMPRESS NO is specified the Compression Feature will be rejected for all send requests to this station If COMPRESS GZIP is specified the OFTP compression procedure will be replaced by the External Compression procedure based on the GZIP rfc1952 algorithm This feature will be called rvs External Compression and works with routing inside of an OFTP network Both end partners with rvs have to select this offline feature 5 1 2 Header version of external Compression Security Feature Since rvsMVS 3 00 the support for files greater than 2
263. name DSNJOBS RVS JOBS dsname PWKD password PWLOG password PWTBL password PWJOBS password X F F X END Significance of the parameters LOADLIB RVS LOADLIB dsname Dataset name of the rvs load library Default LOADLIB RVS LOADLIB DSNKD RVS KD dsname DSNLOG RVS LOG dsname DSNTBL RVS TABLES dsname DSNJOBS RVS JOBS dsname Dataset names of the rvs system files The default values are the same names as used within this manual PWKD password PWLOG password PWTBL password PWJOBS password Remarks If one ore more rvs system datasets shall be password protected these passwords must be specified here No problems will occur if passwords are specified and the datasets are not password protected The Jobs Dataset RVS JOBS is not necessary The reason for this is that any PDS may be used in conjunction with automatic jobstart after reception If the installation of rvs OS release 3 2 replaces an earlier release of rvs including extension of the rvs Control Dataset the specification of the job dataset name is necessary in view of compatibility The source library of the installation tape member JOBRDYN contains the following sample job for call of macro rvsDYN JOB RVSDYN EXEC 5 90 STEPLIB DD DSN SYS1 LINKLIB DISP SHR SYSLIN DD DSN RVS DYN DISP NEW CATLG DELETE UNIT SYSDA SPACE TRK 1 SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSPUNCH DD SYS
264. name function or the use of a special disk volume unit group to store the received dataset If the exit returns control to rvs with returncode 4 or 8 all such specifications done during creation of a resident receive entry in the receiving station or done during creation of the send request by specifying remote options in the sending station will be ignored by RVS Receiving of the dataset will be performed as if e no resident receive entry exists for this dataset and e no remote options have been specified when the dataset was queued for sending in the sending station Instead of these specifications installation dependent default values will be taken If the received dataset contains job control which is to be submitted RJE function rvs will perform this function independent of the exit returncode rvs will suppress this only if the definition of the remote station within the rvs stations table excludes the RJE function see Installation Manual definition of the station table If the exit returns control to rvs with returncode 12 within the receiving section reception of the file will be rejected If the exit returns control to rvs with returncode 12 outside the receiving section rvs will act in the same way as described for returncode 4 rvs will always display a nonzero returncode of exit DFUX001 by writing a message to the console Remarks about the use of different KDRECORD fields Fields of special interest if the exi
265. nd record due to newcome records which match with the search arguments Synonyme of this keyword NRS Layout of the fixed format input columns length description Record type transmission status A B C D transmission direction R S Station Identification Reserved Name of the transmitted partitioned dataset with member name enclosed in parentheses Name of the transmitted dataset Reserved blanks rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix F Reference Utility program DF076A Transmission date and time of day interval expressions Transmission date interval from date yyddd bbddd xxxx bbbbb to date yyddd bbddd bbbbb bbddd bbbdd bbbbd Transmission time of day interval from time hhmm bbbb xxx time hhmm bbbb Blanks if following item is given Transmission date and time yydddhhmmsst Queuing date and time of day interval expressions Queuing date interval from date yyddd bbddd xxxx bbbbb to date yyddd bbddd bbbbb bbddd bbbdd bbbbd Queuing time of day interval from time hhmm bbbb xxx to time hhmm bbbb Blanks if following item is given Queuing date and time yydddhhmmsst Reference number 110 115 Synonyme sequence number Legend Type A alphanumeric left justified padded with blanks N numeric padded with zeros at the left Character left justified Symbols X any character b blank 00 99 day number 001 3
266. ned as a linklist library If symbolic names are used the start procedure of the rvs monitor should also include a SYSTCPD DD statement as used whithin the ip stack configuration No default value TCPIPCHK YES rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Check of incoming remote IP address If incoming IP address does not correspond with IP address in parameter TCPIPADR the transfer of file will be rejected with RC 12 Access Method Error TCPPORT 3305 nn Remote portnumber nn may be a value between O and 32767 The portnumber specifies the application which shall be connected to For applications using the Odette File Transfer Protocol portnumber 3305 is registered by IANA USA TCPSESS 1 nn Maximum number of TCP IP sessions to the remote station nn may be a value between 1 and 99 Default value TCPSESS 1 rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 7 Subset 7 valid for FTP stations definition ACCESMET TP access method FTPERESP end to end response FTPHFILE header File non MVS only 1 host names FTPPASS user id password FTPPORT port number FTPPREF Prefix FTPREFN reference number non MVS only FTPRESP response FTPSESS number of parallel transmissions 1 FTPUID user id TYPE type of stations mandatory parameter Note Additional to thes
267. nent 50 nnn max number of TCP IP sessions TCPPORT xx 3305 nn Local port number for server function TCPLOCADY xx ipaddress Own ip address of local TCP IP stack TCPNAME xx name Name of TCP IP address space TCPPRODJ xx INTERLINK Name of the product of the TCP IP stack to be used TCPSTKID xx name Reference name of the defined TCP IP stack ODID name Odette identification of the own station X25TOT 10 timeout interval for Odette FTP Note If you want to support more than one TCP IP stack you have to extend some of these parameters by an index xx 1 32 All parameters with the same index define one specific TCP IP stack If more than one TCP IP stacks are to be used the parameters TCPNAME and TCPSTKID are mandatory If only one TCP IP stack shall be used all parameters may be coded whithout index In this case index 1 is assigned automatically Additionally parameter TCPSTKID is not mandatory in this case 7 Parameters used only for the FTP component FTPUSE NO YES Indication for the use of the FTP component FTPMAX 50 nnn max number of parallel transmissions FTPPOLTI 60 nnn FTP polling task time interval in seconds FTPPREF name user prefix used for FTP file allocations optional ODID name Odette identification of the own station 8 Parameters used only for the remote operating function RMOPAPPL name Application ID of the local own station Description of r
268. nitor as well as after entering the command MSG REFRESH If there are more than default assignments for the same function only the first assignment will be accepted further assignments are ignored Other definitions within this line will be ignored After definition of the subset name and default assignments the messages of this subset may be defined in the following lines Definition of an empty subset is syntyctically accepted but makes no sense The end of a message subset will be recognized by end of file or by the definition of a new subset The messages itself must be defined generic this means that always the first characters of the message have to be specified Especially each message has to start with the characters DF Modification of the message prefix rvs start parameter MSGID xx does not affect processing of the suppression display functions All messages which match the same specified prefix will be processed suppressed displayed The definition of a message must comprise at least characters e g DF5 the length of the definition is only restricted by the length of a line 80 characters One line may contain several message definitions Message definitions within a line must be separated by one or more blanks If a message definition itself contains blanks it must be enclosed by the characters gt and lt Example rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset AA
269. nly for reference to the rvs Stations Table see parameter SESPROF The names of session profiles must be unique within this table Session profile names starting with character are reserved for rvs internal use Specification for activation of this session The following values are valid within this field blank the session will be activated as defined within the stations table parameter ACTMODE the session will be activated stopped only if the command for activation stopping contains the NIGHT subparameter for example A sid NIGHT This definition may be useful if the SDLC connection between two stations consists of more than one virtual route used for different applications batch transmissions dialog traffic If one or more virtual routes are not used all the time of a day the session may be started with the above mentioned command A sid NIGHT in order to use other virtual routes in addition to the normal batch virtual route s controlled by a separate logmode see description of columns 53 60 Module name of the VTAM I O handler routine DF099A00 must always be specified Module name of the session protocol handler routine Module name for an operator session DF091C00 Module name for a send session DF092C00 Module name for a receive session DFO93C00 Specification of the session type in character format One ore more of the following values may be coded in any sequence rvsM
270. nstallation Tests 7 Running Installation Tests This chapter describes some functions of rvs which should be tested in order to see if these functions are working as described or not In the latter case possible error information has to be analyzed and handling of rvs or a part of the installation must be corrected 7 1 Start of rvs Monitor Procedure PDF00014A Alias MONITOR After installation of rvs the first step of testing should be the start of the rvs monitor procedure PDFO00014 This may be done as job or started task After initialization of internal tables the rvs monitor writes the message DF3001A RVS OC READY to console This message indicates that communication with the rvs monitor may be done by using the reply assigned with the above message Any commands may be entered for the monitor see the rvsMVS Operation Manual for a description of the rvs commands The monitor may be stopped by entering the command P RVS During start of the monitor all rvs startparameters are stored within the rvs control dataset parameter record This parameter record is used for example by the rvs ISPF panels which may be tested after the first start of the monitor Test of switched BSC line s Switched BSC lines should be activated within the monitor by entering the command A III where III denotes the subchannel address of the line If everything is ok message DF5621A A 111 READY TO TRANSMIT or
271. ntered P III stopping the line subchannel if active F sid PP ppp changing the program profile for the line A III activating the line subchannel 2 Restrictions for backup operation rvs is not designed to support transmissions between two installations using BSC and SNA at the same time A restart of an abended transmission is possible only if the restart is done with the same access method BTAM or VTAM which was used when the transmission abended Therefore the command S sid R must be entered on both sides to suppress any restart if the access method for transmissions between both installations is changed from BTAM to VTAM or from VTAM to BTAM 8 2 rvs Trace rvs allows starting a line trace BSC lines a session trace SNA sessions LU62 sessions TCP sessions FTP transmissions or X25 sessions or an internal trace in order to e get further information in fault situations rvsMVS Installation Manual 8 Special Functions Procedures be able to check correct execution of the rvs protocol when connecting non IBM computers to rvs if the VDA File Transfer Protocol or the ODETTE File Transfer Protocol is used For each BSC line resp each SNA LU62 TCP FTP or X25 session a trace can be started command T see rvsMVS Operation Manual for more details The rvs trace displays data which are available at the application program interface of the different access methods The trace point is included in
272. o tape DEMIG ALLOC HSM Specification how demigration is to be done DEMIG ALLOC specifies that a migrated dataset is to be demigrated during allocation processing The allocation routine will return control to rvs only after demigration of the file is complete DEMIG HSM specifies that rvs sends a demigration request to HSM The transmission will then be cancelled by rvs a send request will be set into a temporary HOLD status see HLDRESET parameter DEMIG HSM should be specified if demigration processing takes longer times In these situations rvs is not forced to wait until demigration is complete Note that waiting for demigration processing whithin dynamic allocation implies that parallel allocation requests will also wait until demigration is complete so parallel transmissions are impossible during this time rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset DQPERM YES NO Specification whether message DF49011 display of all files which are still to be sent DQ command is to be displayed as a highlighted permanent message DQPERM YES or not If DQPERM YES is specified message DF49011 is changed whenever the send queue changes this means message DF49011 always displays the actual values If a change within the send queue is detected all messages DF4901I will be deleted and new ones will be displayed This function uses the DOM macro thus MVS SP 2 2 0 or a later MVS release is required for this because I
273. obdataset PDS failed rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 4 It is not possible to display the reason for the failing automatic jobstart within this function processing of the rvs start parameter JFP YES The reason for failing automatic jobstart must be obtained from the rvs error message which is displayed on console hardcopy at the time when the jobstart failed rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 11 Code Translation The member TRNTABLE of the rvs Tables Dataset be used to perform code translation during file transmission This member contains code translation tables that are used when the parameter CODETRNS see User Manual Benutzerhandbuch for send requests or resident receive entries is coded For using the member TRNTABLE of tables data Set it is necessary to insert a DD statement named TRNTABLE into your rvs Start Procedure to make this member well known to rvs The following list is one example of a code translation table for EBCDIC to ANSI code translation The table is preceded by it s name and must consist of 16 lines with 32 characters Each character stands for one halfbyte in hexadecimal notation Always two halfbytes are used to replace an respective byte in the dataset TABNAME E2ANSI 20202020202020202020202020202020 00 0F 20202020202020202020202020202020 10 1F 20202020202020202020202020202020 20 2F 20202020202020202020202020202
274. oding of exit DFUX003 This exit must be coded reusable or reentrant The exit must restore the contents of registers 2 18 when returning control to the calling rvs program The exit should not modify e any field of the current record of the rvs Control Dataset KDRECORD e length field of the message buffer 5 Identification User Exit This exit may be used to check modify and control the identification phase which is executed on switched BSC lines after establishing of the line connection dialing This exit is called by the rvs monitor if the start parameter IDEXIT name has been specified see chapter 6 1 where name denotes the load name of the exit The exit is executed in following cases e Immediately before sending of the own identification to the remote station e After receiption of the identification from the remote station If the exit is given control rvs has already checked validity of the received station identification An example for using this exit is to change the SID in the identification phase which fact is given in case of transmission with the Daten Austausch Kommunikations System DAKS of Daimler Benz in Germany For an example look at the end of this appendix Restrictions The exit will be executed only within the line control program DF055A00 this means that the line entry within the rvs stations table must specify a program profile which contains the module name DF055A00 in
275. of dataset RVS TABLES Batch Job RVS TABLES STATJOB A JOB KKH KKK KK HK HK HK KKK ARK KKK KKK KKK KKK ARK ARK ARK AA RVS STATISTICS xk STATION ACTIVITY REQUIRED PARAMETERS DAY MONTH YEAR 2 NUMERICS EACH IF MONTHLY CALCULATION REQUIRED SET DAY 00 OPTIONAL PARAMETER i GROUP SELECTION OF A CERTAIN GROUP OF STATIONS IS POSSIBLE IF DATASET RVS GROUPS IS ALLOCATED IF DATASET RVS GROUPS IS NOT ALLOCATED SET GROUP ALL ALL STATIONS OR GROUP sid STATION IDENTIFICATION OF A SINGLE STATION BRK KKK KK HK KKK e e HK HK KKK e ke ee he je e e ke He e he hee e e ee he He He e e eee je ke He ke eee je ke ARK A STATJOBA EXEC PGM DF552A PARM DAY MON GROUP STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSIN DD DSN RVS TPSTAT DISP SHR GROUPS DD DSN RVS GROUPS DISP SHR SYSOUT DD DSN RVS ZW1 DISP NEW CATLG DELETE UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 1 1 RLSE SORT EXEC PGM SORT SORTIN DD DSN RVS ZW1 DISP OLD DELETE SORTOUT DD DSN RVS ZW2 DISP NEW CATLG DELETE UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 1 1 RLSE SYSIN DD SORT FIELDS 1 5 CH A SORTWKO1 DD UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 1 SORTWKO2 DD UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 1 SORTWKO3 DD UNIT SYSDA SPACE CYL 1 SYSOUT DD SYSOUT STATJOBB EXEC PGM DF551A STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSUT1 DD DSN
276. of the logdataset will be created Only the currently used data area of the logdataset will be marked in this file Specification of this parameter may be useful to reduce the time used for the backup copy of the controldataset No other access to the controldataset may be done within this time RESERVE The default behavior of DF072A00 is exclusive control RESERVE It can be changed to NORESERVE by parameter PARM NORESERVE in the exec statement of PDF0014A A backup copy of the logdataset for example used for statistics may be obtained after execution of program DF072A00 This copy does not require exclusive control RESERVE this means updates of the controldataset may be done even if the backup copy of the logdataset is created For this copy the following jobstep may be used LOGSAVE EXEC PGM DF084A00 SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT RVSLOG DD DSN RVS LOG DISP SHR LOGSAVE DD DSN RVS LOGSAVE TEMP DISP Note1 If a copy of the logdataset is not used execution of this jobstep may be skipped The copy of the logfile is not used for the recovery of the controldataset Note2 If a copy of the logdataset shall be used for statistics make sure that the execution of this job is not delayed too much Depending on the size of the logdataset and the number of updates of the controldataset the data of the logdataset to be copied may be overwritten by new data Procedure for recovery of rvs Controldataset PDF0015
277. of this closed user group For more information above facility fields contact your national telecommunication and network provider X25PSIZE nn 4 128 256 512 3 To support more than one X 25 numbers for one partner station nn specifies the partner number index If there is no index defined the parameter will be used for all X 25 numbers within this station table entry rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset LPSIZE nn nn 1 99 Optional parameter Do not specify it for general use The start parameter PSIZE is taken as default X 25 packet size sent in call request packet With this parameter it is possible to negotiate the flow control parameter packet size with the remote station The value may not exceed the value of the start parameter PSIZE X25SESS nn zss ss 1 64 nn 1 99 Maximum number of parallel sessions to the remote station Local and remote station should specify the same value for this parameter Default value X25SESS 1 X25WSIZE nn 1 b 2 7 WSIZE nn 1 nn 1 99 5 Optional parameter If not specified the start parameter WSIZE is taken X 25 window size sent in call request packet With this parameter it is possible to negotiate the flow control parameter window size with the remote station E g Start parameter WSIZE is 7 but a remote station may only use a value of 2 In this case specify X25SIZE 2 for this station To suppor
278. ogdataset The rvs log dataset RVS LOG is a formatted sequential dataset BDAM All updates of the Controldataset will be logged within this file The only reason for introduction of this file is the following The content of the Controldataset changes with every transmission thus the requirements for a restore of this file in case of a catalog failure or disk error are different from those for other datasets The Logdataset allows to reconstruct a damaged Controldataset without loss of any information at any time A more detailed description may be found in chapter 6 9 4 section Saving and Recovery of the rvs Controldataset 4 4 rvs Tables Dataset The Tables Dataset RVS TABLES is organized as a PDS Its members contain different information e control information and tables which is used for operation of rvs e JCL and procedures which are used for maintanance and operation of rvs e other optional information for example CLISTS which may be used for rvs Statistics see Appendix D Look for further information chapter 0 6 10 and 6 11 too 4 5 rvs Key Data data set The rvsMVS Key data dataset RVS KEY DS is organized as a VSAM KSDS rvsMVS Installation Manual 4 rvs System Files It is a necessary data set if the rvs installation want to use the Security Feature All private and public keys you want to use in a rvs installation have to store in the Key Data dataset This data set is the central information data b
279. ogdataset is marked empty again PDF00144 e damaged controldataset can be recovered without loss of any information if the following steps are performed deleting the damaged file creation of a new controldataset of the last controldataset backup to the new file merging of the logdataset content since last backup copy of control and logdataset into the new file The following two procedures are used for realization of the above described concept They are content of the installation tape members PDF0014A and PDF0015A use PDF0015B in case of SMS of the rvs Tables Dataset PDF0014A PROC PAPIER NOSAVE 00 PDFO014A e oe ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce ce e ce ce ce ce ce ce ce RRR ce ce ce e KKK AAA AAA AAA A ARA KKK BACKUP OF rvs CONTROLDATASET AND LOG FILE amp RESET OF LOG FILE USE IT IN CASE OF LOG FILE IS FULL JOB CAN RUN WITHOUT STOPPING THE MONITOR OR CONTROL DATASET MUST BE RECOVERED IF IT IS DAMAGED CONTROL DATASET MUST BE RE ORGANIZED IF IT IS FULL MONITOR MUST BE STOPPED PDF0015A hee ek e He e he hee ke HK HK KI KK HK KKK KKK KKK KKK e He ec ehe hee e e eee je ke ee SDF014A EXEC PGM DF072A00 PARM NOSAVE amp NOSAVE STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT amp PAPIER KD DD DSN RVS KD DISP SHR KDSAVE DD DSN RVS KD SAVE DISP SHR RVSLOG DD DSN RVS LOG DISP SHR LOGSAVE DD DSN RVS LOG SAVE DISP
280. om the remote station slave or initiator IXTLDMOR 1 the local station sends the own id after receiving the id from the remote station master or responder IXTNIDEX 1 the local station does not send the own id to the remote station no id exchange only receiption of the remote id IXTX4914 1 the format of the identification record address at offset 4 within this list is as follows the first two bytes contain the characterstring X followed by a variable number of 10 byte fields containing left justified a station identification blanks for communication with DAKS Daimler Benz the second of these 10 byte fields is used IXTIDAVL 1 information id of the remote station is available XXXX X reserved rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits IXTRSVD1 reserved IXTRSVD2 reserved IXTIDREC address of the identification record zero if no record is available IXTIDRLN length of the identification record binary IXTRSVD3 reserved IXTRVSID address of a 3 byte field containing the remote station id as specified within the rvs stations table parameter SID this address is valid only if bit 1 value X 40 at offset 1 within this list is set to 1 IXTDNUM address of a 20 byte field containing the dial number for the remote station as specified within the rvs stations table parameter DIALNUM this address is set to zero if no dialnumber is specified or availab
281. on of the Tables Dataset SYSUT1 DD DISP OLD DELETE KEEP DSN IHHHHHHHBHEHEHEHEBUE SYSUT2 SYSOUT In this case rvs will generate and submit a job consisting of the modified content of members JOBCARD or JOBCARDS if available and member SYSOUTJC rvs will modify all fields containing characters The lines containing these characters should not be modified Other parameters for example UNIT should be adapted to the corresponding installation Member FTPRVSJC of the rvs Tables Dataset This member contains the following JCL statements which are used for FTP file transmission rvsFTP component only MAIN SYSTEM XY11 RVSFTP1 EXEC PGM FTP STEPLIB DD DSN SYS1 LINKLIB DISP SHR SYSUDUMP DD SYSOUT SYSDUMP DD SYSOUT INPUT DD DISP SHR DSN HHHHHH OUTPUT DD DISP OLD DSN RARA SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT RVSFTP2 EXEC PGM IEBPTPCH SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSUT1 DD DSN RVSFTP1 OUTPUT DISP OLD SYSUT2 DD SYSOUT PRINT MAXFLDS 1 RECORD FIELD 80 RVSFTP3 EXEC PGM IEFBR14 NEW DD DISP NEW CATLG CATLG DCB RVSFTP1 INPUT SPACE TRK 1 DSN In this case rvs will generate and submit a job consisting of the modified content of members JOBCARDF if available and member FTPRVSJC rvs will modify all fields containing characters The lines containing these characters should not be modifie
282. on parameters rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Conditions for encoding the parameters The parameters are coded with keywords They are separated by commas or blanks Each line can be used from column 1 to 72 A continuation character is not necessary A comment line has to be signed by a in the first column The first parameter of each Station Entry must be SID All other parameters may be coded in any sequence The first parameter of each Line Entry must be LINE All other allowed parameters can appear in any sequence Starting with rvsMVS 1 2 10 the following additional rules are valid for encoding of parameters comment within a line all characters inside a line behind a character will be interpreted as a comment This implies that none of the specified parameter values should include the character continuation lines some parameters consist of a list of single values separated by comma This value list must be enclosed by apostrophs or parenthesises Now this value list may be coded on different up to 16 lines Note that only parenthesis may be used for nested structures Apostrophs may only be used to delimit strings which do not include any other apostrophs If a parameter shall be coded on different lines the keyword and the left delimiter of the parameter value apostroph or parenthesis must be coded within one line rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the T
283. one of the following error reasons KEY VALUE NO DDNAME DEFAULT USED Indication that the default DDNAME will be used SID KEYID DDNAME XXXXXXXX DSN Protocol message only The input parameter value will be written to the output KEY DATASET SUCESSFULLY UPDATED Summary message Protocol message only PROCESSING OF KEY MANAGEMENT ENDED kkk The message occurs during end processing Protocol message only Protocol message only The space may contain one of the following error or information reasons DELETE FUNCTION NO KEY S FOUND During the execution of the Key delete function was no found keys for delete rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix I Key Data Utility Program DF054K kKkKKKKKKKK PUBLIC KEY X XXX K Summary message Protocol message only PUBLIC KEY NOT FOUND x During the execution of the Key function was no public key found kkKKKKKKK PRIVATE KEY XXX X Summary message Protocol message only PRIVATE KEY NOT FOUND During the execution of the Key function was no private key found CSUTLBI PROCESSING OF LIST MANAGEMENT STARTED The message occurs during list function start processing Protocol message only CSUTLCI PROCESSING OF LIST MANAGEMENT ENDED The message occurs during list function end processing Protocol message only CSUTLDI CSERUTIL KEY MANAGEMENT PROGRAMM The message occurs during star
284. or an extended rvs Start Procedure The following JCL is an example how the procedures PDF0009A and PDF0014A be executed in conjunction with the rvs Startprocedure PDF0001A This example ist designed for JES3 environment and uses condition codes A JOB J RRR eee ee HK HK KKK KK HK KKK KH HK IKK KKK KKK e ehe hee ARK AAA AAA TEST IF RVS KDSAVE TEMP IS STILL EXISTING J 8 e KKK KK HK HK HK KKK KKH KKK e e HK HK IKK ke e e He he hee e e ehe hehe e e e He eje ee e e ee eee e TEST EXEC PGM IDCAMS SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSIN DD LISTC ENTRY RVS KDSAVE TEMP kk khe IKI He e KK KK KK RARA ARRE IK IKI RR RRA ARA RARA RAR RARA RAR BACKUP COPY OF CONTROL AND LOG DATASET ARK KKK KKK ARK KKK KKK eee jeje ARK AAA KKK KKK SAVE EXEC PGM DF072A00 PARM RESERVE NOSAVE 30 COND 0 EQ TEST STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT DSN RVS KD DISP SHR RVSLOG DD DSN RVS LOG DISP SHR KDSAVE DD DSN RVS KDSAVE TEMP UNIT SYSDA DISP NEW CATLG DELETE SPACE CYL 1 1 LOGSAVE DD DSN RVS LOGSAVE TEMP DISP SHR DCB LRECL 1000 BLKSIZE 20000 RECFM FB J RRR KK KKK KK HK HK KKK KK HK KKK ARK e He e He e He e eee hee ARK AAA AAA DELETE RVS KDSAVE TEMP 8 e e KKK e e HK HK KKK KK HK KKK KK HK IKK KH KKK KKK KKK KKK ARK KKK KK KKK KK KK DELETE EXEC PGM IDCAMS COND 0 EQ TEST 4 NE SAVE SYSPRINT DD S
285. or the output otherwise the result is unpredictable GENPARM is the rvs general parameter area when it is available SYSTDCB is an area which contains an opened DCB for SYSOUT dataset Note e One or more call parameters may be omitted but if OUTPARM is defined INPARM must also be defined e Two or more call parameters are applicable only at a call from another application program Further the program is callable from the command processor TSO XCALL CALL DF076A Process The input output and formats are determined If the search arguments are read from a dataset it is opened If the output is written to a dataset it is opened An effort is made to access the rvs SYSWTO dataset or alternatively to open dataset SYSOUT The input is read and analyzed one set of search arguments at a time If the input is a dataset both formats keyword and fixed may be mixed provided that the record length is sufficient The Control Dataset is searched for records to satisfy the given search arguments using a key which is built as far as possible of the given information The rest of the search arguments are matched by the program code If no meaningful key can be built from the search arguments the search is made with sequential read through the dataset The result is presented to the caller and the return code is set rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix F Reference Utility program DF076A Output The output from the prog
286. ormed more than one time This means deleting of records will only be done if this procedure has not been executed within the last mm days Default value INTV 0 INTRPT YES This parameter allows interrupt processing Execution of this program will be interrupted every 2 seconds followed by a wait time of 7 seconds This kind of processing avoids long time periods in which the controldataset is in exclusive rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset control of only one job Default value INTRPT NO Remark The rvs Controldataset will be allocated dynamically if this procedure is executed The used ddname is KD 6 9 4 Saving and Recovery of the rvs Controldataset The rvs controldataset is the central information file within rvs The content of this file changes with every transmission thus the requirements for a restore of this file in case of a catalog failure or disk error are different from those for other datasets rvs has its own method to reconstruct a damaged controldataset without loss f any information at any time The concept for this is as follows e All modifications of the rvs controldataset are recorded within the rvs logdataset If this logdataset is full any update of the controldataset is terminated by a user abend e At certain times depending on the number of transmissions and the size of the logdataset a copy of control and logdataset must be done Together with this copy the L
287. oved If output goes to a dataset the records may be truncated to the record length of the output file KW The output is written in keyword format records which are edited from the accessed rvs Control Dataset records The data length of the records is 80 bytes This parameter may be given only in call parameter input STATUS status Status of transmission 1 character optional The status of the transmissions to be queried The value is a single nonblank character according to the list below This parameter must be given if TYPE is not defined but is exclusive with TYPE rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix F Reference Utility program DF076A Valid values S Dataset s sent successfully completed or not R Dataset s received successfully completed or not D Dataset s due to be sent or received NOTE This parameter is applicable only in keyword format input record This parameter may also be expressed by TYPE S or TYPE R or TYPE D e e Synonyme of this keyword is ST TYPE type Type of the record 2 characters optional The record type of the control dataset records to be queried The value is one two characters long code according to the list below Also a list of max twelve codes enclosed in parentheses and separated with commas may be given This parameter must be given if STATUS is not defined but is is exclusive with STATUS AS Active still due to be sent AR Active still due to be received AN A
288. own exit parameterlist field IXTIDREC is filled This identification record must be 22 bytes long at least exit parameterlist field IXTIDRLN and is in conformity with the VDA Empfehlung 4914 exit parameterlist field 4914 e the ID table of the exit contains the Daimler Benz ID in the left part exit table field IDTAB If all these four conditions are fulfilled the right part value of the table replaces the value of the STATION parameter rvs tables dataset member CNTL STATION sid dbid For example The DB ID addressed by the field IXTDBID has the value 01234567899 In this case rvs sends the value 099911590 in the X record Hints for installation e can use the exit after modification of the table field IDTAB Note the right side of the table contains the ID s which rvs is used for identification in the partner station the left side of the table contains this ID s which the partner station s are used for identification to rvs e you must declare for rvs the use of the exit in the start parameter rvs Tables dataset member CNIL parameter IDEXIT loadname e the exit is used by the line control program DF055A00 only check the rvs Program Profile Table col 5 12 rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits Example for coding the IDEXIT An example of the IDEXIT is found on the rvsMVS installation tape in the rvs source library 2 file member IDEXIT Please refer to this
289. ox Chapters 6 1 1 and 6 2 11 show examples for mixed definitions of X 25 and ISDN network rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit 3 4 Definitions for the SNA LU6 2 component of rvs This section describes VTAM definitions that are necessary for an SNA LU6 2 connection between local and remote rvs installations The following requirements must be satisfied in order to establish an LU6 2 connection with a remote rvs installation e The local rvs installation must include the SNA LU6 2 component e The remote installation must include an rvs LU6 2 component e Local and remote computers must be connected via SNA network VTAM definitions for the local rvs installation The local rvs installation must be defined as a separate VTAM application independent LU VBUILD TYPE APPL RVSL APPL AUTH ACQ PARSESS YES VPACING 7 MODETAB LU62MODT APPC YES Remark The name of the APPL statement here RVSL must be the same as specified for the rvs Startparameter LU62APPL see chapter 6 1 A special logmode must be defined for the LU6 2 component kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk LOGMLU62 RVS LU 6 2 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk MODEENT LOGMODE LOGMLU62 COS BATCH TYPE X 00 FMPROF X 13 TSPROF X 07 PRIPROT X B0 SECPROT X B0 COMPROT X DOB1 RUSIZES X 8686 PSERVIC X 060200000000000
290. parameter without Index extension is valid for all defined X 25 multi cannel links in your rvs Monitor X25GROUP groupid n m groupid max 8 characters n m list of CTCP numbers which should be comprised in this group This parameter is used to define an X 25 group to comprise several X 25 multi channel links Use this parameter another time to define more than one X 25 group It is possible to use the same CTCP number in various groups The groupid may be referred to by partner stations table entries in parameter X25NUM See also chapter 6 2 4 of this manual X25TOT 10 nn rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset This parameter is used only components which use the ODETTE FTP It specifies the timeout interval in minutes which is used by the ODETTE file transfer protocol to control time out situations nn may be a value between 1 and 255 X25USE YES NO This parameter is used only for the X25 component It indicates that this component is to be used by rvs In this case during start of the monitor rvs will check if the other parameters related to the X 25 component are completely specified or if default values are available If one ore more of these parameters are not specified and if no defaults are available the X25 component cannot be used A list of all parameters for the X25 component may be found at the beginning of this section XAPPLID xx name This parameter is used only
291. pdates of the rvs Control Dataset may be rejected e transmissions of datasets to be sent may be rejected e specfications which have been made to control receiption of a dataset may be suppressed e reception of a file may be rejected Interface description of exit DFUX001 If the exit is entered register 13 points to a 72 byte savearea register 14 contains the return address and register 1 points to a fullword which contains the address of a parameter list with the following fields offset dec characterstring RVSEXT01 eye catcher caller flags bitstring request for update of Control Dataset by operator rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits for example rvs command l sid request for update of Control Dataset by user batchjob or tso user 1 request for update of Control Dataset by rvs Monitor should never be rejected by the exit type of update flags bitstring 1 request for insert a new record 1 request for update of a record l request to delete a record environment flags bitstring exit is called to check access to the Control Dataset exit is called to check authorization for sending receiving files immediately at start of transmission If this bit is on the bytes at offset 8 and 9 are set to binary zeros reserved address of key of old kdrecord only if bit 2 at offset 9 is set on 20 and update of record key is required else set to z
292. printed on the protocol see below The second one is used to allocate the SYSOUT protocol output file itself These two DD statements build a pair with the DD names MSGIDnn and SYSWTOnn where nn is a number between 01 and 09 or blank The value of nn must be the same within one pair of DD names Remark If you want to look to SYSWTOnn protocols during the run of the rvs monitor please use a pre allocated not empty file within the DD statement and allocate it with DISPZSHR As soon as the records have been written onto disk it is possible to look at them e g with ISPF BROWSE rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 2 The member of the rvs tables dataset which is allocated with DD name MSGIDnn to the rvs monitor must be created The layout of this member is as follows The first line columns 1 6 left justified may contain one of the values ONLY Only the messages with the following message identifiers will be printed to the protocol EXCEPT All messages except the messages with the following identifiers will be printed to the protocol If none of the above values is specified EXCEPT will be assumed In the first line between columns 8 and 72 and in the following lines of the member between columns 1 and 72 rvs message identifiers first 6 characters may be coded separated by at least one blank The following example of a message selection member is contained in member MSGID of th
293. protocol used if the remote station has installed rvs RPG CC Same as C 6 but transmissions are performed in a blocked transmission mode see rvs Interface Description protocol VW FTP B1 1 Same as C C additional the restart function is included see rvs Interface Description protocol VW FTP B2 1 rvs internal protocol used if the remote station has installed rvs DOS Rel 3 File Transfer Protocol as described in recommendation 4914 of VDA Verband der Automobilindustrie e V rvs RJE procedure see rvs Interface Description protocol VW FTP B3 0 This protocol is quite similar but not identcally with the 2780 procedure Indication that all components functions of the protocol are specified in columns 73 76 of the program profile see below The rvs standard procedure with restart see rvs Interface Description protocol VW FTP B2 0 must be specified in this way in this case columns 73 76 must contain the value C E060 Restrictions If communication with rvs DOS is defined and the local station is defined as a slave station the value C 1 must be specified in column 72 see below rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix rvsMVS Tables The rvs RJE protocol value is supported only in conjunction with the definition of the local station as a master station see below Only for development and test This field must contain the constant value C 00 Specification for line and SMF recor
294. pter 5 1 a valid license with security code C D and a information with your partners about permitted users and users rvs permitted dataset names Set for each neighbour station to which ULS shall be applied the chapter 6 2 0 parameter ULS YES MA define local virtual stations for all local users who are able to use chapter 6 2 10 ULS Define all local virtual stations which represent the users at the chapter 6 2 8 neighbour station as stations that are reachable by routing via neighbour station rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features Create new PDS for user and permission information chapter 9 5 7 Define permissions for each neighbour for both directions send receive in the member SN and RN Add new DD statement for PTABLES in Monitor Jobstart JCL chapter 6 9 1 MR Add new DD statement for PTABLES in DF080A JCL Programm chapter 9 5 9 Now the rvsMVS user is available to send data lice Create a send request see USER Manual All remaining steps will be done by rvsMVS automatically 9 5 3 Install and configure rvsMVS as normal rvsMVS Install rvsMVS which is described in the Installation Manual 9 5 4 Add new licence key with Components C D E You need a license key with the new components C D 9 5 5 Exchange information with your partner stations Exchange information with your partners about permitted users and permitted dataset na
295. queried transmission s The format and the rules are analog to the ones of QDATE If this keyword is given TTM or TDAY must be omitted in the same set of search arguments rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix F Reference Utility program DF076A TDAYzdate nrofdays Transmit date s optional TDAY date nrofdays TDAY nrofdays One date and a number of days to limit the transmit time interval in days of the queried transmission s The format and the rules are analog to the ones of QDAY If this keyword is given TTM or TDATE must be omitted Keyword DAY is a synonyme to TDAY TTIME time1 time2 Transmit time s of day optional TTIME time2 1 TTIME hh mm One or two times of day to limit the transmit time frame of the queried transmission s The format and the rules are analog to the ones of QTIME If this keyword is given TTM must be omitted in the same set of search arguments Synonyme to this keyword is TTOD NRSYN number Synonyme order number six numeric characters optional The number of the expected record in key sequence when the search arguments give a multiple result This parameter may be used to access other than the first record to satisfy the search arguments which are not possible or wanted to make unique Default 000001 This parameter is ignored in dataset output Note When the search is done with parameter NRSYN the result may yet be the previous or even an earlier fou
296. r SFX1CMD EQU X 42 character SFX1VER DS G Version Number SFXIVER1 EQU X631 Version 1 SFX1UNRF DS CL2 RECFM of unloaded PDS DCBRECFM format SFX1UNLR DS CL5 LRECL SFX1UNLB DS CL5 BLKSIZE SFXIPDSF DS CL2 RECFM of PDS DCBRECFM format SFXIPDSL DS CLh5 LRECL SFX1PDSB DS CL5 BLKSIZE SFXIPDSD DS CL5 number of Directory Blocks SFXIRVS DS CL33 reserved initialized with 7207 9 3 External Compression External Compression Feature consists of a program which works along the GZIP algorithm rfc 1952 Data sets will be reduced in best cases until 30 percent only in the case of very small files the added process information will expand the user data set size Because of this feature is not free of charge it is necessary for using External Compression to install a new rvsMVS license key There are no additional installation steps to the well known rvsMVS installation to use this feature Only the parameter COMPRESS EXT has to inserted into the STATION entry to inform about the partner capability Please refer to chapter 6 1 and 6 2 9 3 1 2 Steps to Prepare the Use of External Compress Feature The following chapter gives a short description of How to prepare What to do Help is where REGE Install rvsMVS chapter 5 1 1 Geta valid license with security code Z 2 Addthe parameter COMPRESS GZIP to partner s station entry chapter 6 2 0 Now the rvsMVS user is available to
297. r Protocol e X25 using the X25 network via XOT This component works with the ODETTE File Transfer Protocol e TCP IP This component works with the ODETTE File Transfer Protocol e FTP using the TCP IP network This component allows transmissions to from any FTP servers clients There are different conditions for distribution of the different components of rvs rvs works as a monitor system in a separate MVS address space independent of other products subsystems like CICS IMS TSO JES2 or JES3 The way how datasets are transmitted or received and a set of additional monitor functions like e automatic jobstart after transmission of a certain dataset e automatic dial function for BSC lines X 25 LU 6 2 and TCP IP connections e automatic activation of BSC lines and or SNA sessions if for some reason one or more of these lines sessions have become inactive allow operation of rvs with a minimum of manual activities A remote operating function allows to control and operate from any 3270 screen The rvs monitor normally runs for the duration of one or more days it is not necessary to stop the monitor before or after transmissions have been executed The rvs monitor is designed to operate with any number of BSC lines SNA LU 0 and LU 6 2 TCP IP and X25 connections switched virtual circuits There is no restriction in view of the number of file transmissions which can be executed parallel at the same time Alloca
298. r START is optional it may be omitted An example for an extended Start Procedure is contained in Appendix E of this manual 6 9 2 Overview on rvs Transmissions 6 9 2 1 PDF0002A obsolete PDFO0002A is not supported anymore You can use DF078B as a replacement see 6 9 2 1 The following example of a Procedure for display of executed transmissions is contained in member PDF0002A of the rvs Tables Dataset on the installation tape PDF0002A PROC PAPIER TAG DSN ORT SID ZZ 60 LVL L1 DAY PDFO0002A kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk OVERVIEW ON rvs TRANSMISSIONS RRR RR KKK e He e ek e He e He e e KH HK KKK KK He de He he He e ke He He He he He ARK He He e He e He e He e He e ke He e KKK ke Ke SDF078A EXEC PGM DF078A00 PARM DSN amp DSN SID amp ORT amp SID TAG amp TAG amp DAY ZZ amp ZZ LVL amp LVL STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSOUT DD DUMMY SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT amp PAPIER KD DD DSN dsname DISP SHR RVSLOG DD DSN dsname DISP SHR TABLES DD DSN dsname DISP SHR STATIONS DD DSN dsname DISP SHR A detailed description of this procedure may be found in rvsMVS User Manual rvsMVS Benutzerhandbuch 6 9 2 2 DF078B The following example of a JCL for display of executed transmissions is contained in member DF078B of the rvs Jobs Dataset rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset A JOB STEP FOR DELETING
299. r is used only for the X25 component It specifies the name of the logical unit which is used to establish a controlsession between rvs application as specified within the XAPPLID parameter and the NPSI name must be the same name as specified for parameter LUNAME of macro X25MCH during NPSI generation To support more than one X 25 multi channel links you have to define this parameter for each X 25 multi channel CTCP XNUMBER xx number This parameter is used only for the X25 component lt specifies the calling number of the local X 25 multichannel link This number is used when outgoing calls are initiated by rvs To support more than one X 25 multi channel links you have to define this parameter for each X 25 multi channel CTCP rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset XNUMCHCK xx YES NO This parameter is used only for the X25 component It indicates whether a received X25 number is to be checked with the number specified within the stations table parameter X25NUM in case of an incoming call from a certain station XNUMCHCK YES or not If XNUMCHCK YES is specified and the x25 number received from a certain station by an incoming call does not match the number which is specified for this station within the rvs stations table activation of the session will be rejected this means the received ODETTE data unit SSID will be responded by an ESID data unit end of session with reason code 0
300. ral and self explanatory form of dates dd mm yy is allowed Two given dates must be separated by a dash and be both in either day number or natural format year 2 digits ddd day number within the year 3 digits mm month 2 digits dd day within the month 2 digits In explicitely given date definitions the given date1 must not be later than the given date2 The given date2 may be omitted and will then be defaulted equal to the date1 rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix F Reference Utility program DF076A If in ddd format the given day number is greater than the current machine day number the year is defaulted to the previous one Examples current machine date is 94 138 that is 18 05 94 expression equals to interval QDATE 065 06 03 94 06 03 94 QDATE 140 365 20 05 93 31 12 93 QDATE 139 108 19 05 93 18 05 94 QDATE 94 110 365 20 05 94 31 12 94 If there is an asterisk in place of date1 the dates are defaulted to the current machine date If the asterisk is followed by a minus sign nrofdays number of days one to three digits the date1 is replaced by the date given number of days before the current machine date Examples current machine date is 94 108 that is 18 05 94 expression equals to interval QDATE 18 05 94 18 05 94 QDATE 3 15 05 94 18 05 94 QDATE 240 11 08 93 18 05 94 If this keyword is given QTM or QDAY must be omitted in the same set of
301. ram is written either to the output parameter area if it is provided or to the output dataset If the output is written to the output parameter area it is the caller s responsibility to define the length of the area sufficient to contain the output record The error and informational messages are written preferably to the SYSWTO dataset amongst the other similar messages If it is not possible the output is written to SYSOUT or output dataset If there is a parameter area for SYSOUT dataset DCB the dataset should be opened If the parameter area is not provided an attempt is made to open the SYSOUT as well In either way the error and informational messages are written to this dataset If the output is written to a dataset in keyword format and no SYSOUT dataset is available the messages are written to the output dataset If no access to SYSOUT dataset is possible and the output is not written in keyword format the writing of error and informational messages is suppressed If OUTPARM is defined the input is expected from INPARM as well If the output datasets are allocated as new and DCB information is not complete the program makes following defaultings For output dataset in keyword format LRECL 80 BLKSIZE 80 and RECFM FBA fixed format LRECL 512 BLKSIZE 7680 and RECFM FB KD record format LRECL 590 BLKSIZE 6490 and RECFM FB For SYSOUT dataset LRECL 80 BLKSIZE 80 RECFM FBA and MACRF PL For both output datasets DSORG PS
302. rase option from the initial panel You may want to change any panel in your own way just by altering the panel members in the appropriate manner In most cases you do not have to change the clists too So it is quite easy to adjust the layout and the functional restrictions of rvs to your requirements E g an option 1 4 for browsing an user s manual may be supplied for each rvs user For this you have to create the dataset according to the job for creating additional manuals The rvs panels may be used by every TSO user the panels are explained in detail in the User Manual However there are two restricted functions deletion of existing send requests and deletion of resident receive entries These functions are executed only if the TSO user who requires the deletion has created the record s to be processed Significant for this comparison is the TSO userid or jobname if a record has been created by a batch job In order to avoid too much restrictions it is possible to suppress this restriction for certain TSO users significance TSO userid This can be done in the following way Execute the RVS command and select option A in the entry menue After entering of option A the following screen appears Option A is not displayed in the panel kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk DEAOOPOO ke ce e e KR e e ke e e KR RRA RVS ADD OR CHANGE AUTHORIZATIONS OF RV
303. received SSID buffer 2 fullword address of the stations table entry for the remote station 3 fullword return code of module DFOO6A standard numcheck 4 fullword address of the X 25 number as defined for the remote station within the stations table 5 fullword address of the X 25 number obtained out of the received X 25 call request packet This exit may return two values to the calling program e return code returned in register 15 a nonzero return code will cause termination of the connection e a changed return code of DFOO6A returned in register 1 If the connection shall be established both returncodes must be zero otherwhise the connection request will be rejected If the connection is to be rejected rvs sends the OFTP protocol unit End Of Session Id ESID with reason code 03 unknown user code instead of SSID back to the initiator initiator responder call request OFTP _ call confirm i OFTP SSRM SSID N numcheck if specified within CNTL member or stations entry NV exit present yes xnumcheck exit SSID Y rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix B Description of the rvs controldataset record KDRECORD B Description of the rvs controldataset record KDRECORD This chapter contains the KDRECORD in terms of an assembler space description The record description is part of the installation tape member KDRECORD of the rvs
304. regardless of the number of attempts o p t 10 After the 1 unsuccessful attempt the send request remains in hold status for ten minutes before a new attempt may be done After the 2 try the entry remains in hold status for 20 minutes then for 30 minutes etc IDEXIT name Name of an user provided identification exit routine If no identification exit routine is installed this parameter must be omitted This exit routine may be used to control modify the identification rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset phase exchange of station identifications on switched BSC lines The interface for this exit is described in appendix A of this manual JFP YES NO Creation of a jobprotocol in case of failing automatic jobstart The parameter JFP YES provides a notification function if the rvs monitor cannot submit a specified job after reception of a file for example a specified jobdataset member does not exist or the jobdataset cannot be allocated If JFP YES is specified rvs submits the content of member JFPJCL of the rvs tables dataset instead of the job which has been specified in the resident receive entry for more details see the description of member JFPJCL of the tables dataset in this chapter Additionally the member JFPJCL of the tables dataset must be allocated with DD name JFPJCL within the rvs start procedure JSSNAME NONE OPC Write events for this kind of job Scheduling Systems
305. rg If transmission tests are planned with VW AG Wolfsburg the following name of datasets are used for tests LOOPTEST When a dataset with this name is sent to station R11 regardless of its content or file format it will automatically be sent back to its original sender rvsMVS Installation Manual 8 Special Functions Procedures 8 Special Functions Procedures 8 1 Using BSC Line s as Backup for SNA This section contains a description of all definitions and actions which are necessary if BSC line s shall be used as backup for a SNA connection between two rvsMVS installations 1 rvs Station Table Both Stations Tables must contain entries for e the SNA connection to the remote installation parameter ACME VTAM e the backup connection to the remote installation parameters ACME BTAM SNCL III e the line s subchannel s to be used Parameter LINE nnn The entry for backup connection parameter must be located within the stations table before the entry defining the SNA connection One of both station tables must assign a program profile defined as master to the entries for backup connection and line subchannel definition The other station table must assign a program profile defined as slave to the entries for backup connection and line subchannel definition Remark A program profile for a line entry may be changed without stopping rvs if the following commands are e
306. roduction rvsMVS receive files First the user who wants to send a file with rvs has to authenticate against the operating system When this user tries to send a file his user name and the file s name are transmitted by rvs before the actual file transfer is starting When the receiving rvsMVS gets this information it searches the mapping table for a corresponding entry If an entry is found rvsMVS retrieves the according RACF user If none was found in the mapping table rvsMVS assumes that the user is directly known in RACF Next rvsMVS checks with RACF whether the RACF user has the right permissions to record the given file If the permissions inside RACF allow recording the file rvsMVS signals that the file transmission can start Otherwise it denies the file transmission to the sending station In both cases an appropriate entry is written to a user permission log The mapping table of rvsMVS is also useful for mapping user names with more than eight characters to RACF user names generally up to seven characters rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features In case of starting a post transmission processing rvsMVS assures that the process is started under the name of the RACF user who was responsible for sending the file This action is recorded in the user permission log too The result of submitting the job is written to the log rvsMVS send files Today rvsMVS already checks the user s read permission to the file the user want
307. rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit Remarks denotes the last two characters of the MVS address for this line as specified in the IODEVICE macro yyy denotes the address of the control unit for the V 25bis interface 3 2 Definitions for SNA component of rvs This section describes VTAM definitions which are necessary for a SNA connection between the local and a remote rvs installation The following requirements must be satisfied in order to establish a SNA connection with a remote rvs installation e The local rvs installation must include the SNA component e The remote rvs installation must include the SNA component rvsMVS or the remote side has installed rvsVSE SNA e Local and remote hosts must be connected via SNA network It is possible to connect PU type 2 computers with rvs using the SNA component In this case rvs compatible software is required for the remote computer but the restriction to leased line connections must not be necessary For a list of PU type 2 computers which are already connected to rvs using the SNA component see rvsMVS Interface Description VTAM definitions for the local rvs installation The local rvs installation must be defined within VTAM as a separate VTAM application VBUILD TYPE APPL rvsA APPL AUTH ACQ PARSESS YES VPACING 7 MODETAB LMTrvs DLOGMOD rvs1 Remark The name of the APPL statement here RVSA mus
308. s a send entry the user table will be checked and if the user ID a part of it the founded virtual station will be used as originator The virtual station definition consists of the parameters SID TYPE and ODETID Example SID U11 TYPE VIRT ODETID 00013003210GEDAS R11U11 A virtual station is identified by its ODETTE ID This ODETTE ID needs not to be officially requested It must be unique in your communication area on your system and on your partners Systems A local virtual station e g U11 should be defined as a routed station at your partner reachable via your local station e g R11 Example STATION OF R11 ODETID 00013003210GEDAS B212U11 VIA R Note The parameters SECURITY and COMPRESS stands only for security and compression between real stations not between virtual stations For defining permission rules for virtual stations users and file transmissions it is necessary to create a user and a permission table For more information please read the chapter 6 12 Step by step instructions how to use User Level Security ULS are given in chapter 9 5 ULS YES NO This parameter have to be set to YES for the real neighbour stations with which you want to use User Level Security See the chapters 6 12 and 9 5 for further information rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset USERSEP YES NO USP Enables the user separation for the remote
309. s in this chapter also used as opposite to a virtual station The permission table of this neighbour station with ULS YES consists of two members e Amember for permissions in send direction e member for permissions in receive direction Both members are named according to the following syntax Receive direction the name of the member should begin with indicating the receive direction and be followed by the StationID of the respective neighbour station e g RN R11 Send direction the name of the member should begin with SN indicating the send direction and be followed by the StationID of the respective neighbour station e g SN R11 The both members have the following layout e Each line that begins with an asterisk is a comment line e The non comment lines contain the permission entries The structure of the records 1 Comment record Column 1 asterisk 2 Restriction Entry VDSN can end with asterisk as wildcard max of 26 char e originator station ID 3 char e destination station ID 3 char DEST All fields for the restriction entries are key value pairs and must be separated by comma or blank Each line describes permission for a restricted VDSN to from this neighbour Example 1 receive direction member RN R11 receive permissions from neighbour R11 Comment local virtual stations are A remote virtual stations are B all receive permissions for neighbour
310. s parameter is used for the security component only This parameter specifies the unit count for multivolume datasets used for allocation Compression Security temporary files may be a value from 1 up to 20 If not defined then the value of parameter UNTCOUNT is used If both parameters YUNITC and are not defined the default value is 10 YUNITN name This parameter is used for the security component only This parameter specifies the symbolic name of a disk unit group which will be used for allocation Compression Security temporary files If not defined then the value of parameter UNIT is used If both parameters YUNITN and UNIT are not defined the default value is SYSDA rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 1 1 Example for definitions to support more X 25 multi channel links 1 Example Definition of three X 25 multi channel links using different networks lt 72 characters gt lt 8 gt ek ke ke ke RARA RARA ke ke e ke e ke KK KARA TOP OF DATA ck che che che e ke ke ec ke e e e e e e e e e e e e e e ek EET 2505 5 ODID 00013000001VW RVS AFRARARARARA RARA KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KK KKK KKK 1 Definition for CTCP 1 ISDN Rok ke ke ke KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KEKE KKK KEKE ke e ke e KEKE XAPPLID 1 AVARVSG1 XLUNAME 1 XVWAOTR1
311. s programs the first accounting parameter is placed at offset 49 For more details see IBM macros IEFAJCTB IEFAACTB ACTREL RVS ACC account Accounting information max 7 characters for SMF records created by rvs and or for user accounting exit if installed see parameters SMF ACEXIT in this chapter This accounting information is used for transmissions where rvs works as a relais station that means if rvs receives a dataset from a certain station and transmits the same dataset to another station final receiver APPLID applid only if SNA component rvs is used Application ID of the local own station 1 8 alphanumeric characters This name must be specified in an APPL statement of the local VTAM see chapter VTAM definitions This name must be specified also in the rvs stations table of the remote station s see chapter 6 2 and in the VTAM of the remote station s as a cross domain resource see chapter VTAM definitions If used this name must be different from those specified for rvs startparameters RMOPAPPL LU62APPL and XAPPLID BFPOOLRL ttt Parameter for rvs internal OFTP bufferpool management ttt denotes the time in seconds after which unused buffers of this pool are to be released freed Optional parameter Default value BFPOOLRL 20 BFPOOLSZ sss rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Parameter for rvs internal OFTP bufferpool management sss denotes th
312. s to send In general the user has the possibility to create a script which can be started when a send job fails This script name has to be given as parameter to the send job When this script will be started it will be started under the permissions of the RACF user who originally started the send job For each sending operation and for every script start an entry is written to the user permission log Appendix 9 6 2 Installation There are no additional installation steps necessary since user separation is a standard feature of rvsMVS 9 6 3 Configuration You have to modify the rvsMVS CNTL Member and the station table to activate user separation RVS Start parameter CNTL Member USERSEP YES NO Enables user separation for the own rvsMVS station RVS Stationtable STATIONS Member USERSEP YES NO Enables the user separation for the remote station Create Data Sets Create datasets Description Dataset name Job in tables rvs User Mapping Dataset USP RVS USERDATA DEFUSER INITUSER rvs User Mapping Log USP RVS USERLOG DEFLOG L rvs User Log Dataset USP RVS LOGDATA DEFLOGL INITLOGL rvs User Log RVS LOGLOG DEFLOG L Remark If you use SMS to allocate datasets use the jobs DEFLLSMS and DEFUSSMS to create the VSAM datasets rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features Modify the DF080A00 Job Add the following DD Statements to the DF080A00 Job USERDATA DD
313. send data Po Create a send request see USER Manual __ All remaining steps will be done by rvsMVS automatically rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features 9 4 External Security The Security Feature of rvs uses both a symmetric cipher 3DES and a public private key cipher RSA The encryption works by using a public private key cipher to share a key for the symmetric cipher Because of the symmetric key sharing the used symmetric key is different for each file transmission The actual data set being sent then is encrypted using the session key and sent to the partner It is possible to create and use private and public keys with a size between 768 and 2048 bit In case of encryption of a data set rvs provides a document s digital signature which protects the transmitted data set against changes and check the ownership of the transmitted data The implementation of this feature uses a hash function The following defaults will be used by rvs for the encryption procedures e for encryption DES3 with RSA e for hash value determination SHA1 External Security Feature is based on an external program library run time version and this programs are linked with the new task Service Provider Therefore there is one additional installation steps only to the well known rvsMVS installation to use this security feature e creation of the Security Key Data Set Please refer to chapter 5 1 and 5 9 5 10 Additional the par
314. sion of a job last call of exit during submission of a job no JCL card is passed to the exit during this last call type of job flags bitstring 1 the JCL to be submitted is a PDS member automatic jobstart specified within resident receive entry For obtaining names of PDS and member see remarks below the JCL to be submitted is the content of the received dataset remote job submit reserved reserved address of a workarea which may be used by the exit length of this workarea 8 bytes address of current kdrecord The layout of this record is described in Appendix B of this manual No field of this record should be modified by the exit The results may be unpredictable address of an area into which the exit may place a message text in case of returncodes 8 or 16 Within the monitor this message will be displayed by rvs with message identifier DF5803l The layout of this area byte 1 2 Halfword containing the length of a following message buffer This length is at least 70 bytes This field has to contain the length of the message and has to set by the exit byte 3 n Message buffer rvs always clears this buffer with blank characters before the exit is called address of the JCL card which is passed to the exit If this field is zero no card is passed to the exit If the exit sets this field to zero this card will be omitted for job submit Remarks If the job to be submitted is
315. so DIALOPTS DIALOPT3 and ACTOPTS dt dt1 di2 times of automatic dial indicates when the remote station is to be called dialed one time no retry This function is useful for recalling datasets from a remote station at certain times of day Up to four different times may be defined Syntax dt hh mm Examples DIALOPT2 14 08 DOPT2 14 08 15 40 No default value DIALOPT3 b t1 t2 r DOPT3 Polling interval for automatic dial Optional parameter 11 12 denote a time interval r a retry time for this interval Similar to the DIALOPT2 parameter this parameter provides a polling function in view of establishing a connection A dial request is generated automatically every r minutes within the specified time interval regardless of any send requests Syntax t1 hh mm t2 hh mm r value between 1 and 255 minutes Examples DIALOPT3 07 30 20 40 20 DOPT3 20 00 06 30 8 No default value rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset DOPTS xx Ditxx 4 b ti rt ti1 rt1 ti2 rt2 ti3 rt3 ti4 rt4 DOPTSy Dy Options for automatic dial for specific day of week Optional parameter Parameter xx name of day xx english notation xx german notation MO MO TU DI WE MI TH DO FR SA SA SU SO Parameters ti and rt like in DIALOPTS DOPTS parameter Default value no Examples DI
316. source library and may be used as a DSECT within the rvs user exits DFUX001 DFUX002 and DFUXOOS If used as a DSECT addressibility should be established by coding the symbolic name KDRECORD within the USING statement The address of the record within the parameter list of the exits is the address of the field KDRECTYP on offset 6 within this DSECT Some exit dependent remarks about the use of different fields are listed in Appendix A as part of the exit description DSECT KKK KKK KKK ke ke KKK KK ke ke He He eek ke ke hehe eek ke ke hehe ek ke ke ke ke he ek He He ke ke ke eek kk He ke ec ek ke ke ke ke ke k k k k k k k k E CAUTION THIS RECORD HAS ALWAYS TO START AT THE LAST HALFWORD BOUNDARY WITHIN A DOUBLEWORD KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ke ke hehe e He e ke ke he hee e kk ke hehe ek ke ke ke hehe ek kk ke ke he eek kk He ke ec ek ke ke ke ke ke ke k k ke k k CNOP 6 8 KDRECORD EQU KDSTART EQU Fe che ke ke hee HK K KK KK hee ke he ke e hee hee ke hee e hee ke ke k ke he ke he k k hee ke k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kkk kkk k k rvs KEYWORDS IN LOGICAL ORDER KEY OF RECORD kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk KDRECTYP DS CL2 RECORD TYPE AR ACTIVE RECEIVING AS ACTIVE SEND SEND REQUEST CR COMPLETE RECEIVE WRITTEN AT END ABEND OF RECEIVING CS COMPLETE SEND WRITTEN AT END OF TRANSMISSION SEND RR RESIDENT RECEIVE RECORD ORG 1 KDTRANS DS TRANSMISSION
317. stallation Manual 9 rvs Features Display Update Delete of a USP Entry The menu item Y shows a panel which allows the user to display update or delete user mapping entries The panel DFYOOPOO helps to select a corresponding entry by specifying some selection criteria SID SID of the remote station RUID Remote user id If there are several user mapping entries matching the selection criteria these are indicated as a list in the panel DFY20P00 rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features Entering S in front of a list entry shows the details of the selection Entering U in front of a list entry shows the panel DFY30P00 for updating the selected user mapping entry Entering D in front of a list entry deletes the corresponding user mapping entry If there is only one user mapping entry matching the selection criteria the corresponding details are indicated in panel DFY10P00 rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features Ye te Yee ve ve dee dede ees DFYLOPOO RHEE KKK RR RR 9 R V s DISPLAY L UPDATE d DELETE Pona KO ERI SEPARATION RECEIVE ENTRIES exu tud COMMAND gt DATE 05 311 TIME 15 16 SPECIFY OPTION DELETE ENTRY U UPDATE ENTRY REMOTE STATION REMOTE USERID LOCALE USERID ACCOUNT NUMBER 3DFRO04 ODETTEID 00000000000GEDAS JOBCARD Entering option D deletes the actual user mapping entry Entering option U shows the panel DFY30P00 for updating the
318. station rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 1 Subset 1 valid for BSC Entries short definition ACCESMET TP access method ACTMODE activation mode CONTALG algorithm in case of contention DBID Daimler Benz station identification DIALNUM dial number for autodial FTP name of File Transfer Protocol IDENQ sid and enquiry within one string LBLKSIZE line blocksize LINETYPE linetype switched leased RECVPW receive password s SENDPW send password SPEED speed of transmission SUBCHANL Subchannel addresses line addresses UCBNAME Physical line address leased lines onl mandatory parameter Note Additional to these parameters subset 0 must be specified Description of rvs Station Table Parameters in detail ACCESMET t B TAM access method Must be BTAM This parameter may be omitted because it is the default ACTMODE t A LL S PECIAL LACTM J Activation mode of line control Optional parameter ACTMODE NORMAL line control can be activated by every activation command except A ALL NORMAL is default ACTMODE ALL line control can be activated explicit or by an A ALL command ACTMODE SPECIAL line control of this station has to be activated under declaration of the line address Operator commands Activation of BSC lines see chapt 5 5 of the rvsMVS Operation Man
319. t Protocol message only CSUTLEP PROBAID The identification of release level of program CSUTLFI B E G I N O F K E Y CSUTLFI E N D O F K E Y CSUTLGP Lit 4 242 O Shee tun The message occurs during key generation list of input parameters Protocol message only rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix Key Data Utility Program DF054K 1 7 Key Data record description This chapter contains the KEYRECORD description in terms of an assembler space description It would be helpful for interpretation of listing of the RVS KEY DS Remember that the data will be compressed and therefor not readable WU RA NM LR CAUTION THIS RECORD HAS ALWAYS TO START AT THE LAST HALFWORD BOUNDARY WITHIN DOUBLEWORD id ck ok KKK ok kk Ck ok ok kk kk Kk ko x Sk Sk ko Sk Sk Kk ko Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk ko ko Kk ko ko kk CNOP 6 8 KEYRECRD EQU 5 ck ck KKK ok kk Ck kk kk Ck ko kk ko KK Ko Kk Kk Kk Kk Kk ko ko ko ko Kk ko ko ko kk RVS KEYWORDS IN LOGICAL ORDER KEY OF RECORD
320. t be the same as specified for the rvs Startparameter APPLID see chapter 6 1 Logmode table for rvs It may be useful to define a separate log mode table for RVS The use of log mode entries with different COS names allow the use of different Virtual Routes for different parallel sessions between the local and remote rvs installation application A special log mode entry will be used by rvs during activation of a session to the remote application rvs installation if e the name of the logmode to be used for this session is specified within the rvs Sessions Table see chapter 6 4 description of columns 53 60 e the activation of the session is a result of an activation command in the local rvs installation see rvs Operation Manual activation command A sid rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit The following is an example of a log mode table with three entries used by rvs kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk RVS1 BATCH VIRTUAL ROUTE LOW PRIORITY RVS3 DIALOG VIRTUAL ROUTE LOW PRIORITY RVS5 LOGMODE FOR A PU TYPE 2 COMPUTER KKK KKK KKK KKK KK hehe ke he ke hee e hee e hee ke hee e hee ke hee ke ke k e k k e he e ke k k k k k k k k k k k k k k kkk k kkk LMTRVS MODETAB RVS1 MODEENT LOGMODE RVSI1 5 1 BATCH VR LOW PRIORITY TYPE 1 BITS 4 7 VON BYTE 0 FMPROF X 03 BYTE 1 TSPROF X 04 B
321. t is called within the send sections of the rvs monitor or if it is called during creation of a send request outside the address space of the monitor value of KDRECTYP C AS see also Appendix B of this manual KDREMOTE same value as KDFINAL KDDSN dataset name used as reference between sender and receiver KDDSNNEW physical dataset name KDUSERID jobname or TSO userid which created this record send request KDRUSER RACF userid of the above job TSO session if RACF is installed else blank If the exit is called within the receive sections of the rvs monitor value of KDRECTYP C AR or if it is called during creation of a resident receive entry outside the address space of the monitor value of KDRECTYP C RR the following fields are important in each case KDREMOTE KDDSN and KDDSNNEW There are four groups of other fields which may be of interest 1 Sysout specifications indicated by a nonblank field KDSYSOUT This group includes KDSYSOUT KDPROG KDFORM KDCOPIES and KDDEST Sysout specifications may have been done in the receiving station by creating a resident receive entry indicated by bit KDRESREC of field KDBITS3 or in the sending station if bit KDRESREC is set off lf sysout parameters are specified in the sending station a resident receive entry in the receiving station will be ignored by RVS rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix A rvs User Exits 2 Remote options specified in the sending statio
322. t more than one X 25 numbers for one partner station nn specifies the partner number index If there is no index defined the parameter will be used for all X 25 numbers within this station table entry To support more than one X 25 numbers for one partner station nn specifies the partner number index If there is no index defined the parameter will be used for all X 25 numbers within this station table entry rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 6 2 5 Subset 5 valid for LU 6 2 stations Definition ACCESMET TP access method CONVTYP conversation type mapped basic HOLDSESS option for session status if nothing to send LBLKSIZE line blocksize LUNAME logical unit name LU62MODE LOGMODE names for LU62 sessions SESSNUM limit of sessions SYNCLVL synchronization level transaction program name mandatory parameter Note The LU 6 2 component uses the ODETTE FTP OFTP Additional to these parameters subset 0 and subset 3 must be specified Description of rvs Station Table Parameters in detail ACCESMET L U62 J Access method must be LU62 Mandatory parameter CONVTYP MAPPED BASIC Conversation type Optional parameter The rvs APPC support can use either conversation type BASIC or MAPPED As an initiator the conversation type to use is taken from the definition of the station to call As a responder the conversation
323. taset The script fetches information from rvs control dataset with the use of DF076A These data will be sorted and formatted similary to the output of DF0784A Requirements for running DF078B ICEMAN alias for DFSORT DF076A shipped with rvsMVS IDCAMS IKJEFTO1 TSO Environment rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset There are 4 files which are needed to run DF078B RVS JOBS DF078B JCL for allocating necessary datasets and starting the REXX script RVS EXEC DF078B The main REXX script which formats the output RVS EXEC SORT78B Configuration dataset for sort routine ICEMAN RVS EXEC KDPARSER REXX script for parsing the raw data of rvsMVS control dataset For executing the program there are 3 datasets necessary RVS DF078B RESULT This dataset will contain the formatted output of DF078B RVS DF078B ICEMAN This dataset will be used as output file for the sort routine ICEMAN RVS DF078B DF076A This dataset will be used as the output file for DF076A and contains the raw data of the control dataset The names of the datasets can be changed according your environment The JCL contains several Steps DELTMP1 This step deletes the temporary datasets which are needed to run the script and the result dataset ALCTMP This step allocates the output dataset for DFO76A for the raw data from control dataset The step is necessary because the file will be used by two DD Statements Allo
324. tation Entries and Line Entries only if BTAM BSC switched lines are used Station Entries Each remote station must have a Station Entry Depending on the kind of connection different subsets of parameters are valid Direct Station Entry The remote station is directly connected Parameters subsets BSC station subset 0 chapt 6 2 0 subset 1 chapt 6 2 1 SNA station subset 0 chapt 6 2 0 subset 2 chapt 6 2 2 stations using ODETTE FTP subset 3 chapt 6 2 3 X 25 station subset 0 chapt 6 2 0 subset 4 chapt 6 2 4 LU6 2 station subset 0 chapt 6 2 0 subset 5 chapt 6 2 5 TCP IP station subset 0 chapt 6 2 0 subset 6 chapt 6 2 6 FTP station subset 0 chapt 6 2 0 subset 7 chapt 6 2 7 e Indirect Station Entry The remote station is indirectly connected transfer runs via a relais station The relais station itself must exist as a Direct Station Entry Parameter subset VIA station subset 0 chapt 6 2 0 subset 8 chapt 6 2 8 Line Entries Each BSC switched line needs its own entry within the Stations Table Parameter subset BSC switched line subset 9 chapter 6 2 9 If you want to define more than one accessmethod for one station for example X25 ISTATUS INACTIVE and BSC ISTATUS ACTIVE you have to code one complete entry for each accessmethod All of the parameters except tp accessmethod ACME may be changed even if rvs system is executing See rvsMVS Operation Manual Modification of stati
325. the transmission One of the following values may be specified 15 seconds 1 30 seconds 2 1 minute rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset 2 minutes 4 4 minutes 5 8 minutes 6 16 minutes C7 32 minutes 8 64 minutes C 9 128 minutes blank 2 minutes Default value Session delay valid only for send sessions This value specifies a time interval which the session uses as a delay time before sending of each line buffer This value may be specified in order to reduce the speed of transmissions line usage for batch transmissions One of the following values may be specified no delay 1 0 01 seconds 2 0 02 seconds 0 04 seconds 4 0 08 5 0 16 seconds 6 0 32 seconds CF 163 84 seconds blank no delay Default value Remark If a general send delay time is specified see command SDELAY in the Operation Manual the general value is added to the value specified in this session profile Pacing value valid only for send sessions After sending of every n th line buffer a definite response is requested from the receiving station normally sending of line buffers containing data records is performed without any definite response but only with exceptional response The following values may be specified blank no use of definit responses for transmitted line
326. the line driver modules for the different access methods In most cases the rvs traces are good enough for error detection However some situations may require additional information In these cases an external trace GTF trace or hardware trace datascope or similair utility or a similar trace must be used The rvs internal trace includes information about the internal rvs processing in most cases it does not include data concerning the line 8 2 1 Trace Output All output of the different internal traces is written to the file allocated with DD statement SYSWTO Output of the other rvs traces is written to SYSOUT class E by default This value may be changed by using the rvs startparameter TRACE see section 6 1 or by operator command TRACE see rvsMVS Operations Manual In this case another SYSOUT class can be defined by the statement TRACE x It is also possible to write trace output into a disk dataset In this case the statement TRACE pointer where pointer is a 2 8 character first level pointer of the dataset name may be used as rvs start parameter or as an operator command In this case a dataset with the name pointer LINExxx TRACE BSC or pointer sid nm TRACE SNA pointer XMLU TRACE X25 or pointer SESnnnnn TRACE X25 or pointer sid SESnnnnn TRACE X25 or pointer sid SESnnnnn TRACE LU62 or pointer TCPIPnn TCPR TRACE TCP or pointer TCPIPnn sid SOCsssss TRACE TCP pointer sid TRACE
327. the own station Remark ODETTE identifications will be defined and issued by the national automotive associations Up to now it is not completely clear which organizations will do this work in the different countries For the Federal Republic of Germany the following address should be consulted rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Verband der Automobilindustrie e V VDA WestendstraBe 61 Postfach 170563 Kennwort VDA AVKD 4914 60079 Frankfurt Tel 069 97507 283 Fax 069 97507 300 Mail habild vda de Registration and distribution of ODETTE ID is not free of charge If you want to support more than one X 25 multi channel links it is possible to define different own ODETTE identifications for various X 25 multi channel links Use the Index extension xx 1 32 in this case The ODID parameter without Index extension is valid for all defined X 25 multi channel links in your rvs Monitor PSIZE xx 128 nnn This parameter is used only for the X25 component It specifies the packetsize to be used nnn may be one of the values 128 256 or 512 This value must be the same as specified for parameter MAXPKTL of the X25VCCPT macro NPSI generation The specified value must be the same as the value used within the national X 25 network To support more than one X 25 multi channel links you have to define this parameter for each X 25 multi channel CTCP The parameter without Index extension is vali
328. tialize the rvs Key Data dataset Examples A JOB RERRERERERRERRERREREREREERRERRRERERRERRERERERERERRERERERRERRARRERRERA f CREATE KEY DATA SET S EE ZE e de Fe Fe de e de de e de Fe Fe de He de e e e He de Fe Fe e Te Te Ze Fe de e DEFINE EXEC PGM IDCAMS SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT SYSIN DD E DEFINE CLUSTER NAME P390A V2CS NEWOl KEYS 1 rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix l Key Data Utility Program DF054K VOLUME ELO103 FREESPACE 30 20 5 70 0 SHR 4 3 RECORDSIZE 550 5000 UNIQUE DATA NAME P390A V2CS NEWOl KEYS DATA CONTROLINTERVALSIZE 16384 INDEX NAME P390A V2CS NEWOl KEYS INDEX CONTROLINTERVALSIZE 2048 Note The IDCAMS parameter KEYS SHAREOPTIONS and RECORDSIZE should not be modified Do not change the DD Name KEYDATA of the initialize step In contrast to the Control Data set of rvs there is no Log Data set for the Key Data dataset 1 3 3 Initialize Key Datasets VSAM D Statements KEYDATA key management dataset VSAM Dataset SYSPRINT program logfile 20 KEYINIT EXEC PGM DF079S STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT 1 3 4 Generate a key pair of your own The job KEYGEN can be used to create a new key pair Ex
329. tion Encrypted files are not influenced by routing station rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset SID sid sid 3 characters rvs station identification Mandatory parameter Must be the first parameter of each station entry rvs station ID s must be unique within a net of TP connections See chapter 6 1 rvs Startparameter parameter STATION For inhouse connections rvs station ID s are freely selectable If the rvs station ID is used only for rvs internal reference not for identification on the line for example in case of communication with DAKS see parameter DBID the rvs station ID is freely selectable also But in these cases the ID s should start with one of the following characters D F H K M Q T W ID s starting with the character and the names ALL BSC SNA X25 FTP and RVS are reserved for rvs internal use No default value TYPE VIRT If you want to use User Level Security ULS you need virtual stations TYPE VIRT This kind of station represents different users of your local real station CNTL member Real stations are your local station and the neighbour stations that are reachable in the OFTP network real stations are non virtual stations A local virtual station has one owner and possibly some users as station members This mapping between users and a station is only possible for virtual stations A real station don t have users When a user create
330. tion of the datasets to be transmitted received takes place dynamically i e no specific job control instructions are required within the rvs start procedure 1 Introduction rvsMVS Installation Manual figure shows the structure of the rvs system The followin 3172 or other abessau jo osa 2901 on suoisses dois ueis ejdsip 9081 SM 05 ueis SejeJ uoissiuisueJ jo e dsip 60001 pues suoissiusueA ejejdujoo jo ejdsip sisanba pues jo Aejdsip e qei suoneis ysajou siajawesed uoneis sa Aejdsip uejs sa ejdsip 989 Jeoueo dois PAY Suoisses oouto dois sjuauodulo9 10J SYSE O1JUO9 Jo jooueo dois ejeAnoe 10 spueuiuioo g Gl xu 3 v gt gt O S 5 ISdN dON dl dO L INV LA NV LH lOX 06 SO VS3 SAW 6 eoepelu 10jeJedo ajoway lt gt K MM gt eoeyelu JoJe1ado SANSA Jo eoeds sseJppy sejyoad siayjo ueu pue suondo jeipoine SNOILV LS suo e s pajoauuos JO S91 SIIS JOBJByo uoneis umo JO suoniugep pue SNOLIBA JO 1aquau 11N2 Jejeurejed uelis sas 10juoui SANSA 10 uoneuiojur 04
331. tore the contents of registers 2 18 when returning control to the calling rvs program register 15 should be set to zero The address of the accounting information record may change every time when the exit is given control Coding example for accounting user exit An example of accounting exit is found on the rvsMVS installation tape in the rvs source library 2 file member ACEXIT Please refer to this example in case of need of adaption to your environment A 4 Job Submit Exit DFUX003 The exit DFUXOOS may be used to check modify or suppress job submission executed by the rvs monitor after receiption of a dataset Exit DFUX003 is executed in following cases e the received dataset contains JCL which is to be submitted by rvs and the remote station where the dataset comes from is authorized for this function for this authorization see description of rvs Stations Table parameter OPTIONS e a dataset has been received and automatic jobstart is defined for this dataset see rvs User s Manual section Creation of Resident Receive Entries parameter JOB The use of this exit allows for example an accommodation of rvs to RACF requirements the exit might check if a RACF user who has created a resident receive entry with automatic jobstart is authorized for access to the jobsdataset specified within the resident receive entry The loadname DFUX003 of this exit is required For operating system MVS XA both addressing mode
332. troldataset It is the central information and controlfile a kind of catalog within the rvs system and thus an interface between the rvs Monitor on one side and rvs users on the other side rvsMVS Installation Manual 4 rvs System Files All requests for transmissions of files are stored in this dataset and if active the rvs Monitor scans this file for transmission requests and transmits these files as soon as a transmission path is available So it is possible to obtain for example status information about all transmissions which e have not yet started queued send requests e just active in this case record counters for a later restart are saved in the file are complete so it is always possible to display information about transmissions of the last days The control dataset contains additional information about the various processing options that shall be executed after a file has been received for example automatic jobstart Remark The rvs control dataset should be reorganized from time to time depending on the number of CI and CA splits which have occurred during normal operation of rvs Too many splits reduce performance when the control dataset is scanned for display of information For this a reorganization should be done if more than 5 8 CA splits have been done A reorganization should be done by execution of procedure PDF0015A for SMS use PDF0015B see chapter 6 9 4 within this manual 4 3 rvs L
333. type to use is picked up from the allocation request and adherd to Note Only partner stations running portable rvs support MAPPED LBLKSIZE P 100 2000 LSIZE J Line blocksize for transmission Optional parameter Allowed are values from 100 up to 2000 bytes Note The LSIZE value may be reduced to the max exchange buffersize value see rvs startparameter XBFSIZE rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset LUNAME F Iuname luname 8 characters LU J Mandatory parameter Name of the logical unit of the remote station Note VTAM requires LU names of full 8 characters length LU62MODE mode1 mode2 mode3 LOGMODE names for the LU62 sessions with the following order mode1 modename for low priority session mode2 modename for medium priority session mode3 modename for high priority session All names must be defined in the LOGMODE table of VTAM for the used application ID The names must be precisely 8 characters long Note This LU62MODE names defined in the LU62 station table entry have a higher priority than the names of the rvs start parameter If your partner station is running portable rvs for non MVS machines only one mode mode1 is presently supported SESSNUM II mm hh Maximum number of protocol sessions of each priority which might be active at the same time Optional parameter Il max number of low priority sessions mm max number
334. ual rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset CONTALG ALG1 ALG2 Algorithm in case of contention situation Optional parameter ALG1 The first operation on the line after contention is a write ALG2 The first operation on the line after contention is a read DBID zcc cc 1 10 characters Daimler Benz station identification Only necessary for communications with Daimler Benz Stations using DAKS Datenaustausch Kommunikations System of DB identify themselve by a up to 10 characters long identification number The DBID is only necessary for the identification phase for further handling the Daimler Benz station will be recognized within your rvs system by its rvs station id Parameter SID DIALNUM 1 string of max 20 characters DNUM J Telephone number for automatic dial Mandatory if AUTODIAL YES Note Autodial is mandatory for FTP 4914 1 If the dial interface is V 25bis only the number to be dialed has to be coded If the dial interface is V 25 the number to be dialed has to be extended in the following way For Datex L lines from the Deutsche Bundespost the characters C3 must be added to the number Character C is an indication for the dialing hardware that the end of the number to be dialed is reached Character 3 is an indication for the contol unit 37x5 that the end of the number to be passed to the dial hardware is reached If the public telephone n
335. ue specified for the rvs start parameter XNUMCHCK will be used cc 1 cc 1 16 characters X25CUD nn 4 1 16 bytes hex notation lL xx J nn 1 99 Call User Data of X 25 call request packet Optional parameter This field could be useful to select the remote CTCP e if there is more than one CTCP assigned to the same multichannel link e or if subaddressing is not used Care should be taken when using this field because the first byte of the Call User Data are commonly interpreted as protocol identifier For example X C3 is used to select SNA QLLC services X 01 is the identifier for PAD connections and X CC is for TCP IP running over X 25 X C4 is reserved for SNA ELLC protocol connections To support more than one X 25 numbers for one partner station nn specifies the partner number index If there is no index defined the parameter will be used for all X 25 numbers within this station table entry rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Function of the X25CUD parameter Outgoing calls will be provided with a Call User Data field within the X 25 call request packet So you have to know the value expected by the remote station If X25CUD is not coded the CUD field of the call packet will be omitted Incoming calls will be routed by default to your rvs CTCP if CUD of the call packet is omitted But If the default values for CTCP selection within your NPSI generation have been ov
336. uted the space specification must be increased to avoid overflow D 3 Job to gain the basic data for the statistics Basic data will be obtained from a rvs log file called RVS LOG SAVE assigned DD name LOGSAVE within kdsave logsave procedure see member PDF0014A of RVS TABLES Important It is necessary to run the accumulation job immediately after the kdsave logsave procedure to be sure that RVS LOG SAVE contains only data since the last save procedure rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix D rvs statistics The following job member ACCUM of dataset RVS TABLES is an example for starting the accumulation job A JOB kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkk ACCUMULATION OF STATISTICS DATA kk he e he KKK He he He he He he KEIR KK ERE KKK ACCUM EXEC PGM DF555B STEPLIB DD DSN RVS LOAD DISP SHR SYSIN DD DSN RVS LOGSAVE DISP SHR SYSOUT DSN RVS TPSTAT DISP MOD DCB RECFM FB LRECL 39 BLKSIZE 19500 D 4 Station Activity Program Prerequisites for a qroup related evaluation If a certain selection of stations is needed you can define your own groups in a dataset This dataset is called RVS GROUPS hereafter and should have following attributes PHYSICAL SEQUENTIAL 80 BYTES RECORD LENGTH FIXED BLOCKED RVS GROUPS must have the following layout title line column 1 2 group title short form column 6 18 group title long for
337. utes OFTP Protocol architecture gives no place for such information Therefore the OFTP Protocol will be enhanced by e use of the SSID USER field e use of the SFID USER field e creation of the new protocol record SFX1 This enhancement will be used only if the station parameter TYPE MVS is given This means that in preparing the connection both partners have to make an agreement about the use of this feature and to inform rvsMVS about it by setting this parameter It serves to avoid connections to a partner which needs a blank USER field On the SSID level the USER field serves to inform the partner about the intended availabled process of PDS Transfer Therfore it contains the eyecatcher described above RF or RF and the value 8 in the fourth byte Additional combinations of this value with the values 4 2 and 1 are possible and inform about more additional properties On the SFID level the USER field serves to inform the partner about the use of the feature for this transmission The construction of the field is equal to the SSID USER field Value 8 or a combination with it shows the start of a PDS transfer Instead of the first data buffer rvsMVS sends a special protocol record This record contains all data set attributes of the unloaded PDS data set The structure of this protocol record follows rvsMVS Installation Manual 9 rvs Features Field Name Definition Type Field Description SEX DS E Eye chatche
338. vs Start Parameters in detail General remark rvsMVS Installation Manual 6 Description of the Tables Dataset Some of the rvs start parameters are used not only by the rvs monitor but also by programs executed in different address spaces for example rvs ISPF panels Such programs obtain these values from the rvs control dataset where the rvs monitor stores the current used parameter values during every run of rvs Thus if parameter values are changed they become active for all programs only after the next monitor start ACEXIT name Name of an user provided accounting exit routine If no exit routine is installed this parameter must be omitted An accounting exit routine may be used to obtain accounting information about all executed transmissions The interface for this exit is described in appendix A of this manual A coding example is contained in appendix A also Specification of this parameter is independent of the SMF parameter see below ACTOFST 49 nn value between 49 and 192 Some of the rvs programs for example rvs ISPF panel programs try to obtain accounting information from the ACT of the job tso session which executes these programs The accounting information within this system control block is variable depending on the specified accounting information within the JOB statement This parameter specifies the displacement base address ACT 16 from where an account information shall be obtained by rv
339. vs message identifier is changed to the character Q for example DF3000I is changed to DF3000Q Logon from a 3270 screen to the rvs monitor A logon request to rvs is initiated if the sequence LOGON APPLID name DATA OPER is entered from the screen name denotes the application id which is used for this function The application id must be defined within VTAM name must be the same value as specified within the rvs start parameter RMOPAPPL If the logon request is successful an SNA session has been established an initial message will be sent to the screen this message is starting with the charactes P rvs followed by the release number and the rvs station name of the local rvs installation and some other values This initial message is followed by the message sid ENTER PASSWORD The logon password must now be entered row 1 column 1 This password is the same as described in the section Installation of rvs ISPF panels within this manual The password is not displayed on the screen If the valid password has been entered the message sid LOGON COMPLETE rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix G Using the Remote Operating Function will be displayed and the remote operating function will start working display of messages processing of rvs commands see below This session may be stopped at any time if LOGOFF is entered in the input field starting at column 1 If an invalid password has been entere
340. wing Local socket number IP address of remote station Remote port number This portnumber varies for each connection it is different from that as specified whithin the rvs stations table for the remote station Rvs ID of remote station Date in the form yy ddd Time of day Type of request CONNECT ACCEPT READ WRITE CANCEL CLOSE issued or complete In most cases trace records are written only after completion of a request For READ and WRITE the received sent data are displayed in a dump format ODETTE protocol records are additionally displayed formatted For CONNECT ACCEPT parameters like local address and local port number are displayed For all completed requests the return error code is displayed The meaning of these codes depends on the executed request for more details see IBM TCP IP for MVS Application Programming Interface Reference SOCKET 00001 REMOTE ADDR 010 210 208 130 REMOTE PORT 01392 REMOTE STATION RV1 DATE 99 175 TIME 08 31 4133 REQUEST WRITE COMPLETE DATA 10000041 58314F30 30313330 30303030 31565720 20202020 20525654 20202041 AX100013000001VW RVT A 41412020 20202030 30313238 4259594E 30303120 20202020 20202020 20202020 00128BYYN001 E 0D ODETTE PROTOCOL UNIT START SESSION IDENTIFICATION SSID SSIDCMD X COMMAND IDENTIFIER SSIDLEV 1 PROTOCOL VERSION LEVEL SSIDCODE 00013000001VW RVT INITIATOR IDENTIFICATION SSIDPSWD AAA INITIATOR PASSWORD
341. wn and of your partner s see chapter appendix optional Creation of the rvs Permission data set if ULS User Level Security will be used see chapter 9 5 optional Inserting the User und Permision entries in Permission data set members see chapter 9 5 optional Creation of the rvs USP data sets if USP User Separation will be used see chapter 9 6 Running test procedures see chapter 7 5 2 Content of Compact Disk README TXT Info dataset README DOC CHANGES DOC Information in detail about rvsMVS changes in this release rvsMVS Installation Manual 5 Steps for installation of rvsMVS CLIST SEQ LOAD1 SEQ LOAD2 SEQ LOAD3 SEQ LOAD4 SEQ LOAD5 SEQ LOAD6 SEQ MSGS SEQ PANEL SEQ SOURCE SEQ TABLES SEQ JOBS SEQ EXEC SEQ RECEIVE ISPF CLIST dataset rvs Loadlib part 1 rvs Loadlib part 2 rvs Loadlib part 3 rvs Loadlib part 4 rvs Loadlib part 5 rvs Loadlib part 6 ISPF MSGS dataset ISPF PANEL dataset Source library This file contains various source members layout of rvs controlblocks which be used if rvs User Exits are to be used assembler source code as example of rvs User Exits or other installation dependent programs Sample jobs useful during installation of RVS macro rvsDYN used during installation of rvs Dataset containing control information for the rvs monitor and jobs used for installation or operation of rvs JOBS dataset EXEC dataset JCL for loading rvsM
342. x 50 characters I 4 2 Function KEYS Add key s to the key management DD Statements KEYDATA KEYPROOO KEYPUOO0 SYSPRINT KEYPARM Examples Import your own A JOB KEYSIMPT EXE STEPLIB DD KEYDATA DD KEYPROOO DD KEYPUOOO DD SYSPRINT DD KEYPARAM DD UID LOC UID LOC key management dataset VSAM Dataset file name of private key file name of public key program Logfile parameters e f you import a local key pair you have to set the parameters UID and DDNAME twice e f you import a public key of your partner you have to set the parameters PID und DDNAME key pair C PGM DF054K PARM KEYS DSN P390A V2CS 1 LOAD DISP SHR DSN P390A V2CS NEW01 KEYS DISP SHR DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEY PR DISP SHR DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEY PU DISP SHR SYSOUT DDNAME KEYPROOO NEW rvsMVS Installation Manual Appendix l Key Data Utility Program DF054K DDNAME KEYPUOOO NEW Import a public key of your partner A JOB KEYIMPT EXEC PGM DFO54K PARM KEYS STEPLIB DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 LOAD DISP SHR KEYDATA DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEYS DISP SHR KEYPUOO0 DD DSN P390A V2CS NEWO1 KEY PU DISP SHR SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT KEYPARAM DD PID R11 DDNAME KEYPUOOO NEW 1 4 3 Function LIST List keys from the key management DD Statements KEYDATA key management dataset VSAM Dataset SYSPRINT program logfile JO
343. xample for the definition of a switched major node for two switched virtual circuits rvs startparameter MAXSVC 2 kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkk DEFINITION OF A SWITCHED MAJOR NODE FOR rvs X25 MULTI CHANNEL LINK X30A0 THIS DEFINITION INCLUDES SPECIFICATIONS NEEDED FOR TWO SWITCHED VIRTUAL CIRCUITS kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxk H030X03 VBUILD TYPE SWNET P30XODO1 PU ADDR 01 IDBLK 003 003 IS MANDATORY IDNUM 00002 SEE NOTE ON NEXT PAGE BATCH NO DISCNT YES F IRETRY YES MAXDATA 3850 VALUE MUST BE GREATER THAN XBFSIZE SEE rvs STARTPARAMETER CHAPTER 6 1 MAXOUT 1 MAXPATH 0 PACING 1 PASSLIM 1 PUTYPE 1 PUTYPE 1 IS MANDATORY SPAN SP11 VPACING 1 ISTATUS ACTIVE T30XODO1 LU LOCADDR 0 O IS MANDATORY MODETAB LMTrvsX SEE EXAMPLE PACING 1 1 SSCPFM USSSCS SPAN SP11 VPACING 2 FF F FF FH FH F HF HF HF X gt 0X rvsMVS Installation Manual 3 Generations Definitions within Operating System and Control Unit P30XOD02 PU ADDR 01 IDBLK 003 IDNUM 00004 BATCH NO DISCNT YES F IRETRY YES MAXDATA 3850 MAXOUT 1 MAXPATH 0 PACING 1 PASSLIM 1 PUTYPE 1 SPAN SP11 VPACING 1 ISTATUS ACTIVE T30XOD02 LU LOCADDR 0 MODETAB LMTrvsX PACING 1 1 SSCPFM USSSCS SPAN SP11 VPACING 2 AE FF FF HF HF HF HF HF F FF CA Note Coding of IDNUM During session establishment
344. y The sending station has specified a different receive volume remote options see User Manual and the local own station has authorized the sending remote station for this for authorizations see description of the rvs Stations Table within this manual VWACC NO YES Accounting information within VW conventions VWJOBC NO YES VWJOBC YES generated jobnames are within VW conventions Jobnames are generated if e areceived dataset shall be copied from disk to tape e areceived dataset shall be copied to a SYSOUT class atape dataset queued for sending shall be copied from tape to disk before transmission VWJOBC NO the jobname specified in member JOBCARD of the rvs Tables dataset used for the above mentioned copy jobs see chapter 6 will not be changed WSIZE xx 2 n This parameter is used only for the X25 component It specifies the windowsize to be used on packet layer If LLC4 GATE is used the X25 component of rvs uses this function the values for parameters MAXPKTL and VWINDOW of macro X25VCCPT are not used Thus the value for this startparameter of rvs must be the same as the value which is specified for the VWINDOW parameter of the X25VCCPT macro NPSI generation Remark This value must be the same as defined by the national X 25 network company for the multichannel link To support more than one X 25 multi channel links you have to define this parameter for each X 25 multi channel CTCP The
345. y rvsMVS uses a SFID extension SFIX for transfer of partitioned data set information Additionally rvsMVS uses SFID extension SFIX for transfer of partitioned data set information e rvs external Security and Compression Feature Enhancement of the first data block with a rvs header with an eye catcher of RVSF and some hex characters in total 10 characters e User Level Security ULS ULS provides a user to user communication with file permission check e User Separation USP USP provides a remote user RACF check mapping of name possible rvsMVS Installation Manual 1 Introduction This page will be intentionally empty rvsMVS Installation Manual 2 Installation Requirements 2 Installation Requirements This chapter describes the requirements of the environment in which rvsMVS can operate 2 1 Software Requirements rvsMVS runs on any host with operating system MVS XA MVS ESA OS 390 or z OS Dependent on the component TP line s to be used by rvs BSC SNA X 25 LU6 2 TCP IP or any combination the following software is required additional For BSC component e OS VS BTAM this is part of the operating systems MVS and MVS XA or BTAM SP separate program product if operating system MVS XA is used e EP VS emulation of 2701 or 2703 within the control unit For SNA component e ACF VTAM Version 2 or following releases e ACF NCP Version 2 or following releases For X25 component e

Installation Manual - ServiceNet - T

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents